The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Two Supercargoes, by W.H.G. Kingston
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
Title: The Two Supercargoes
Adventures in Savage Africa
Author: W.H.G. Kingston
Illustrator: E.F. Skinner
Release Date: May 16, 2007 [EBook #21490]
Language: English
*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TWO SUPERCARGOES ***
Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
The Two Supercargoes; Adventures in Savage Africa, by W.H.G. Kingston.
________________________________________________________________________
This is rather a standard Kingston book, with adventures this time
shore-based in Africa, which, at the time of the story, the early
nineteenth century, was largely unknown. The two young men sail as
supercargoes, a post which at that time existed, but which later was to
be known a ship's clerk. The job of a supercargo was to be in charge of
where in the vessel each item of cargo was stored, so that on arrival at
its destination it could be quickly and easily found. Of course in
those days, as fifty years ago, items of cargo were individual small
objects, sometimes stowed on pallets, but mostly in casks. A pallet or
a cask would be an individual item.
It wasn't very easy to read this text due to a slightly heavy typeface,
so there may be a few errors, but not, we hope, over the 99.95% odds.
Probably best for that reason as an audiobook.
________________________________________________________________________
THE TWO SUPERCARGOES, ADVENTURES IN SAVAGE AFRICA, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON.
Adventures in Savage Africa.
CHAPTER ONE.
THE OFFICE OF FRANK, TRUNNION & SWAB--HARRY BRACEWELL REPORTS THE
ARRIVAL OF THE "ARROW"--HISTORY OF NICHOLAS SWAB--THE SLAVE TRADE--OUR
FIRM GIVES UP ALL CONNECTION WITH IT--CAPTAIN RODERICK TRUNNION--
SOMETHING ABOUT MYSELF AND FRIENDS--INTERVIEW BETWEEN MR. TRUNNION AND
GODFREY MAGOR, MATE OF THE "ARROW"--AN UNEXPECTED ARRIVAL--A STRANGE
ACCUSATION--SUSPICIONS OF CAPTAIN TRUNNION--MRS. BRACEWELL AND HER
DAUGHTER MARY.
"The `Arrow' has come in, sir, from the Coast of Africa, under charge of
Mr Godfrey Magor, the second mate," I heard Harry Bracewell, one of our
shipping clerks, say, as I was seated on a high stool, pen in hand,
leaning over my desk in the office of Messrs. Crank, Trunnion & Swab,
general merchants, of Liverpool Harry addressed the senior partner, Mr
Peter Crank, who had just then stepped out of his private room with a
bundle of papers in his hand into the counting-house, where I, with a
dozen other clerks, senior and junior, were driving our quills as fast
as we could move them over the paper, or adding up columns of figures,
or making calculations, as the case might be.
As I turned my head slightly, I could see both Mr Crank and Harry.
They afforded a strange contrast. Harry was tall, well-built, had a
handsome countenance, with a pleasant expression which betokened his
real character, for he was as kind, honest, and generous a young fellow
as ever lived--the only son of his mother, the widow of a naval officer
killed in action. She had come to Liverpool for the sake of giving a
home to Harry, who had been for some time in the employment of the firm.
The difference between Mr Crank and Harry was indeed most conspicuous
in their personal appearance. Whereas Harry was tall, Mr Crank was
short and stout; he had a bald head, shining as if it had been carefully
polished, a round face, with a florid complexion, and a nose which was
allowed by his warmest friends to be a snub; but he had a good mouth,
bright blue eyes, often twinkling with humour, which seemed to look
through and through those he addressed, while his brow exhibited a
considerable amount of intellect. Had not he possessed that, he would
not have been at the head of the firm of Crank, Trunnion & Swab.
"Brought home, did you say, by Godfrey Magor? What has happened to
Captain Rig and the first mate?"
"Both died from fever while up the Nunn, as did all hands except himself
and three others. So Mr Magor told me; and the survivors were all so
weak, that he could not have brought the vessel home had he not shipped
six Kroomen. He had also a narrow escape from pirates, who actually
boarded his vessel, when a man-of-war heaving in sight, they made off
without plundering her or killing any one."
"Bless my heart! I'm sorry to hear about Captain Rig's death. The poor
man remained longer up the river than he should have done, no doubt
about that I have over and over again charged the masters of our vessels
to be careful in that respect, but they won't attend to what I say. Let
me see! that makes the fifth who has lost his life during the last two
years. I'm thankful he got clear of the pirates. Those rascals have
long been the greatest pests on that coast. It is time the British
Government should take effectual steps to put a stop to their
depredations by sending a squadron into those seas. Have you brought
the manifest and the other papers with you?"
"Yes, sir," answered Harry, producing them. "Mr Magor will be on shore
himself in an hour or two, when he has seen the vessel made snug, for he
has no one to leave in charge; he himself is still suffering from the
fever, and two of her white crew are in their bunks."
Mr Crank, taking the documents, retired with them into his room, to run
his eye over the list of articles brought by the "Arrow," and to
calculate their present market value. The result I know was
satisfactory. I had afterwards to note down the prices which they
fetched. Merchants who could make so large a percentage on all their
cargoes were certain to grow rich. It was at the cost, however, of the
lives of a great number of human beings; but that was not my employers'
look out, nor did they allow the matter to trouble their consciences.
They could always obtain fresh masters to take charge of their vessels,
and fresh crews to man them.
In a short time Mr Trunnion, who had heard on 'Change of the arrival of
the "Arrow," came in to learn what news she had brought, expecting to
find her master, who was wont, immediately he came on shore, to put in
an appearance at the office. Mr Trunnion expressed himself much
shocked at Captain Rig's death.
"Poor fellow! he used to boast that he was acclimatised, but it is a
proof of the old adage, `that the pitcher which goes often to the well
gets broken at last.' We might have lost a worse man;" and with this
remark Mr Trunnion passed into his room, in which he sat to receive
visitors on private business.
Mr Trunnion, although the second partner, was the youngest in the firm.
He was a good-looking, urbane, well-mannered man, who, if not always
loved by those under him, was much liked and respected in the social
circle in which he moved, he being also one of the magnates of
Liverpool. For my own part, I had reason to like and be grateful to Mr
Swab, the junior member of the firm. He had formerly been a clerk in
the house, but by diligent attention to and a thorough knowledge of
business and strict honesty, he had some years before been made a
partner. To him I felt that I owed all the knowledge I possessed of
commercial affairs, as from my first entrance into the office he took
notice of me, and gave me the instruction I so much required. My chief
friend was Harry Bracewell, who was also a favourite with Mr Swab, and
had received the same instruction from him that I had obtained. Mr
Swab was not at all ashamed of his origin. He used to tell us that he
had risen, not from the gutter, but from the mud, like other strange
animals, having obtained his livelihood in his early days by hunting at
low tide for whatever he could pick up along the shore, thrown overboard
from the lighters or similar vessels unloading at the quays. At length
it was his good fortune to pick a purse out of the mud containing ten
golden guineas, and, as he used to tell us, being convinced that he
should never have a find like it, he resolved to quit his occupation,
for which he had no particular fancy, and endeavour to obtain a
situation where he might have a prospect of rising in the world. Though
he could neither read nor write, he was well aware that those
acquirements were necessary for his advancement, as also that a decent
suit of clothes would greatly contribute to his obtaining a respectable
place. These objects were now within his reach. The most easily
attained was the suit of clothes, and these he bought, with a cap and a
good pair of shoes, at a slopseller's, including three shirts, a
necktie, and other articles of clothing, for the moderate sum of 2
pounds, 13 shillings and 6 pence. He had taken good care not to let the
slopseller know of his wealth; indeed, that fact he kept locked in his
own bosom, as he did his purse in a place in which no one was likely to
discover it. The balance of the ten pounds into which he had broken he
expended in supporting himself while he acquired the first rudiments of
knowledge, with the aid of a friend, the keeper of a second-hand
bookstall, a broken-down schoolmaster, who, strange to say, still
retained a pleasure in imparting instruction to the young. Nicholas
Swab first bought a spelling-book, and then confessed that he should
find it of no use unless Mr Vellum would explain to him the meaning of
the black marks on the pages.
"Then you do not know your letters, my poor boy?" said the old man in a
tone of commiseration.
"No, sir, I don't; but I soon will, if you'll tell them to me," answered
Nicholas in a confident tone.
"Sit down on that stool, and say them after me as I point them out to
you," said Mr Vellum.
With great patience he went over the alphabet again and again.
"Now I want to put them together, sir," said Nicholas, not content with
the extent of the first lesson. All day long he sat with the book
before him, and then took it with him to his home. That home, the abode
of his mother, a widow, with a pension of five shillings a week, which
enabled her to live, although too small to afford subsistence to her
son, was in a small garret up a dark stair in one of the poorest of the
back streets of Liverpool. Nicholas set working away by the flame of a
farthing rushlight, and at dawn he was up again poring over his book.
Old Vellum was so pleased with the progress made by his pupil, that he
continued to give him all the assistance in his power, not only teaching
him to read but to write. In a few weeks young Nicholas could do both
in a very creditable manner. Having thus gained the knowledge he
desired, dressed in a decent suit of clothes, he went round to various
offices in Liverpool offering to fill any vacant situation for which he
might be considered fit. Although he met with numerous rebuffs, he
persevered, and was finally taken into the small counting-house of which
Mr Peter Crank's father was the head. To the firm, through all its
various changes, he had remained attached, and though frequently offered
opportunities of bettering himself, had refused to leave it. "No, no;
I'll stick to my old friends," he always answered; "their interests are
mine, and although I am but a poor clerk, I believe I can forward them."
From the first, during all his leisure moments, of which he had not
many, he continued to study hard, and to improve himself, spending a
portion of his wages in books, which he obtained from Mr Vellum, who
allowed him also the run of his library. He was raised from grade to
grade until he became head clerk, and during the illness of Mr Crank
and the absence of Mr Trunnion, he so well managed the affairs of the
firm, that they felt bound to offer him a partnership in the business,
to the success of which he had so greatly contributed. Notwithstanding
his rise in the social circle, Nicholas Swab continued to be the same
unostentatious, persevering, painstaking man which he had been from the
first--upright in all his dealings, and generous to those who required a
helping hand.
Some of the transactions of the firm would not, it must be confessed,
stand the test of the present code of morality. The slave trade had,
until lately, been lawful, and the firm had engaged in it with as little
hesitation as it would in any other mercantile business. It had been in
the habit of buying negroes in the cheapest market, and disposing of
them in the dearest, without for a moment considering how they were
obtained. When the traffic was pronounced illegal, it withdrew its own
vessels, but still had no hesitation in supplying the means for fitting
out others which it knew were about to proceed to the African coast,
although no particular inquiries were made on the subject. It was not
very long before the time of which I speak that the fact dawned on the
minds of the partners that the traffic was hateful in the sight of God,
as well as in that of a large number of their countrymen, and that it
was the main cause of the cruel wars and miseries unspeakable from which
the dark-skinned children of Africa had long suffered. Being really
conscientious men, they had agreed to abandon all connection with the
traffic, and to employ their vessels in carrying on a lawful trade on
the coast. To do this, however, was not at first so easy as might be
supposed. One of the vessels especially, which they had contributed to
fit out and to supply with goods, although not belonging to them, was
commanded by Mr Trunnion's brother--a Captain Roderick Trunnion, of
whose character I had heard from time to time mysterious hints thrown
out not much to his credit. He occasionally made his appearance at
Liverpool. He seemed to me to be a fine, bold, dashing fellow, ready to
do and dare anything he might think fit. He was like several privateer
captains I had met with, who set their own lives and those of their
followers at slight value, provided they could carry out their
undertakings. He gave, I believe, his brother, Mr Thomas Trunnion, the
partner in our firm, considerable cause for anxiety and annoyance. The
last time he had been on shore, in order to recover his brother's
confidence he endeavoured to make himself agreeable to the other
partners. Mr Swab, however, I know, did not trust him, as he privately
told Harry Bracewell on one occasion. "And don't you," he added; "he is
without principles; he always did what he chose regardless of God or
man. And he doesn't believe in God, or that any man has a grain of
honesty, nor does he, except when it suits him, boast of having any
himself."
Captain Trunnion, however, appeared to have insinuated himself into the
good graces of our senior partner, at whose house he was a frequent
visitor. He had a strong attraction there; for Lucy, Mr Crank's, only
child, was a sweet, amiable, pretty girl, and Captain Trunnion believed
that, could he win her, he should not only obtain a charming wife, but
become possessed, some day or other, of Mr Crank's property. Which
influenced him most I cannot say. All I know is, that he did not make
any progress in the affections of Miss Lucy, for a very good reason,
which he was not long in suspecting--that she had already given her
heart to some one else. That some one was my friend Harry Bracewell
Captain Trunnion had, however, gone away without suspecting who was his
rival.
My father and mother resided in Chester, so that I was received into the
house, as a lodger, of Mrs Bracewell; thus it was that I became more
intimate with Harry than I might otherwise have been. I also had an
opportunity of being constantly in the society of the widow's only
daughter, Mary--a charming little unaffected girl, full of life and
spirits, who treated me as her brother's friend, almost like a brother.
For a long time I also thought only of her as a sister, although,
somehow or other, I began at last to entertain the hope that, when I had
by steady industry obtained the means of making her my wife, she would
not feel it necessary to refuse me; and as my family was a respectable
one, I had no reason to fear that any objection would be raised by Mrs
Bracewell or Harry. Of my own family I need not speak, except of one
member--my brother Charley, who had gone to sea before I entered the
office, and was now a midshipman of some years' standing. He had lately
joined the "Rover" frigate, employed on the African station. Charley
and I had been fast friends and companions, as brothers should be, when
we were together, and when separated we constantly corresponded with
each other. I cannot say that I had any special fondness for mercantile
pursuits, or at all events for the work of an office, having to sit for
ten or twelve hours of the day on a high stool at a desk, but yet I was
thoroughly impressed with the fact that I must gain my own livelihood,
and that by working hard alone could I expect to do so. Had the choice
been given me, I should have preferred a life in the open air, with the
opportunity of travelling about and seeing the world; but my father did
not wish to have more than one son in the navy, and Charley had been
devoted as an offering to Neptune. I was, however, very happy in my
situation. Understanding what I was to do, I took a pleasure in doing
it well; and I spent my evenings happily in the society of Mrs
Bracewell and her son and daughter. We had generally music and singing,
now and then two or three visitors. Occasionally we went out to Mr
Crank's parties and those of other friends, so that our lives were in no
respects dull.
I enter into these details in order that more interest may be taken in
the rest of my narrative than might otherwise have been the case.
About an hour after Harry had reported the arrival of the vessel, as I
was engaged in Mr Trunnion's private room in taking down letters at his
dictation, the mate of the "Arrow" was announced. As Mr Crank was out,
Mr Trunnion desired him to come in and give an account of his voyage.
As I was not desired to quit the room, I continued transcribing the
notes which I had taken down, but I glanced round at the mate as he
entered. His appearance showed that he had suffered from the fever
which had carried off so many of his shipmates. His cheek was pale and
hollow, his eye dull, and his figure emaciated; even his voice sounded
weak and hollow.
"Sit down," said Mr Trunnion in a kind voice, showing that he was
struck by the sickly look of the poor mate. "I should like to hear full
particulars of your voyage. It has been a successful one judging by the
manifest, which I have been looking over, although fatal to so many long
in our employment. You have managed well, too, in bringing home the
`Arrow.' We are well satisfied--I can tell you that at once."
The mate then began an account of the transactions connected with the
vessel from the time of her arrival on the Coast of Africa, the number
of places visited, and the trade transactions at each. They were very
interesting to me I know at the time, but I did not note them. Mr
Magor then described how one after the other the captain and crew died,
until he and three others were alone left. "I doubted indeed whether I
should have been able to bring the vessel home," he continued. "We had
a narrow escape of being captured by a picarooning craft which swept
alongside us during a calm. A number of the crew, headed by their
captain, had actually made their way on board, and having bound me and
three of my men, were proceeding to get off the hatches to take the
cargo out of the hold, when a man-of-war, bringing up a strong breeze
from the south, hove in sight. The pirates on discovering her hurried
on board their own craft, carrying away two of my Kroomen, and casting
off the grapplings with which they had made her fast alongside, got out
their long sweeps and pulled away for their lives. As soon as the
remaining Kroomen had set me and the other white men free, we ran out
our guns and began firing at her. She returned our shot; and as she had
more guns and heavier metal than ours, we judged it prudent not to
follow her. When the breeze came, which it did soon afterwards, she
stood away under all sail before the wind. She showed that she was a
fast craft, for she had almost got out of sight before the man-of-war
came up with us. The latter pursued her, but whether she was overtaken
or not I cannot say, as we continued our voyage towards England, and I
saw no more of either of them. The pirates who had boarded us were of
all nations, Spaniards, Portuguese, and French, and there were several
Englishmen among them. That their leader was one I could swear, for I
heard him speaking English to several of the villains; and what is more,
as he gave me a good opportunity of marking his features while I was
bound to the mainmast, I should remember him were I ever to meet him
again."
"I hope that you may never fall in with him again under similar
circumstances," remarked Mr Trunnion. "Should you do so, he will
probably make you walk the plank before he begins discharging your cargo
into his own craft."
While the mate was narrating his adventures I heard a strange race
speaking in an authoritative tone in the outer office. Suddenly the
door was burst open, and a tall powerful man, dressed in riding-boots,
his clothes bespattered with mud, yet having in other respects a
nautical cut about him, entered the room. Mr Trunnion gazed on him
without speaking.
"What, Tom! don't you know me?" exclaimed the new-comer advancing and
putting out his hand. "My beard has grown, and I have become somewhat
sunburnt since we parted."
"Bless my heart! is it you, Roderick?" exclaimed Mr Trunnion. "I own
that I did not recognise you, and was surprised at the intrusion of a
stranger."
Roderick Trunnion, giving a laugh, threw himself into a chair opposite
his brother, who reassumed his usual cold and dignified demeanour as he
took his seat. From my desk I could observe what was going forward. I
saw the mate start and narrowly scan the countenance of the new-comer
with a look of extreme astonishment, while the latter, who did not
appear to remark him, leaned forward and gazed at his brother, whose
manner seemed to irritate him.
"Where in the world have you come from, Roderick?" asked Mr Trunnion.
"From Falmouth last, where I left the `Vulture' to refit. We met with a
somewhat heavy gale, in which she was fearfully knocked about, and had
we not kept the pumps going she would have foundered to a certainty. As
I wanted to see you and other friends; I took horse and rode night and
day to get here. The business I have got to speak of brooks of no
delay, and is such as you and I can talk about best alone."
Turning round as he spoke, he cast a glance at Mr Magor. For a moment,
it seemed to me that his eye appeared to quail, but he quickly recovered
himself.
"Have you finished your business here?" he asked in a bold tone, looking
at the mate. "If so, you will leave me and your employer alone--for I
presume that you are the master of one of his vessels. And that
youngster--you do not wish him to take down our conversation, I
suppose," he added, first looking at me then round at his brother.
"Really, Roderick, you have been so accustomed to command, that you
forget that you are not on your own quarter-deck," observed Mr
Trunnion, who was evidently annoyed at the authoritative tone assumed by
his brother.
The mate rose and looked first at Mr Trunnion then at Captain Roderick.
"I have met that man before," he said, "and it is my duty to tell you
when and how it was. It was not long ago, on the high seas, when he
boarded the `Arrow' at the head of--"
Mr Trunnion, as the mate spoke, looked very much agitated, and I
naturally fancied that something extraordinary was about to be said.
Captain Roderick alone appeared perfectly cool. Fixing his glance on
the mate, he exclaimed in a loud tone, interrupting him--
"You, my good fellow, may have met me half-a-dozen times for what I know
to the contrary, or half-a-dozen men whom you may mistake for me,
although I cannot say that I ever set eyes on you before. However, go
on and tell Mr Trunnion what I did when you fancy that you saw me, and
I shall then know whether you are mistaken as to my identity."
The mate looked greatly confused.
"I can only hope that I am mistaken, and unless Mr Trunnion desires me,
I shall decline at present stating where, as I believe, I last saw you."
Mr Trunnion was silent for a minute, and seemed lost in thought.
Suddenly looking up he said--
"You have been suffering from fever, Mr Magor, and your recollection of
events, very naturally, is somewhat clouded. A few weeks' quiet and
rest will restore your health. I would advise you not to repeat what
you have just said. I'll send on board and relieve you of charge of the
brig as soon as possible, and you can go to your friends in the
country."
Mr Magor, making a nautical bow to Mr Trunnion, and giving another
glance towards Captain Roderick, left the room.
"Westerton," continued my employer, turning to me, "you have heard all
that has been said, and if it were repeated, although the poor man is
under an hallucination, it might be the cause of disagreeable reports.
You are discreet, I can trust you. Let not a word on the subject escape
your lips. You can now go and finish those letters at your own desk."
I did as I was ordered, and gathering up the papers, followed the mate
out of the room, leaving the two brothers together. What followed, I of
course cannot say. For an hour or more they were closeted together. At
last Captain Roderick came out, and returned to the inn where he had put
up his horse. All I know is, that Mr Trunnion did not invite him to
his house. It seemed to me suspicious, and I could not help thinking
about the matter, and wished that I could have consulted Harry
Bracewell. Two evenings afterwards we went to a party at the house of
Mr Crank. Shortly after we arrived, who should walk in but Captain
Roderick. By the way Mr Crank and Lucy received him, I felt convinced
that Mr Trunnion had said nothing to prejudice the senior partner
against him. He made himself at home as usual, treating Miss Lucy with
great deference, and it seemed to me that he was gaining ground in her
good graces.
His appearance was greatly improved since the day I had seen him in the
counting-house. His face was carefully shaved, and his dress was such
as to set off his well-made active figure. His aim was evidently to
play the agreeable, not only to the young lady of the house, but to all
the ladies present, and with some--especially with the dowagers--he
appeared to be as successful as he could desire. He cast an indifferent
glance now and then at me, as if he had never set eyes on me before, and
appeared perfectly unconscious of the accusation--for such I considered
it--brought against him by Mr Magor. When I observed his apparent
success with Lucy Crank, I felt a greater desire than ever to tell Harry
what I had heard, and to advise him to warn her and her father of what I
believed to be the real character of the man. His brother, I supposed,
from fraternal affection of family pride, had said nothing to his senior
partner to warn him, and, of course, even to Harry I could not venture
to say what I thought about Captain Trunnion. I could only hope that
Lucy would remain as indifferent to him as she had always before
appeared to be, and that he would quickly again return to the "Vulture."
I was surprised, indeed, that he had ventured to be so long absent from
his vessel, as his presence would be necessary while she was refitting.
Perhaps, after all, his statements about her might not be true; she
might not even be at Falmouth, although his mud-bespattered appearance
on his arrival showed that he had ridden a long distance.
CHAPTER TWO.
CAPTAIN TRUNNION APPEARS OPENLY AT LIVERPOOL--HIS ATTENTIONS TO LUCY
CRANK--HER AFFECTION FOR HARRY BRACEWELL--CAPTAIN TRUNNION EXHIBITS HIS
JEALOUSY OF HARRY--SUSPECTING THE CAPTAIN'S EVIL INTENTIONS, I WATCH
OVER HARRY--GODFREY MAGOR PLACED IN COMMAND OF THE "ARROW"--HARRY AND I
APPOINTED SUPERCARGOES--ATTEND TO THE STOWAGE OF THE VESSEL--PREPARE FOR
SAILING--FAREWELL TO LOVED ONES--VOYAGE COMMENCED.
Notwithstanding the very grave suspicion cast on him by the mate of the
"Arrow," Captain Roderick Trunnion did not immediately quit Liverpool,
as I supposed he would have done. He was, as far as I could judge, not
on friendly terms with his brother, as he lived at an inn, although
there was ample room for him at Mr Trunnion's house, where he seldom
went, nor did he again appear at the office. I met him, however,
frequently walking about Liverpool, dressed in shoregoing clothes,
booted and spurred, and carrying a riding-whip in his hand.
Notwithstanding, I should have known him at a glance to be a seaman. I
found also that he very frequently called at Mr Crank's residence at
times when he well knew that the old gentleman would be at his
counting-house. I did not suppose, however, that he received any
encouragement from Miss Lucy, but he always had some excuse for paying a
visit, either to show some curiosity which he said he had brought from
abroad, or to leave a book or other articles which he had obtained for
her. The fact was, that he had got into the good graces of Miss Deborah
Crank, Mr Crank's maiden sister, who resided with him to look after
Miss Lucy and keep his house in order. I met the Captain there at two
or three evening parties to which the Bracewells and I were invited, and
on each occasion he was evidently paying court to the young lady. When
not with her, he was making himself agreeable to Miss Deborah.
Harry appeared to be in no way jealous or unhappy, which he would have
been had he thought that Captain Roderick had the slightest chance of
success.
"We understand each other," he said, "and she has assured me that she
does not like him, though she cannot be rude to him while her father and
aunt invite him to the house."
I did not like to make Harry unhappy by saying that I was not quite so
certain about the matter as he was; at the same time I longed to be able
to warn Miss Lucy of the character of the roan. What surprised me was
that Mr Trunnion should not have spoken to Mr Crank, or that the
latter should not have thought it strange that Captain Roderick never
came to the counting-house.
Probably Mr Trunnion was influenced by fraternal feelings in not
warning his partner of his suspicions regarding his brother's character.
I did not, however, long entertain fears of Miss Lucy's affection for
Harry, from a circumstance which he told me. It was a holiday, and he
had arranged to accompany her and her aunt on a visit to some friends in
the country. The coach was at the door waiting for Miss Deborah, who
was upstairs, not yet having finished her toilet, while Lucy, who had
finished dressing, was seated in the drawing-room with Harry by her
side. Suddenly the door opened, the young people expecting to see Miss
Deborah enter. What, therefore, was their surprise when Captain
Roderick talked into the room. He stood for a moment gazing fiercely at
Harry.
"What business have you here?" he exclaimed in a voice hoarse with
passion.
Harry wisely did not answer him; but Lucy, looking up and holding
Harry's hand, said quietly--
"Mr Bracewell has come to escort my aunt and me into the country, and I
have good reason for the annoyance I feel at the question you have put
to him. My father is from home and will not return for some time, so I
cannot invite you to wait for him."
Captain Roderick was not a man to be abashed even by the way Miss Lucy
had addressed him. Taking a turn or two in the room, he waited--so
Harry thought--expecting Miss Deborah to come down-stairs and invite him
to accompany them. Lucy, suspecting his purpose, took Harry's arm and
whispered, "Let us go down to the carriage."
Miss Deborah, happening to look out of her window, saw them get in, and
being just then ready, she joined them without going into the
drawing-room. Lucy, with much presence of mind, just before the
carriage drove off, desired the servant, in a low voice which her aunt
did not hear, to see Captain Roderick out of the house.
Whatever Captain Roderick might before have supposed, he now discovered
to a certainty that Harry Bracewell was his rival. When I heard the
account just given, believing that the mate was right in his suspicions,
I felt sure that, should he have an opportunity, he would revenge
himself on my friend. I told Harry all I could to warn him. I said
that I believed Captain Roderick was a bad, unprincipled man, whom no
fear of consequences or any right feeling would restrain from committing
an act of violence if he thought that it would further his object.
Harry merely laughed, and observed, "When he finds that he has no chance
of cutting me out he'll take himself off. I should think his brother,
who is so strict and correct in his conduct, would be very glad to get
him away from Liverpool."
Knowing what dreadful deeds had been done by men of ill-regulated minds
influenced by jealousy, I felt seriously anxious about Harry, lest
Captain Roderick should find means to revenge himself. Had I been able
to explain the cause of the dread I had of him I might have convinced
Harry of his danger, and induced him to be careful when going abroad at
night; but I could only tell him that I suspected the man, and that I
did not like him: Harry, however, though he had a true regard for me,
either thought that I was mistaken or needlessly alarmed.
Sometimes I thought of telling my fears to Mr Trunnion, and asking
permission from him to warn Harry Bracewell; but I knew that he would
feel highly offended were I to speak on the subject to him. I
therefore, whenever Harry went out, made some excuse for accompanying
him, especially when he went to Mr Crank's house. On those occasions,
instead of going in, I used to walk about in the neighbourhood, or sit
down in an archway where the dark shadow concealed me from the view of
passers-by. On two different evenings I saw a person pass whom I felt
sure by his figure was Captain Roderick. The second time, when he
stopped before Mr Crank's house, the light of the moon falling on his
face revealed his features to me, and convinced me that I was not
mistaken. He was dressed as I first saw him at the counting-house, and
he had a hanger by his side, and a brace of pistols in his belt, with a
pair of riding-boots on, as if prepared for a journey.
Fearing that Harry might come out, and that his rival might attack him,
I went up as if I was going to knock at the door; instead of which I
stood in the porch, where, concealed, I could watch Captain Roderick.
Perhaps he suspected that I had recognised him; for after waiting a
minute, and looking up at the windows, he moved away, and I lost sight
of him. I waited until Harry came out, and then taking his arm, I
hurried him along in an opposite direction to that which he would
naturally have followed as the shortest way home.
"Why are you going by this road?" he asked.
"I will tell you presently," I answered, continuing at a quick pace.
"Don't ask questions just now, for I really cannot answer you."
Harry did as I wished, and we therefore exchanged few word until we
reached home.
"Now," I said, "I will tell you. I am confident that Captain Roderick
was waylaying you, and would either have sought a quarrel, or perhaps
have cut you down with his hanger, or shot you."
Harry was at length inclined to believe that I was right, but still he
added, "Perhaps, after all, he maybe going away, and only came to take a
last look at the house where Lucy lives; for, from what she tells me he
said to her, I cannot help thinking that he must be desperately
enamoured."
"If he does go, well and good; but if he remains, I tell you, Harry,
that I do not consider your life safe," I remarked. "I must beg your
mother and sister to lock you up, and not let you go out at night until
the fellow has gone. He is a villain!" I repeated, in my eagerness
almost revealing what I was bound to keep secret.
After this I saw no more of Captain Roderick. Whether or not he had
left Liverpool I was uncertain, but I hoped he had gone. A few days
afterwards, Mr Magor, the mate of the "Arrow," came to the office,
where he was received in a very friendly way by Mr Swab. He looked
completely changed. The sickly hue had left his cheek, and he was stout
and hearty, with the independent bearing of a seaman.
"I am glad to see you looking so well, Mr Magor," said Mr Swab. "My
partners and I have been talking the matter over; and from the way you
brought the `Arrow' home, and the character you received from her late
master, we are resolved to offer you the command."
"Thank you, sir. I am proud of your approval; and I may venture to say,
as far as navigating a vessel, or handling her in fine weather or foul,
I am as competent as most men. I cannot boast, however, of my abilities
as a trader, as I am no hand at keeping accounts. In that respect, I do
not think that I should do you Justice."
"Well, well, Captain Magor; we cannot always expect to find a man like
Captain Rig, who combined both qualifications. We must therefore send a
supercargo, or perhaps two, to help you; and I hope, with their
assistance, that you will not be compelled to remain long up any of the
rivers, and run the risk of losing your own life or of having your crew
cut off by fever. You must try and be away from the coast before the
sickly season sets in. It is by remaining up the rivers during the
rains and hot weather that so many people die."
"As to the hot weather, I don't know when it is not hot on the coast,"
observed Captain Magor, for so in future I may call him; "but I am ready
to brave any season in your service. And I again thank you, sir, for
the offer you make me, which I gladly accept, provided you supply me
with the assistance you see I require."
"We will try to do that," said Mr Swab. "Now, without loss of time,
look out for a couple of good men as mates, and the best crew you can
obtain, and get the vessel fitted out without delay. I will accompany
you on board and place you in command."
This was said in the outer office, where Henry and I overheard it.
"I wonder to whom they will offer the berths," said Harry to me. "If I
thought that it would advance me in the house, and enable me the sooner
to speak to Mr Crank, I for one should be ready to accept an offer,
although it would be a sore trial to go away. I had never dreamed of
doing so; but yet, if I was asked, I would not refuse, as, of course, it
could not fail to give one a lift; whereas, should I refuse, I should
fall in the estimation of the partners."
The very next day Mr Crank desired Harry and me to come into his inner
room, and he then told us, what we already knew, that the firm intended
to send out two supercargoes, who might assist each other, and asked if
we would go, promising us each a share in the profits of the voyage, and
advancement in the house on our return. "I do not hide from you that
there is danger from the climate, and in some places from the natives;
but the vessel will be well armed, and you must exert all the judgment
and discretion you possess. You are both young and strong, and have
never tampered with your constitutions, so that you are less likely to
succumb to the climate than the generality of seamen." He then entered
fully into the subject, telling us how to act under various
circumstances, and giving us full directions for our guidance.
We did not appear very elated at the offer, but accepted it, provided
Harry's mother and my parents did not object. "Tell them all I have
said," observed Mr Crank, "and let me know to-morrow, that should you
refuse our offer I may look out for two other young men who have no
family ties to prevent them from going. Our interests should, I think,
be considered in the matter."
I judged by the tone of the senior partner's voice that he would be
offended should we refuse his offer, and we therefore made up our minds
to press the matter with those who had to decide for us. Of course we
talked it over as we walked home that evening. We both fancied that we
should be absent little more than five months, and that we should come
back with our purses well filled, or, at all events, with the means of
filling them.
Mrs Bracewell and Mary were very unhappy when Harry placed the state of
the case before them; but they acknowledged that he ought to act as the
firm wished. My parents, to whom I wrote, expressed themselves much in
the same way, only entreating that I would come and pay them a visit
before starting. As soon as I received their letter I placed it in the
hands of Mr Crank, who seemed well pleased.
"You will not have cause to regret going, as far as we are concerned,"
he observed; "as for the rest, we must leave that to Providence."
Harry and I had, of course, been very often on board vessels, and made
several trips down the Mersey, returning in the pilot-boat, but neither
of us had ever been at sea. It was necessary that we should both see
the cargo stowed, and be acquainted with the contents of every bale. As
soon as it was stowed the brig would sail. I therefore hastened over to
the neighbourhood of Chester to pay my promised visit to my family. "I
shall be gone only five or six months," I said cheerfully, fully
believing that such would be the case. "I will take good care of
myself, depend upon that. I won't trust the black fellows, and will
never sleep on shore."
On my return I found the vessel nearly ready to take in cargo. Harry
and I were employed from morning until night in the warehouse, examining
and noting the goods. We then both went on board, one remaining on deck
to book them as they were hoisted in, the other going below to see them
stowed away, so that we might know where each bale and package was to be
found. Captain Magor was also on board assisting us, as were his two
mates, Tom Sherwin and Ned Capstick, both rough, honest hands, as far as
I could judge, who had been chosen by the master simply because they
were good seamen and bold fellows in whom he could trust. While we
stood by, notebooks in hand, it was their business to stow away the
various packages; and as we were together many hours every day, we
became pretty well acquainted before we sailed. We had a few hours left
after the cargo was on board and the hatches fastened down.
I should have said I had made all the inquiries I could for Captain
Roderick, but could hear nothing of him, nor did he ever come near Mr
Crank's house after he knew I saw him waiting at the door. I had
another reason for supposing that he had gone. Mr Trunnion had
regained his usual spirits, and looked as cheerful as he did before his
brother's appearance.
"You have acted discreetly, Westerton," said Mr Trunnion to me one day
when I was alone with him in his private room. "Whether Captain Magor
was right or not in the fearful accusation he brought against that
unhappy man. I know not. The `Vulture' has, I trust, long since
sailed. I wish you to understand that, although she was once our
vessel, she does not now belong to us, and I need not say how I fear she
is employed."
I was pleased to receive this commendation from my principal. I merely
replied that I hoped to be always able to give him satisfaction in
whatever way he might be pleased to employ me. He shook hands with me
warmly on parting. "You will receive full written directions from the
firm for your guidance while on the coast, and I hope that we shall see
you and Bracewell back again well and hearty in a few months with a full
cargo. I have great confidence in Captain Magor, into whose character,
since he went to sea, we have made minute inquiries, and you will find
him a bold and sagacious seaman, and an obliging and agreeable
companion."
Before I left the counting-house, Mr Swab called me into his little
den, into which he was wont to retire whenever he had any private
business to transact, although he generally sat in the outer office,
that he might keep an eye on the clerks and see that there was no
idling.
"My dear boy," he said in a kind tone, "I have had a talk with Harry,
and now I want to speak with you, and I'll say to you what I said to
him: Work together with a will; do not let the slightest feeling of
jealousy spring up between you, and give and take. If he is right one
time, you'll be ready to follow him the next; while, if your opinion
proves correct, he will be ready to follow you. I am sure you will both
act as you consider best for the interest of the firm; and remember
there is One above who sees you, and you must do nothing which He
disapproves of--your conscience will tell you that. You are to be
engaged in a lawful traffic. If carried on fairly, it must of necessity
tend to advance the interest of the Africans. We did them harm enough
formerly when we were engaged in the slave trade, although I for one
didn't see it at the time, and was entirely ignorant of the horrors it
inflicted on the unfortunate natives. If I thought at all, I thought
they exchanged barbarism for civilisation; and what are called the
horrors of the middle passage were not so great in those days as they
are now, when the traffic has become unlawful. We had roomy vessels,
the slaves were well-fed and looked after; and the master had no fear of
being chased by a man-of-war, so that they could wait in harbour when
the weather was threatening, and run across the Atlantic with a
favourable breeze. You will very likely see something of the business,
and hear more of it while you are up the rivers; but you must in no way
interfere, either to help a slaver by supplying her with goods,
provisions, or water, or by giving information to the man-of-war of her
whereabouts, unless the question is asked, and you will then tell the
truth. And now about your personal conduct. You must do all you can to
keep your health. Be strictly sober. Do not expose yourself to the
heat by day nor to the damp air by night, which is, I understand, more
likely to prove injurious than even the sun's rays. Never lose your
temper with the natives, or any one else, for that matter; and, from
what I can learn, you are often likely to be tried. Many people fancy
they show their spirit by losing their temper; in reality they always
give an opponent an advantage over them, and the negroes are quick
enough to perceive that. Do not imagine them fools because they do not
understand your language. Indeed, I might say, as a golden rule, never
hold too cheap the person with whom you are bargaining or an enemy with
whom you are engaged in fighting. You will, of course, be very exact in
all your accounts, and endeavour to obtain such information as you
possibly can from all directions likely to prove of further use to the
firm. Now, my dear boy, farewell. I pray that you and Harry may be
protected from the dangers to which you will be exposed."
The worthy man said much more to the same purpose. The "Arrow" had, in
the meantime, hauled out into the stream, and Harry and I went on board
that evening, as she was to sail at daybreak, the tide being fair, the
next morning. Mrs Bracewell and Mary accompanied us, very naturally
wishing to see the last of us; and just as we were setting out, Lucy
Crank arrived, greatly to Harry's satisfaction.
"Papa did not object to my going, and I thought that Mrs Bracewell and
Mary would require some one to cheer them up," she said.
Mrs Bracewell smiled, for Lucy did not look as if she was very well
capable of doing that. She had evidently been crying, although she had
done her best to dry her tears.
Just as we were at the water's edge, Mr Swab joined us, remarking as he
did so, "My partners are not able to come. I wanted to have a few more
words with Captain Magor, so that I shall have the satisfaction of
escorting you ladies back." I suspected that, in the kindness of his
heart, the latter was his chief object.
"Thank you," said Mrs Bracewell; "we shall be glad of your protection.
We wish to see Harry's and Mr Westerton's cabin, and the brig, now that
she is ready for sea, so that we may picture them to ourselves when they
are far away."
The evening was serene, the water smooth as glass, the slight breeze
blowing down the river, being insufficient to enable us to stem the
flood tide, which had then begun to make up, or we should at once have
sailed. Boats were plying backwards and forwards between the shore and
the various vessels which lay in that much-frequented river. Some, like
the "Arrow," ready for sea; others only just arrived, or taking cargo on
board from lighters. They were either bound to or had come from all
parts of the world, the African traders perhaps predominating; but there
were not a few either going to or coming from the West Indies, with
which Liverpool had a considerable commerce. There were South Sea
whalers, high black vessels, with boats hoisted up on either side, and
fast-sailing craft running up the Mediterranean, besides innumerable
coasters. Indeed, Liverpool had become a successful rival of Bristol,
hitherto the chief commercial port of the kingdom.
The ladies were well pleased with our little berths off the main cabin,
for Captain Magor had done his best to make them comfortable. The cabin
was well fitted, with a mahogany table, a sofa at the upper end, and two
easy-chairs. A swinging lamp was suspended above us, while the bulkhead
in the fore part was ornamented with muskets, pistols, and cutlasses
ranged in symmetrical order. The brig carried seven guns, three on each
side, and one long gun, which could be trained fore or aft to serve as a
bow or stern chaser, while all told she had thirty hands, besides Harry
and me; so that we were well able to cope with any ordinary enemy we
were likely to meet with, either pirate or Frenchman, Spaniard or
Hollander. The captain had prepared tea on board, or rather supper.
Mr Swab did his best to keep up the spirits of the party--which poor
Lucy certainly failed in doing--by telling stories or cracking jokes,
though he soon gave up the attempt when he saw none of us responded.
Indeed, I must confess that both his jokes and stories were stale, and
it might be added "flat and unprofitable." They did not flow naturally
from him. At length he discovered that the time was passing on; the
shades of evening were already stealing over the broad surface of the
magnificent stream. The boat belonging to the firm had hauled up
alongside, and Harry and I helped the ladies into her, Mr Swab
following, and giving each of us a hearty shake of the hand. As the
boat rowed away they waved an adieu with their handkerchiefs, which
before they were out of sight all three applied to their eyes, and even
then I could distinguish Mr Swab frequently blowing his nose with his
scarlet bandana.
Neither Harry nor I slept very soundly; we had too much to think about
to allow "nature's soft nurse," as the poet calls it, to visit our
eyelids.
The boatswain's call roused up all hands. Quickly dressing, we were on
deck. The dawn was just breaking in the eastern sky, from which
direction there came a gentle breeze. The pilot was on board, the
anchor hove up, the tide was making down, sail after sail was set, and
just as there was light sufficient to enable us to see our way, the
brig, under a cloud of white canvas, was standing down the Mersey.
"God bless you all! A prosperous voyage, and a safe and happy return!"
was uttered by the pilot, as, having seen us clear of the sandbanks at
the mouth of the river, he lowered himself into his boat and paddled off
to his cutter, which had accompanied us. We were now left to our own
resources, and before evening we were standing down the Irish Channel
with a brisk breeze on the larboard tack.
CHAPTER THREE.
MY SHIPMATES--TOM TUBBS THE BOATSWAIN--SIGHT A SUSPICIOUS CRAFT--ALTER
OUR COURSE TO AVOID HER--CHASED--A HEAVY SQUALL--A THICK MIST--WE HOPE
TO ESCAPE--THE STRANGER REAPPEARS--NIGHT COMES ON AND WE LOW SIGHT OF
HER--ONCE MORE THE STRANGER IS SEEN IN HOT CHASE--OPENS FIRE--DESPERATE
FIGHT--WE ATTEMPT TO RAKE THE ENEMY--HE FRUSTRATES IT--THE ENEMY HOISTS
THE PIRATE FLAG--BOARDS US--OUR CREW OVERCOME--THE CAPTAIN AND
BOATSWAIN, HARRY AND I, FIGHT DESPERATELY--CAPTAIN TRUNNION APPEARS--
SPARES OUR LIVES--DREADFUL STATE OF THE DECK--TOM, HARRY, AND I TAKEN ON
BOARD THE "VULTURE"--CAPTAIN MAGOR ORDERED TO NAVIGATE THE "ARROW" INTO
THE SHERBRO--THE VESSELS PART COMPANY.
Harry and I soon got our sea-legs, for although when we sailed the
weather was fine, before we were well clear of the Irish Channel it
began to blow fresh, and a heavy sea ran, which tumbled the vessel about
not a little. We both quickly made the acquaintance of the officers and
crew, for we did not consider it beneath our dignity as supercargoes to
talk to our ship mates of lower rank. We were well repaid by the
confidence they bestowed upon us, and the histories of their lives and
adventures which they narrated. Although rough in their ways, they
possessed many of the best qualities in human nature. The mates were,
as I before said, good steady men, fair navigators, who could be trusted
on all occasions, and had been chosen for these qualifications by
Captain Magor, to whom they had long been known. Our chief friend was
Tom Tubbs, the boatswain. Tom would have risen to a higher rank, but he
was destitute of the accomplishments of reading and writing, though
having to some purpose studied the book of nature, he possessed more
useful knowledge than many of his fellow-men. He, like Tom Bowling, was
the darling of the crew; for although he wielded his authority with a
taut hand, he could be lenient when he thought it advisable, and was
ever ready to do a kind action to any of his shipmates. He could always
get them to do anything he wanted; for, instead of swearing at them, he
used endearing expressions, such as "My loves," "My dear boys," "My
charming lads." Thus, "My darlings," he would sing out, "be smart in
handling that fore-topgallantsail," or "Take down two reefs in the
topsails, my cherubs," or when setting studding-sails, he would sing
out, "Haul away, my angels," or again, when shortening sail, "Clew up--
haul down, my lovely dears." He varied his expressions, however,
according to the urgency of the case. If more speed was required, the
more endearing were his words. I won't undertake to say that he did not
sometimes rap out words of a very different signification, but that was
only in extreme cases, when all others seemed to fail, or he had
exhausted his vocabulary; but the men did not mind it a bit, for it only
showed them that they must exert all their strength and activity if the
masts were to be saved or the ship preserved from capsizing, or any
other catastrophe prevented. The men were well aware of the motive
which induced him to use strong expressions. We had two black men, who,
having long served on board merchant vessels, spoke English pretty well.
One of them, called Quambo, acted as steward; the other, Sambo, being
ship's cook, spent a good portion of his time in the caboose, from which
he carried on a conversation on either side with the men who happened to
be congregated there. He, as well as Quambo, had to do duty as a
seaman, and active fellows they were, as good hands as any of the crew.
Sambo, besides his other accomplishments, could play the fiddle, and in
calm weather the merry tones of his instrument would set all the crew
dancing, making even Tom Tubbs shuffle about out of sight of the
officers; for it would have been derogatory, he considered, to have been
seen thus conducting himself in public. We had an Irishman, a
Scotchman, three Finns, and a Portuguese, who was generally known as
"Portinggall." The captain and the rest were Englishmen, two of whom
had seen better days. One had been a schoolmaster and the other a
lawyer's clerk. There was also a runaway from home of gentle birth, but
who had so long mixed with rough characters, that not a trace of the
good manners he once possessed remained by him.
We had got into the latitude of the Cape de Verde islands, and were
looking out for the African coast, the wind being about east, when about
two hours after noon the look-out at the masthead shouted, "A sail in
sight on the larboard bow."
On hearing this, the first mate, with a glass slung over his shoulder,
went aloft to have a look at the stranger. He was sometime there, and
when he returned on deck I thought by his countenance that he did not
like her appearance.
"She's ship rigged, going free, and standing this way, sir," he said to
the captain; "and if we keep on our present course she will be within
hail of us within a couple of hours at furthest. She may be a
man-of-war cruiser, or an enemy's privateer, or an honest trader; but
were she that, I don't see why she should be standing this way, unless
she thinks the wind will shift, and she wishes to get a good offing from
Cape de Verde. Or else she may be one of the picarooning craft which we
have heard of on this coast, although it has never been my ill luck to
fall in with them."
"But it has been mine; and though I had the good fortune to get clear of
the rascal, I never wish to meet with one of her class again; and so, in
case yonder craft should be of that character, or an enemy's privateer,
we shall do well to stand clear of her," said Captain Magor; "and
although we may lose a day or two, that will be better than running the
risk of being captured or sent to the bottom. All hands make sail--up
with the helm--square away the yards. Rig out the studding-sail booms,
Mr Sherwin," he added, addressing the first mate as soon as the ship
was before the wind.
The boatswain sounded his whistle. "Be smart there, my sweet lads," he
cried out. "Haul away, my lovely cherubs, on the starboard
studding-sail halyards. Belay all that, my charmers;" and so he went on
whistling and shouting, until we had studding-sails extended below and
aloft on either side, and both royals set, and were running along at the
rate of some seven or eight knots an hour before a light breeze.
Harry and I on all occasions lent a hand when we thought we could be of
use, and Tom did not fail to bestow his approving remarks upon us. The
first mate now went aloft to ascertain whether the stranger had again
altered her course, or whether she was standing on as before, in which
case we hoped to run her out of sight, when we could again haul on the
wind. He remained some time aloft. When he came down he looked even
grave than before.
"It is as I feared, sir. The fellow has clapped on all sail and is
standing after us. It is a question which has the fastest pair of
heels. If we can keep well ahead until nightfall, we may then alter our
course and get clear of her."
"Perhaps, after all, she is only a British man-of-war, which takes us
for a slaver, or perhaps for an enemy's cruiser; for the `Arrow,' I
flatter myself, doesn't look like an ordinary trader," observed Captain
Magor.
"That may be, sir," answered the mate, "but we are doing the wisest
thing to keep out of her way; and, as you said, it's better to do that
and lose a day or two, than be snapped up by an enemy." The captain
ordered all hands to remain on deck at their stations, ready to shorten
sail at a moment's notice. I saw him frequently look astern, not so
much at the stranger as at the appearance of the clouds.
"Do you think she is coming up with us, Captain Magor?" I asked.
"No doubt about that, though she is carrying less sail than we are. She
has got a stronger breeze, and I am watching lest the wind should come
down on us harder than our sticks can stand."
A few minutes afterwards, as I moved to the fore part of the
quarter-deck, where the boatswain was standing, the captain cried out,
"All hands shorten sail!"
In an instant Tom's whistle was at his mouth, and didn't he stamp and
shout.
"In with the studding-sails, my lovely lads; let fly topgallant sheets,
my sweet angels. Haul down, trice up, my pretty boys." Though what
between the orders issued by the captain and mates, and repeated by him,
with the howling of the wind and the whistling of his shrill pipe, the
rattling and creaking of the blocks, and the fluttering of the sails, it
was difficult for ears unnautical to comprehend the actual words
uttered. All to me seemed hubbub and confusion. The men flew here and
there, some going aloft, while others came tramping along the deck with
the ropes. Even Captain Magor and the mates were pulling and hauling.
Harry and I caught hold of the ropes they gave us, and ran along with
them to gather in the fluttering canvas, which seemed as if it would be
blown to shreds before it could be secured. As it was, a fore-royal was
carried away and a studding-sail boom was snapt off. Before we had time
to stow the lighter canvas the squall came down thick and strong on us.
The order was given to clew up the courses and take a reef in the
topsails. The wind, though coming off the land, quickly beat the ocean
into wild tossing waves, through which the brig dashed forward with
lessened sail, yet still with increased speed. A thick misty
appearance, caused by a fine impalpable sand brought off the land by the
squall, soon hid the stranger from sight. "It's an ill wind that blows
nobody good," observed the mate; "and I hope we shall be in luck, and
get out of the way of that fellow; I don't like his looks, that I
don't."
What Captain Magor thought about the matter he did not say. He kept the
brig away, running as before, which showed that he considered the
stranger was still in pursuit of us. Harry and I looked out for her,
but she was nowhere to be seen.
"Perhaps the squall took her unawares and carried away her masts; if so,
and she is an enemy, we may thank the wind for the service it has
rendered us," observed the first mate.
"There's little chance of that, I fear," said Captain Magor. "When it
clears up again we shall see her all ataunto, or I am much mistaken."
We all continued looking out anxiously over the taffrail, while the brig
ploughed her way through the fast rising seas, which hissed and foamed
around her.
The captain paced the deck, now looking aft, now aloft, waiting for the
moment when he could venture to make sail again. The men stood with
their hands on the halyard, ready to hoist away at the expected order,
for all on board knew the importance of keeping ahead of the stranger
should she be what we suspected. Still the atmosphere remained charged
with dust off the coast, which, as the rays of the sun fell upon it,
assumed a yellowish hue. At any moment, however, it might dissolve, and
already it had sunk lower than when it first came on. Before long we
had evidence that the captain's surmise was correct, for just over the
thick bank astern we caught sight through our glasses of a fine
perpendicular line against the sky, which he asserted were the royal
masts of the stranger, with the royals still furled. If he was right--
and of that there appeared little doubt--she must have gained rapidly on
us. The best we could hope for was that the mist would continue until
nightfall and shroud us from her sight. The setting sun, it should be
understood, cast its light upon her masts, while ours were still in the
shade. We were doomed, however, to disappointment; suddenly the mist
cleared off, and the bright rays of the sun exposed to view the topsails
and courses of our pursuer.
"We may still keep ahead of her, and when night comes on give her the
slip," observed Captain Magor; "if not, we will fight her. The men, I
hope, will stand to their guns, and show that they are British seamen.
It will be a disgrace to knock under to piratical villains, such as I
fear are the crew of yonder craft."
"The men are staunch, I'll answer for that," observed Mr Serwin.
"Tubbs has had a talk with them to try their tempers, and he is as true
a fellow as ever stepped."
"That he is; and if you and I and the second mate should be killed, he
will fight the ship as long as a stick is standing," answered the first
mate, showing his appreciation of the boatswain's character. Harry and
I, as we walked the deck, agreed that we would fight to the last, though
we heartily wished that we might escape the stern necessity. Before
long the captain shouted--
"Shake out the reefs in the fore-topsail, my lads."
The topmen flew aloft and the sail was hoisted. Soon afterwards the
captain gave the order to set the fore-topgallantsail.
"We must get preventer braces on it," he observed to the first mate; "it
won't do to run the risk of carrying away the spar."
The additional ropes were quickly secured by the active crew. As they
stood aft watching the sail, it seemed as if at any moment it would
carry away the mast and spar, as, bulging out with the strong breeze, it
strained and tugged in its efforts to free itself, but the sticks were
tough and the ropes which held them sound, and with increased speed the
brig flew before the gale. Two of the best hands were at the wheel, for
any carelessness in steering might in an instant have produced a serious
disaster. The effects of the additional sail were satisfactory, as the
stranger was no longer gaining on us, as she had hitherto done. Still,
as I felt the violent blows given by the seas, now on one quarter, now
on the other, the brig now pitching into a hollow ahead, now rising
rapidly over another sea, then rolling from side to side, I feared that
the masts must be jerked out of her. Harry and I found it scarcely
possible to walk the deck without being tossed about like shuttlecocks,
so that our only resource was to hold fast to the stanchions, or, when
we wanted to move, to catch hold of the bulwarks. As night approached,
however, the wind began to decrease, and the sea, having no great
distance to run, went down. Whether this was likely to be an advantage
to us or not was now to be proved. As the last rays of the sun ere he
set glanced horizontally across the ocean, they fell on the stranger's
canvas down to the foot of her courses. Still our stout-hearted captain
did not despair.
"We will do what we can to give the fellow the go-by, and may outwit
him, clever as he thinks himself," he said, laughing. "Aloft there, and
set the fore-royal," he shouted; and this being done, the foretopmast
studding-sails were again rigged out, thus exhibiting a broad sheet of
canvas to the eyes of our pursuer, which would probably make him suppose
that we intended to continue our course directly before the wind. The
sun had now sunk, but we could yet distinguish through the fast
gathering gloom the sail astern. Captain Magor now ordered the mainsail
to be hauled out, and the main-topsail and maintop-gallant-sail to be
set. By the time this was done, not even the outlines of the stranger
could be perceived astern.
"Take in studdin'-sails," cried the captain.
These by the united efforts of the crew, wildly fluttering, were hauled
down without a spar being lost. The fore-royal was then furled.
"Starboard the helm," was the next order given. "Haul on the starboard
fore and main braces," he then sang out, and the brig was brought to the
wind on the larboard tack. No sooner did she feel its power, as the
yards were braced sharp up, the tacks hauled down, and the braces and
bowlines sheeted home, than she heeled over to the force of the wind,
which was still considerable, although it did not appear to when we were
running before it. "If the stranger does not discover our change of
course, she will be well away to leeward before morning, and we shall
see no more of her," said Captain Magor, addressing Harry and me. "I
don't want to expose the lives of you young gentlemen to danger, or to
risk the loss of our cargo, I daresay you felt not a little anxious, but
you may turn in and sleep soundly, with the prospect of making the coast
of Africa in another day or two at furthest. We will have some food
first though, for you have been on deck ever since dinner; you'll be
hungry. Quambo!" he shouted, "let's have some supper on table as soon
as possible."
"Him dare 'ready, captain," answered the black steward, "only wait de
young gen'lemen to cut him."
The captain, leaving the deck in charge of the first mate, descended
with us, and did ample justice to the plentiful meal Quambo had spread
on the table. The captain, before going on deck again, advised us to
turn in. We were, however, too anxious to do so, notwithstanding his
assertions that all was likely to go well, and we therefore soon joined
him on deck. We found him looking out over the larboard quarter, the
direction in which the stranger was most likely to be seen. Although we
swept the ocean with our glasses round two-thirds of the horizon, she
was nowhere visible. At length, trusting that the captain really was
right, with our minds tolerably relieved, we went below and turned into
our berths. Still, though I slept, I could not get the thought of the
pirate out of my mind. I dreamed that I was again on deck, and that I
saw our pursuer, like some monster of the deep, her canvas towering high
above our own towards the sky, close to us. Then she poured forth her
broadsides, her shot with a crashing, rending sound passing across our
deck. Still we remained unharmed, and I heard the captain say, "Give it
them again, my lads--give it them again." Our crew sprung to their
guns; but there came another broadside from the enemy which carried away
our masts and spars, pierced our bulwarks, knocking our boats to pieces.
Still Harry and I stood on deck uninjured, and our crew appeared is
undaunted and active as before. I have often heard of people "fighting
their battles o'er again;" but in this instance I fought mine before it
occurred. I was awakened by the stamping sound of the feet of the watch
overhead as they ran along with the halyards; then came the cry, "All
hands on deck." I jumped out of my berth, and found Harry slipping into
his clothes. No one else was in the cabin. We hurried on deck, where
the officers and the watch below with the idlers had assembled. I was
surprised to find the brig once more before the wind and the crew
engaged in making all sail. The captain was standing aft issuing his
orders, while the mates and boatswain were aiding the men in pulling and
hauling. We joined them without asking questions. Some of the crew
were aloft setting the top-gallant-sails and royals. I wondered why
this was done, but there was no time to ask questions. At last, all the
sail the brig could carry was set. I then, having nothing further to
do, went aft and asked the captain the reason of the change of course.
"If you look astern you will see it," he said.
Shading my eyes with my hand, I gazed into the darkness, and there I at
length discovered what the more practised eyes of the captain had long
seen--the shadowy form of the stranger coming up under all sail towards
us.
"You see now why we have kept away," observed the captain. "Before the
wind is our fastest point of sailing, and I wish that we had kept on it
from the first. That fellow out there must have hauled his wind soon
after we lost sight of him."
"Do you think she will come up with us?" I asked.
"There is a great likelihood that she will," answered the captain; "but
a stern chase is a long chase, as every one knows. Perhaps we may fall
in with a man-of-war cruiser, when the tables will be turned; if not, as
I said before, we must fight her."
"With all my heart," I answered; and Harry echoed my words.
The stranger had by this time approached much nearer to us than before,
or we should have been unable to see her. We could thus no longer hope
for an opportunity of escaping by altering our course. "It is my duty
to stand on as long as I can, to give ourselves every chance of meeting
with another craft, which may take a part in the game," observed the
captain. "At all events, it will be daylight before we get within range
of her guns, and you young gentlemen may as well turn in in the meantime
and finish your night's rest."
Neither I nor Harry had any inclination, however, to do this. The dream
I had had still haunted my imagination, and I felt pretty sure that were
I to go to sleep it would come back as vividly as before. Stepping into
the waist, I found Mr Tubbs, the boatswain.
"Well, Tom, what do you think about the matter?" I asked. "Shall we
have a brush with yonder craft which seems so anxious to make our
acquaintance?"
"No doubt about it, Mr Westerton, and more than a brush too, I suspect.
That ship out there is a big fellow, and will prove a tough customer.
We shall have to show the stuff we are made of, and fight hard to beat
him off. I don't say but that we shall do it, but it will cost us
dearly; for his people, we may be sure, know how to handle their guns;
and from the height of his canvas I should say that he was twice our
size, and probably carries double as many guns as we do, and musters
three or four times more men."
"Then I'm afraid that we shall have but a poor chance of beating him
off," I observed.
"There are always chances in war, and one of them may be in our favour;
so it is our business to fight hard to the end. A happy shot may knock
away his masts and render him helpless, or enter his magazine and blow
him up; or we may send half a dozen of our pills between wind and water,
and compel him to keep all hands at the pumps, so that he will have no
time to look after us."
"But the same may happen to us," observed Harry.
"Granted; those belong to the chances of war," answered Tom. "I was
only speaking of those in our favour. We must not think of the others;
if the worst comes to the worst, we can but go to the bottom with our
colours flying, as many pretty men have had to do before."
On the whole, Tom's remarks did not greatly increase our spirits. Harry
and I walked aft together.
"One of us may fall, Dick," said Harry to me in a grave tone. "If I do,
you will carry my last fond love to my mother and sister and poor Lucy,
and say that my last thoughts were about them."
"That I will," I answered. "And should I fall and you escape, you will
see my parents, and tell your mother and sister Mary how to the last
moment of my life I thought of them--how grateful I am for all their
kindness to me."
The expressions we exchanged were but natural to young men who were
about to engage for the first time in their lives in a desperate
battle--for desperate we knew it must be, even should we come off
victorious, if the stranger astern was, as we supposed, a pirate. We
paced the deck together. The suspense we were doomed to undergo was
more trying than when we were engaged in making or shortening sail, and
the gale was blowing and the vessel tumbling about. Now we were gliding
calmly on, with nothing to do except occasionally to take a look astern
at our expected enemy. I began to long for daylight, and wished even to
see the stranger come up within shot, so that we might ascertain to a
certainty her true character. At length a ruddy glow appeared beyond
her in the east, gradually increasing in depth and brightness until the
whole sky was suffused with an orange tint, and the sun, like a vast
ball of fire, rose rapidly above the horizon, forming a glowing
background to the sails of our pursuer, who came gliding along over the
shining ocean towards us. Already she was almost within range of our
long gun, which the captain now ordered to be trained aft through one of
the stern-ports. The gun was loaded and run out. "Shall I fire, sir?"
asked Tom Tubbs, who acted as gunner as well as boatswain, running his
eye along the piece.
"Not until we can see her flag," answered the captain; "she may, after
all, be a man-of-war. If we fire she may take us for a pirate, and we
should get small credit for our bravery. We shall see her colours
presently if she yaws to fire at us. Wait until I give the word."
In the meantime the magazine had been opened and powder and shot brought
up on deck; the guns were loaded and run out, the arm-chest was also got
up, and Harry and I, as did all on board, girded hangers to our sides
and thrust pistols into our belts.
The captain shortly afterwards issued the order for all hands to be
ready to shorten sail as soon as no chance remained of escaping without
fighting. Even now there was a hope that we might get away, or that the
stranger might after all prove a friend instead of a foe; every rope was
therefore kept belayed. "Long Tom," as the boatswain called his gun,
was run out, it should be understood, under the poop on which Harry and
I stood. The captain had taken his post near the mizen rigging, so that
he could see all parts alike, and his voice could be heard by Tom and
the crew of the gun below him.
The mates were at their stations ready to shorten sail. I had my
spyglass turned towards our pursuer, endeavouring to get a glimpse of
her flag should she have hoisted one, which she very certainly would
have done were she a King's ship. As I watched her, I could see that
she was gaining upon us. Objects which at first appeared indistinct
were now clearly visible. I could make out the men on the forecastle,
but I saw no gun there with which she could return the compliment our
"Long Tom" was about to pay her. So far this was satisfactory.
"Were she a King's ship she would have fired a gun without altering her
course, as a signal for us to heave to," observed the captain.
Scarcely had he spoken than the stranger yawed--a gun was fired, and a
shot came towards us, striking the water and sinking close under our
counter. At the same moment, raising my glass, I caught sight of the
British ensign flying from the end of the peak.
"Hurrah!" I exclaimed; "she's a King's ship, and we are all right."
"We must not be too sure of that," observed Harry; "pirates can hoist
false colours. We want better proof of her honesty before we heave to.
Had she been well disposed, she would not have sent that iron messenger
after us."
For some time longer the "Arrow" stood on her course, while the
stranger, keeping directly astern, did not alter hers. I expected every
moment to hear our captain give the word to fire, but he refrained from
doing so. Suspicious as was the behaviour of our pursuer, still I
thought it possible that, after all, she might be a King's ship, and had
shown her proper colours. Presently, however, she yawed, her
studding-sails fluttering as she did so, being almost taken back. Two
spouts of flame, followed quickly by a couple of round shot, issued from
her bow-ports. That the shot were fired with evil intent was evident,
for one struck our larboard quarter close below where I was standing,
and knocked away the carved work, while the other, flying high, passed
close above our heads, and fell into the water not a dozen fathoms from
the ship. Before her helm could again be put up, Captain Magor shouted,
"Give it them, Tubbs," and our "Long Tom," with a loud roar, sending
forth a spout of flame, pitched a shot right through the fore part of
her bulwarks, and I could see the splinters fly as it struck them.
"Load and fire away as fast as you can," cried the captain; "if that's a
King's ship, she fired first, and must take the consequences."
I should have felt more satisfied had I been convinced that the captain
was right, but still I could not help fancying that she was a royal
cruiser, and that we might be committing a terrible mistake. Shot after
shot was now aimed at our pursuer. Tom Tubbs and his men hauling in and
loading the gun with a rapidity which only well-trained hands could have
done. Few of our shots--as far as I could judge--appeared to be so
successfully aimed as the first had been. Still I heard Captain Magor
shouting out, "Well done, my lads; never saw a gun better served. Wing
her if you can; knock away her foremast, and twenty golden guineas shall
be yours."
The stranger all this time did not return our fire, for she could not
bring her foremost guns to bear without yawing, and by doing so she
would have lost ground. She was still gaining on us, and I observed at
length that she had slightly altered her course, so as to be creeping up
on our starboard quarter, though so slightly, that at first the
alteration was not perceived. Captain Magor took two or three short
turns on the poop, then suddenly stopping, he shouted, "In with the
studding-sails, send down the royals," and presently afterwards, when
this was done, "Furl top-gallant-sails." He had evidently made up his
mind that escape was impossible, and was determined to fight the
stranger should she prove an enemy. Active as were our crew, some
minutes passed before sail was shortened, by which time the stranger had
crept up on our quarter. She had hitherto kept all her canvas standing.
We were still running before the wind. I saw the captain give a steady
look at her.
"I know her now. She is the `Vulture,' and we can expect no mercy if we
are taken," he exclaimed, turning to Harry and me, his countenance
exhibiting the anxiety he felt in the discovery, although the next
moment he spoke in the same firm tone as usual. "The men stationed at
the starboard guns be ready to fire," he cried out. "Brace the yards to
larboard."
Before, however, the words were out of his mouth, the stranger's crew
were seen swarming aloft. The yards and tops were covered with men, and
with a rapidity far excelling anything we were capable of, the
studding-sails were taken in, the royals and top-gallant-sails furled,
and just as our helm was put down, and we were about to luff across her
bow, she luffed up and let fly a broadside of ten guns in return for our
three. At the same moment, as I looked aft, expecting still to see the
ensign of Old England flying from her peak, I beheld a black piratical
flag with the death's head and cross-bones, which had evidently been
hoisted to strike terror into the hearts of our crew. At that instant I
heard the same crashing, rending sounds which had disturbed my slumbers,
as the shot tore their way through our bulwarks, some striking the
masts, others cutting away the shrouds and knocking a boat to pieces. I
saw one man fall at the after-guns, while two more were binding
handkerchiefs round their arms, showing that they had been struck either
by shot or splinters. Having missed the opportunity of raking the
enemy, we were now placed in a disadvantageous position to leeward.
Still Captain Magor was not the man to give in. He ordered "Long Tom"
to be dragged from its present position, and run through the foremost
port.
"If the enemy have more guns than we have, we must make amends by firing
ours twice as fast as she does," he cried out in a cheerful tone.
"Cheer up, my lads. Toss the pieces in, and give the villains more than
they bargain for."
Harry and I hastened to one of the guns, at which three of the crew had
already been killed or disabled, and we exerted ourselves to the utmost.
I confess that I have a somewhat confused idea of what now occurred. I
was thinking only of how I could best help in loading and running out
the gun at which I had stationed myself. All my thoughts and energies
were concentrated on that; but I remember hearing the cries and groans
of my shipmates as they were shot down, the tearing and crashing of the
shot as they struck our devoted craft, the blocks falling from aloft,
the shouts of the officers, and the occasional cheers of the men, and
seeing the ropes hanging in festoons, the sails in tatters, wreck and
confusion around us, with wreaths of smoke. Then I remember observing
the pirate ship, which had approached us closer and closer, come with a
louder crash than any previous sounds alongside. Grapplings were thrown
on to our bulwarks, then a score or more of ruffianly looking fellows
with hangers flashing leapt down on our decks. We fired our pistols and
drew our own blades, and for a few minutes fought with desperation; then
Harry and I, with Tom Tubbs and the captain, were borne back towards the
poop, where, as we stood for a few seconds, keeping our enemies at bay,
we saw that, overwhelmed by numbers, all hope of successful resistance
was vain. Captain Magor shouted to us to sell our lives dearly, but
just then I heard a voice exclaim, "Drop your weapons and you shall have
your lives, for you have fought like brave fellows." Gazing at the
speaker, whom I had not before recognised among the boarders, I beheld
one whose countenance I knew. Yes! I had no doubt about the matter, he
was Captain Roderick Trunnion. At his heels followed a huge mastiff,
who growled fiercely as his master was addressing us. Whether or not
Captain Roderick recognised Harry or me, we neither of us could tell.
"We had better make a virtue of necessity," said the captain, dropping
his sword; and I with the rest of the party did the same, for we could
not suppose that our captors intended afterwards to slaughter us. One
of the officers of the pirate, stepping up, took our weapons, which we
handed to him; and as our assailants now separated, apparently to
plunder the vessel, the fearful condition of our deck was exposed to
view. In every direction were our poor fellows dead or wounded,
including the two mates, one of whom had his head knocked off, while the
other was cut almost in two by a round shot. Planks were torn up where
the shot had ploughed their way along them; blocks, entangled ropes,
shattered spars, fragments of the bulwarks and boats, and pieces of
sails, were scattered about amid large splashes of blood. The pirates,
now masters of the vessel, began at once to heave the dead overboard,
several still breathing, who might have recovered, being treated in the
same way. Every moment I expected that the miscreants would compel us
to walk the plank, but for a wonder they appeared satisfied with their
victory.
Captain Trunnion did not appear to recognise us, though he fixed his
eyes on Captain Magor in a very ominous way.
"I know you," he said, approaching him; "you once did me a good turn by
picking me out of the water. I should probably otherwise have served
for a dinner to a hungry shark close at my heels; but you
counterbalanced that by the scurvy trick you endeavoured to play me at
Liverpool. However, as no harm was done, except that my brother was not
quite so affectionate as he might have been, I'll overlook that, and I
tell you I don't wish to have your blood or that of any other man on my
hands. Now, listen to me, and if you are a sensible person, you will
accept my offer and save your life. I happen to have no one on board
whom I can spare capable of navigating the vessel. I intend to put a
prize-crew on board this craft, and leave you some of your own men, and
if you take her and them safe into the Sherbro River, you shall have
your liberty and go wherever you like after the vessel has sailed. I
must send a man on board to act as mate who will stand no nonsense. If
you prove true, he'll be civil; but if not, you may expect to have your
brains blown out at a moment's notice. You understand me?"
I watched Captain Magor's countenance, to judge whether he would accept
the offer or not I hoped that he would do so, and that we should be
allowed to accompany him. He placed his hand on his brow as he paced
several times up and down the deck. "I accept your offer," he said at
length. He did not I remarked, address Captain Roderick by his proper
name. "You will, I hope, allow my two passengers to accompany me, and
the boatswain, who, although not a navigator, is a first-rate seaman,
and will be of great assistance to me."
"No, no, my friend. I intend these two young gentlemen, who, by the way
they fought, have shown themselves to be fine spirited fellows, to
accompany me; and the character you give of the boatswain makes me wish
to have him on board my craft, where, to tell you the truth, I have not
got too many able seamen. You may consider yourself very fortunate at
being allowed the privilege I offer you, so say no more about the
matter."
These remarks destroyed the hopes Harry and I had entertained that we
might get free of the pirate and ere long obtain our liberty. Poor
Tubbs looked very much cast down. Knowing him well, I was sure he was
not a man who would join with the pirates, although Captain Roderick
might employ every means to win him over. We were not long left in
suspense as to our fate.
"Now, my lads," exclaimed the pirate captain, addressing Harry and me,
"make your way on board my ship, and you follow them," he added turning
to Tubbs.
We had just time to shake hands with Captain Magor, whose countenance
showed the sorrow and anxiety he felt, when, at a sign from Captain
Roderick, several of his men seized us by the shoulders, and hurried us
on board the "Vulture." Tubbs then, giving an involuntary shrug of his
shoulders, as if resigned to his fate, followed us; the savage growls of
the dog making us dread that he would seize one of us by the leg, and so
I have no doubt that he would have done at a sign from his master. The
deck of the pirate presented much the same scene as did that of the
"Arrow." Our shot had done no little damage to the hull and rigging,
while several of her crew were dead or dying. Their shipmates were in
the act of heaving the bodies overboard, although they did not treat
those who were still breathing as they did our poor fellows. A few of
them, more compassionate than the rest, were endeavouring to staunch the
blood flowing from the limbs and sides of the wounded men. Harry,
Tubbs, and I, finding that no one interfered with us, knelt down beside
three of the men who were unable to move on the after part of the deck.
The wretched beings were crying out for help and mercy. Two of them
were evidently suffering fearfully from thirst. "I'll get some water;
it will do them good," said Tubbs, and making his way to a water-cask
which stood on deck, from which he filled a tin mug, he brought it back
to the men. They all drank eagerly, one of them, however, in the very
act, fell back and expired. The others cast a look at their shipmate.
Such might be their fate. "Take him away," groaned one of them. "I
cannot help casting my eyes on him, and he is terrible to look upon."
In truth, the man's countenance, distorted with pain, bore a horrible
expression. We dragged the body forward, that his shipmates might
dispose of it as they thought fit. We were so eagerly engaged in
attending to the wounded men, that we did not observe that the vessels
had been cast loose from each other, and that Captain Roderick had
returned on board. We were aroused by hearing his voice issuing orders
to his crew to make sail. We cast a look over the bulwarks, where we
saw the "Arrow," from which we were greatly increasing our distance, her
people busily employed in repairing damages, knotting and splicing the
running rigging, getting fresh yards across, and bending new sails. The
work was still going on when the "Vulture," having made sail and
steering to the south-east, ran her out of sight.
CHAPTER FOUR.
OUR LIFE ON BOARD THE PIRATE SHIP--WE TEND THE WOUNDED--DISCUSS PLANS
FOR ESCAPING--LAND IN SIGHT--ENTER THE RIVER--AT ANCHOR--PREPARATIONS
FOR RECEIVING SLAVES ON BOARD--WOUNDED MEN LANDED--WE ACCOMPANY THEM--
TOM AGREES TO TRY AND ESCAPE WITH US--COMFORTABLY LODGED--SLAVE
BARRACOONS--A VISIT ON BOARD TO SEE TOM--OBTAIN ARMS AND ESCAPE FROM THE
VILLAGE--OUR FLIGHT--REACH A RIVER--FALL IN WITH FRENCH TRADERS--KINDLY
TREATED--INTENDED TREACHERY OF OUR PIRATE COMPANIONS--DEFEATED BY THE
FRENCHMEN--SURPRISED BY A BAND OF SAVAGES--A FEARFUL MASSACRE--SAVED BY
THE MATE OF THE "VULTURE"--AGAIN MADE PRISONERS.
We were treated with more leniency than we could have expected on board
the "Vulture," in consequence, I believe, of our having attended to the
wounded.
"We have no doctor on board, and you and your friends may look after
those fellows, and try to patch them up," said the pirate captain to me
the day after the action. "I cannot spare the boatswain, as he is
wanted to do duty as a seaman. Remember that I might have clapped you
down in the cable-tier, or, had I chosen, made you walk the plank, as
many have done before; but I don't want to have the deaths of more men
than I can help at my door, even though I run the risk of losing my life
in consequence of my leniency."
"We will continue to look after the wounded as long as we are able," I
answered. I thought it prudent not to expend any thanks on him, for
which he would not have cared, nor to show any very great satisfaction
at being left at liberty, as he might have suspected that we were
contemplating plans for our escape, nor would he have been far off the
truth. Harry and I, when we were certain that no one was listening, had
discussed the matter, intending to let Tom Tubbs into our plan, and
invite him to join us. At present, however, we had no means of holding
communication with him. He was sent forward, while we remained either
on the quarter-deck, or in a sort of cockpit to which the wounded had
been carried. It was a dark, close place, its only advantage being that
it was out of the way of shot in action. In the course of a few hours,
death removed all but six of our patients and Harry and I had enough to
do to attend to them. They were groaning and complaining all day long,
and constantly calling out for liquor, though, when we supplied them
with water instead, they drank it greedily, sometimes fancying that it
was what they had asked for. We kept them constantly supplied with
liquid, which, although often hot and tepid, appeared like nectar to
their fevered lips. No one interfered with us. How the poor fellows
would have fared had they been left to themselves I know not, but I
suspect that they would have been allowed to suffer with very little
commiseration felt for them. Still all this time our position was far
from comfortable. I was doubtful how Captain Roderick might treat
Harry. I had no doubt that he knew who he was, though he had never
addressed him by name; indeed, after having spoken to us about the
wounded men, he took no further notice of us, allowing us to take our
food in the cockpit, and to sleep in a couple of hammocks which were
slung there, which had belonged to two of the men who had been killed.
We had to do everything for ourselves, the seamen being either surly to
us or rude. Harry and I separately, on two different occasions,
endeavoured to speak to Tubbs, but a man immediately stepped up and
asked us what we wanted, he having, I suppose, been directed by the
Captain to watch us and Tubbs, to see that we held no communication,
while Growler--for so we found that the captain's dog was called--came
snuffing and growling round and round us, ready to fall to and tear us
to pieces at the word of command. We fortunately had fine weather as we
continued our voyage towards the Bight of Biafara, for which we were
bound. All this time we did not lose the hope of falling in with a
British man-of-war by which we might be rescued. Day after day passed
by, but not a sail hove in sight. That Captain Roderick thought such
might be the case seemed probable, as he was constantly on the watch,
and exercising his men both at the guns, and with small arms and
cutlasses; and I felt certain that, sooner than surrender, he would
fight to the last, and then blow up the ship. It appeared to me that he
had become more desperate than he had been when he last paid a visit to
Liverpool. Indeed, he must have known that he could never again show
his face there, should either Harry or I, or Captain Magor, or the
boatswain, find our way back. Probably, however, he counted on our
never doing so. It was not a pleasant feeling to know that he might
consider his interest advanced by effectually preventing us from again
seeing our native land. The wounded men made fair progress towards
recovery under our care, but when not attending them, Harry and I found
time hang very heavily on our hands. We had no books, and were afraid
of conversing except on indifferent subjects, for fear of being
overheard. Even the men we were attending might betray us should we say
anything at which the captain might take offence. Our life was
therefore, as may be supposed, anything but a pleasant one. We went on
deck occasionally very early in the morning or after sunset, when the
shades of night prevented our being observed, and generally managed to
get a few turns together to stretch our legs and breathe the fresh air;
for had we always remained in the close hold, do not suppose that we
could have retained our health. Our thief amusement was endeavouring to
win our way into the good graces of Growler, and gradually we succeeded
in doing so, though we of course took good care not to let it be seen
that we were on friendly terms with him. We were very thankful when at
length, early one morning, we heard the cry from the look-out at the
masthead--
"Land, oh!"
Both Harry and I felt a strong impulse to run aloft and have a look at
it, but this we dared not do. It was some time, therefore, before we
saw the shore from the deck. We could then make out a line of
mangrove-trees, with blue hills rising to a considerable height in the
distance. The mangrove-trees marked the entrance of the river up which
we were bound. We stood on until within about four miles of the shore,
when it fell a dead calm. There the brig lay, rolling her sides in the
smooth burnished water on which she floated. We could now perceive,
projecting from among the mangrove bushes, a long spit of white sand,
from which to the opposite shore ran a line of foam, marking the bar
which we had to cross. The heat was intense, making the pitch bubble up
between the seams of the deck, while down below the air was horribly
stifling. It seemed surprising that the poor wounded fellows could live
in it; but they had got accustomed to a close atmosphere, I suppose, and
were, at all events, saved from feeling the direct rays of the sun. The
whites of the crew sought shelter wherever a particle of shade existed,
although the black and brown men, of whom there were several, appeared
indifferent to the heat--the black cook and his mate actually sitting on
the top of the caboose and smoking their pipes, with the advantage of a
fire beneath them. I expected to see them begin to broil, but they were
evidently enjoying themselves. Thus it lasted for a couple of hours,
until the sea-breeze set in, when all sail was instantly made, and the
ship was headed up for the bar. The breeze increased. As we got nearer
we caught sight of a canoe and half a dozen black fellows coming off to
assist us. We accordingly hove to, that they might be able to get up
the side, when a huge fellow in a broad-brimmed straw hat and a pair of
trousers with pink stripes came on deck, and walking up to the captain,
shook hands with him as with an old friend.
"Ah, massa cap'n, glad to see you 'gain. You take plent slavy--him dare
all ready;" and he pointed up the river.
"All right, Master Pogo. Take care that you don't put my ship ashore
though, as you did Captain Watman's. I wonder he did not shoot you
through the head for your carelessness. I wouldn't scruple to do so,
let me tell you."
Pogo grinned and shrugged his shoulders. "Me take good care, cap'n," he
answered; and stepping up to the break of the poop, he took his post
there that he might con the vessel. He looked around him and then
surveyed the shore.
"Starboard a little," he sung out. "Now steady, dat will do. Now we go
in like shot," he added, turning to the captain, who significantly
touched the butt of one of the pistols in his belt.
As the line of surf was approached, Pogo became more energetic in his
actions. He shouted to the crew, "Stand by the braces, tacks, and
sheets!" The wind began to fail, and he knew well that a puff coming
down the river might take the ship aback, and drive her on shore before
there was time to drop an anchor. For an instant her sails fluttered.
He began to dance about and wring his hands, looking at the captain's
belt as if he expected every moment to see the pistol sticking in it
pointed at his head; but happily for him the sails again filled, and the
breeze increasing, the ship, after pitching three or four times, glided
on into smooth water. We were now free of all danger for the present.
There was nothing very attractive in the appearance of the river. As
far as the eye could reach, we could distinguish only mangrove bushes
rising apparently out of the water itself. Except a hut or two at the
inner end of the sandy point I have described, not a human habitation
was to be perceived, and scarcely a canoe dotted the broad expanse of
the river as we glided up it, stemming the current with the strong
sea-breeze which had now set in. As we got higher up, an occasional
opening in the mangrove bushes showed us a more attractive looking
country, with cocoa-nut, fig, and other trees, and native huts nestled
beneath them; but it was not until we had got about twenty miles from
the mouth of the river that any sign of a numerous population appeared.
At length we prepared to come to an anchor off a village from which a
wooden stage projected into the river. Beyond it were several long
sheds of considerable extent, which were ere long discovered to be
barracoons or sheds for the reception of slaves brought down from the
interior to be embarked. The anchor was dropped, the sails were furled.
What now was to be our fate? The captain had interfered so little with
us, that we hoped he would allow us to go on shore, and that we might be
able from thence to make our way down the river, and get on board a
lawful trader or man-of-war. I proposed to Harry that I should at once
ask him. Just as I was about to do so, I heard him order the wounded
men to be brought up and placed in a boat alongside. I thought that now
was a good opportunity, "I am afraid, sir, that these men are scarcely
in a fit state to be removed; unless they have some one to look after
them, they are very likely to lose their lives."
"You may accompany them," he said, "but remember that you do not go
beyond the village, or you will stand a chance of being knocked on the
head. The blacks are not very fond of strange white men hereabouts."
Of course Harry and I did not consider ourselves bound to follow his
directions in this instance, nor had we given any promise to do so.
Before we left the ship, we found that the crew were preparing her for
the reception of slaves. Some were hoisting up her cargo and placing it
either on deck or in the after-cabin ready for trade, and others were
fixing in a slave-deck fore and aft, while casks of water and bags of
farina were being brought on board in large quantities. I was thankful
to see Tom Tubbs in the boat which was to convey the wounded men on
shore. He gave us a wink as we went down the side, and I saw that he
took the stroke oar, so that he would have an opportunity of speaking to
us. The ship was some distance off the bank, for there was not
sufficient depth of water to enable her to come nearer. It took us,
therefore, nearly ten minutes to reach the spot. "I'll lend a hand to
carry one of these poor fellows," observed Tom, giving me a meaning look
as he pulled away. "I suppose Mr Bracewell will help us?"
I turned to Harry, and of course he said "yes." Two of the men were
able to walk, but the other three were still too weak to help
themselves. The crew of the boat, therefore, took two of the latter up
on their shoulders, and Tubbs, Harry, and I lifted the third. Harry
carried the man's feet; Tubbs and I supported him by our arms and
shoulders.
"We shall be here for more than a week, I suspect," said Tubbs as we
walked along. "I must come on shore to see how these poor fellows are
getting on, and may be you may fancy a walk into the country, either up
the river or down the river, as you wish."
The habitation selected for the accommodation of the wounded was far
superior to what I expected to find. It was, indeed, the house of a
white slave-dealer and general trader, who, with his clerks, was now
away, and Captain Roderick had thought fit to take possession of it. A
large airy room in which eight hammocks were slung, afforded quarters
for our five patients and to Harry and me.
"I wish that you could occupy the other," I said to Tubbs; "we should be
glad to have your assistance. Couldn't you ask the captain's leave, and
say that we want you to help us to look after the wounded?"
The boatswain shook his head. "Not much chance of his granting it; he
would suspect that there was something in the wind; but I'll keep my
weather eye open, and if I have a chance I'll come on shore. If you
determine to try and make your escape, it must be just before the
`Vulture' sails, or the captain will be sending to look for you," he
whispered. "Good-bye, gentlemen," he added aloud; "glad to see you on
board again."
We found a couple of blacks in the house--an old man and a woman,
servants of the owner--to look after it. They appeared well disposed,
and brought us food and everything we required for ourselves and the
wounded men. The latter--ruffians as they may have been--were very
grateful to us, and one and all declared that they would not have
received such attention from their own shipmates.
"I should think you must be pretty well sick of the life you have been
leading," I ventured to say in a low voice to one of them, who appeared
to be of a better disposition than the rest. "That indeed I am, sir,"
he answered, the tears coming into his eyes. "I'd leave it to-morrow if
I could, for I know a sudden death or a bowline-knot will be my lot some
day or other."
"What do your wounded shipmates think about the subject?" I asked.
"I cannot say positively; but my idea is that they would be glad enough
to get free if they had the chance," was the answer.
I did not venture to make any remark in return, but the thought then
occurred to me that we might possibly all escape together. If we could
procure arms, we should form a pretty strong party, and might fight our
way in any direction in which it might be advisable to go. The French
had a settlement on that part of the coast, so had the Portuguese
further south; but the English had none except a long way to the north.
Still, as ships of war and traders occasionally appeared off the coast,
could we once reach it, we might make signals and be taken on board. I
do not mean to say that Harry or I had much hope of thus escaping, still
it was possible, and that assisted to keep up our spirits.
Captain Trunnion appeared much disappointed at not finding the number of
slaves he had expected in the barracoons, as it would compel him to wait
until they could be obtained from the interior, and his crew he knew
were as liable to coast fever as that of any other vessel.
Next to the house in which we lived was a large store where the cargo of
the "Vulture" was stored when landed. At a short distance off were
several barracoons. I may as well describe one of them. It was a shed
composed of heavy piles driven deep into the earth, lashed together with
bamboos, and thatched with palm-leaves. Down the centre was another row
of piles, along which was a chain. In this, at intervals of about every
two feet, was a large neck-link, which, being placed round the necks of
the slaves, was padlocked. When I looked in, the barracoon contained
only about twenty slaves. Some of them were fine athletic looking men,
and were shackled three together, the strongest being placed between two
others, and heavily ironed. The walls of the building were about six
feet in height, and between them and the roof was an opening of about
four feet to allow the free circulation of air. The floor was planked,
not, as I found, from any regard for the comfort of the slaves, but
because a small insect, a species of chigoe, which is in the soil, might
get into the flesh of the poor creatures, and produce a disease which
might ultimately kill them. Half a dozen armed men, two being
mulattoes, the others blacks, were guarding the barracoon and watching
the slaves, so that any attempt to free themselves from their irons was
impossible. These slaves were the property of a dealer with whom the
captain now commenced bargaining. As there was time to spare, he chose
to select each one separately, lest any sick or injured people might be
forced upon him, as is often the case where slaves are shipped in a
hurry. He and the trader stood at a dignified distance, while their
subordinates carried on the active part of the business, a half naked
black acting for the trader, while the captain was represented by a
mulatto, who felt the arms and legs of each man, and struck him on the
chest and back to ascertain that he was sound in wind, before he
consented to pay over his price in goods. Another slave was then
summoned, and, if found satisfactory, passed at a fixed price; but
otherwise, a less sum was offered, or the slave was sent back to await
the arrival of some other slaver likely to be less particular. Women
and children were treated in the same way, but there were comparatively
few of them in the lot now offered for sale.
I had to return on board the "Vulture" to obtain some medicines for our
wounded men, and also to get some articles belonging to Harry and myself
which we had left on board. Great alterations had taken place in the
fitting of the ship between decks. Huge casks called _leaguers_ had
been placed in the hold; in these were stowed the provisions, wood for
fuel, and other stores; above them was fitted a slave-deck, between
which and the upper deck there was a space of about four feet. On this
the slaves were to sit with shackles on their feet, and secured to iron
bars running from side to side. They were divided in gangs, about a
dozen in each, over which was a head man, who arranged the place each
slave was to occupy. The largest slaves were made to sit down
amidships, or the furthest from the ship's side, or from any position in
which their strength could avail them to secure a larger space than
their neighbours. As I was to see more of the system, I need not now
describe it. On my return on shore, I looked into the barracoon hired
by Captain Trunnion, in which I saw from forty to fifty slaves
assembled, and even more heavily ironed and secured than they had been
before. They were mostly sitting with their heads between their knees,
bowed down with blank despair. Having seen the ship which was to convey
them from their native land to a region they knew nothing of, and
observed the savage countenances of the men who were to be their masters
during the voyage, all hope of escape had fled. Every day after this,
fresh batches of slaves arrived, their hands secured behind their backs,
and walking in a long line fastened together by a rope, strictly guarded
by blacks with muskets in their hands and swords by their sides, with
which they occasionally gave a prod to any of the laggards. The
wretched beings were marched, in the first instance, to the trader's
barracoons, where they could be sorted and regain some of their
strength. Harry and I were paying all the attention we could to the
wounded men, who, enjoying the advantage of fresh provisions, were
quickly recovering their health. Caspar Caper, the man who seemed to be
the most grateful to Harry and me, was quite himself again, and was
certainly fit to return on board, but he begged hard that we would not
inform the captain.
"If I had my will, sir, I'd never go back to that craft; nor would you
if you knew the dreadful deeds which have been done on board her or by
her crew."
"I have no wish to go back, you may be sure of that," I answered; "but
what do your companions say?"
"Well, sir, three of them are pretty well agreed with me; but there is
one, Herman Jansen, the Dutchman, who has a fancy for the buccaneering
life we have led, and I don't like to trust him."
This showed me that the man to whom I was speaking, Caspar Caper, had
thought the subject over, and was himself fully prepared to try and
escape from the pirates. I told him to speak to his shipmates while
Harry and I were out of the way, and not to say that we entertained the
idea, but simply to state his belief that we would accompany them if
they made up their minds to run off from the slave village. Before
doing anything, I was very anxious to see Tubbs; but he was so busily
employed on board that he could not manage to come on shore. It was
very probable, I thought, that the captain would not give him leave, and
that he must come at night if he came at all. I thought again of all
sorts of excuses for visiting the ship, although I feared, if I did so,
that I might be detained on board. Several days passed; the "Vulture"
was ready for sea, but a sufficient number of slaves to form her cargo
had not yet arrived; others, however, were coming in, sometimes twenty
or thirty at a time. It would not take more than a couple of hours to
stow them all away on board. Although by this time all the wounded men
had recovered, they pretended to be too weak to get out of their cots.
Once or twice the captain looked in to see how they were getting on,
when they all groaned and spoke in feeble tones, as if they were very
little better.
"I can't say much for your doctoring, young sirs," he observed, turning
to Harry and me. "I believe if you had left the men alone they would
have got well of themselves. I never have had a surgeon on board my
ship, and never intend to have one. Nature is the best surgeon, and if
she can't cure a man he must die."
"I don't know what you would say if you were wounded, captain, and there
was no one to extract the ball," observed Harry.
"I should have to take my chance with the rest," answered the captain in
a tone which showed, however, that he did not like the remark. "But,
whether cured or not, these fellows must come on board and try and do
their duty," he exclaimed as he left the house.
"I must get some stronger medicines then," I said, the thought suddenly
striking me that this would be the best excuse for visiting the ship;
for although the captain spoke in the way he did, he had a
medicine-chest on board well stored with drugs, with a book of
directions for their use.
"I thought that you before took enough physic on shore to cure a dozen
fellows," he remarked.
"And so I did, sir, but I remember seeing on the last visit a mixture,
the name of which I forget, for restoring strength to people who have
been brought down, and that's just what these men want."
I spoke the truth in regard to the drugs, the only question was how much
the men required of them. As the captain did not forbid me, as soon as
he was out of sight I hurried down to the beach, and got a black fellow
to paddle me on board in his canoe. I soon found a big bottle, and made
up the mixture according to the recipe, which I took good care to keep
in my hand, so that anybody could see what I had been about. I looked
round for Tubbs, and when I returned on deck, much to my satisfaction I
found him working at the mizen rigging with no one else near. I
hastened up to him, and in a low voice said--
"The rest are ready. Will you come to-night or to-morrow night?
although I fear if we put it off till to-morrow you may be too late. We
will, however, wait for you if you will come."
"Yes," he answered, "wait! I will be on shore an hour before midnight.
By that time the black fellows will have turned in. Tell the negro who
brought you off that there will be a couple of doubloons for him if he
comes alongside at the hour I name. If he fails me, I must swim on
shore, although there is a risk of being snapt up by a shark or a stray
crocodile. However, I may find another chance before that of getting on
shore. Now you'd better be off, for it won't do for you to be seen
lingering about talking with me."
I followed his advice, and got into the canoe. As the black paddled me
on shore, I asked him if he would like to obtain a doubloon. I knew
very well what would be his answer. Being a discreet personage, he
asked no further questions, but promised to be alongside at the hour I
named.
On landing, I hurried to the house, which was some way up the beach, and
told Harry of the arrangements I had made. I then explained more
clearly to Caspar Caper than I had hitherto done the plan Harry and I
proposed, which was to direct our course to the southward, and then to
strike directly for the coast, where we might hope to be taken off, or
to find a canoe or craft of some sort, in which to make our way to one
of the European settlements. The means of subsistence we hoped to find
in the forest if we could obtain firearms. As I had been going about
the house one day, I had seen a couple of fowling-pieces, with
powder-horns and shot-belts, hanging against the wall Harry doubted
whether we had a right to take them; but necessity has no law, and in
this case we came to the conclusion that we were justified in taking
possession of them. Our associates had no scruples on the subject
Caspar fully agreed to carry out the plan we proposed, and now told us
that his shipmates were perfectly ready to escape, and try for the
future to lead peaceable lives. We did not inquire too minutely into
their motives, but I suspected that these arose not so much from their
hatred of piracy, as from being compelled constantly to fight with the
fear of a rope's end before their eyes. I told the two old blacks that
the wounded men required as much food as they could obtain, and they
brought us an abundant supply. We accordingly had a hearty supper, but
we were to make a scurvy return to them for their kindness. As soon as
it was dark, the men got up and dressed themselves. Harry and I groped
our way to the room where we had seen the fowling-pieces, which, with
the ammunition, were at once secured.
"There's more to be found in the house than those things," observed
Jansen. "We shall want a fresh rig out. What say you, mates? Besides
which, if old Dobbo and his wife hear us moving about, they will give
the alarm, so we must settle them first." Saying this, he took up the
lamp, and, followed by the rest, quitted the room, leaving Harry and me
in darkness. Soon afterwards we heard a slight scream, then all was
silent. We waited a quarter of an hour or more. The time was
approaching when we expected to see Tubbs. Presently we heard a knock
at the shutter of the room. Of course there was no glass. I opened it,
and Tubbs sprang in. We knew him by his figure, though there was not
light sufficient to see his countenance.
"Are you alone?" he whispered.
"Yes," answered Harry; "the others have gone to see what they can find
in the house likely to be useful on the journey. We secured some
fowling-pieces; we could not defend our lives without them."
"And I have brought off a brace of pistols and a hanger," said the
boatswain.
"We shall do very well then; but I almost wish that we had attempted to
escape without those other fellows--they are likely to bring us into
trouble by their lawless ways," said Harry.
This was indeed too probable. While we were speaking they returned.
They had sense enough to suppress their voices, and as Caspar, who
carried the light, entered, I saw that they were all rigged out in the
trader's clothes, which they had appropriated. One had got a musket,
another a sword, and others richly ornamented pistols, while the legs of
another were encased in high boots, and he had on a handsomely
embroidered coat, used by the owner on grand occasions.
"The old people will not follow us or give the alarm," said Jansen. "We
have gagged and bound them, for we heard them moving about in the next
room, and if we hadn't been quick about it they would have given the
alarm, and the whole village would soon have been awake."
The men had not returned empty handed. Some had brought in a further
supply of provisions which they had found in the house, and several
articles they had picked up.
Having made a hearty supper, "Now, my lads," I said, "it is time to
start. The people in the village must be fast asleep, and the further
off we get, the better chance we shall have of keeping ahead of our
pursuers. One of us must act as leader. Who will do so?"
The men at once unanimously chose Tom Tubbs. Harry and I were glad of
this, as we felt sure that he was the best person for the post. "Well,
my lads, if you will obey me, I'll do what I can to lead you well," he
said. "Now, the first thing I have to charge you is to keep silence.
Follow me!" He noiselessly opened the door and looked carefully about.
Neither seeing nor hearing any one, he gave as the signal to move on.
Harry and I went next, and the other men followed in single file. They
knew that the slightest noise would betray them. For what they could
tell, the captain himself might be on shore; and should we be caught, he
would certainly visit us with severe punishment. We treaded our way
silently through the village, keeping at a distance from the barracoons,
the guards at which would otherwise have discovered us. The country was
sufficiently open to enable us to see the stars overhead, by which we
guided our course to the southward. When we approached any huts, we
turned aside, taking care not to go through any plantations, where, by
breaking down the stalks, we should leave traces of our passage.
After going some distance we stopped to listen. We could hear two or
three dogs barking, one replying to the other, but no human voices.
This made us hope, at all events, that we were not discovered. Again we
went on at a pretty quick rate, considering that five of our party had
not been on their feet for several weeks. At last the men called a
halt. "We had better not stop yet, lads," said Tom Tubbs; "we must put
a good many miles between us and the village before we are safe. Your
skipper is not the man to let any of his crew get away without an effort
to bring them back."
A short time, however, served to restore our companion's strength, and
we once more set off as fast as our legs could carry us, breaking into a
run whenever the ground was sufficiently level for the purpose. We had
made good, I calculated, fully twenty miles when morning broke. It was
a distance, I hoped, which would prevent the pirates from successfully
pursuing us, but it would not do to rest here, for as soon as it was
discovered that we had fled, Captain Roderick would be informed of it,
and he would certainly tend a party after us.
"If he does, I hope that he'll send some of his white crew, for they'll
soon get tired and give up the chase," observed Harry.
"I am afraid, sir, he won't trust them," remarked Tubbs; "he'll get a
band of black fellows, who will keep on through the heat of day. I
would advise that we should go forward during the cool of the morning,
and try and find a place to conceal ourselves."
To this proposal Harry and I agreed, so did our other companions, though
they would have preferred resting where they were. After a short halt
by the side of a stream to take some food and quench our thirst, we
again pushed on, the vegetation in many places being so dense that it
was not without difficulty that we could force our way through it. The
worst of this was, that while we were thus delayed we should form a road
for our pursuers. However, that was not to be avoided should they get
upon our track.
We had made good nearly a dozen miles, I should think, when we came upon
a broad river, flowing, as we supposed, into the sea.
"If we can find a canoe, or a craft of some sort, we may easily reach
the coast, and save ourselves a good deal of fatigue," observed Tubbs.
The rest of the men, who were pretty well knocked up, seemed highly
pleased at the proposal. Instead of attempting to cross the stream, we
proceeded down it. Harry suggested that we should form a raft if we
could not find a canoe, and should a party be sent in pursuit, they
would thus be puzzled to know what had become of us. I proposed that,
before commencing out voyage down the stream, we should cross to the
opposite bank, and there trample down the grass, and make other marks as
if we had continued our course to the southward. We had not gone far
when we saw a smoke ascending from amid trees on the banks of the river.
"Some native traders or white men are encamped there," observed Tubbs.
"They are probably proceeding up the river, and will tell us what sort
of people we are likely to meet with on the passage down. If they are
traders, they are likely to prove friendly and we may consider ourselves
fortunate in falling in with them."
"But suppose they are not traders, suppose they are not friendly, what
are we to do then?" asked Harry.
"We muster eight white men with arms in our hands, and are not likely to
be uncivilly treated," observed Jansen, flourishing his weapon. "I'll
go forward, and see who these people are, and we'll soon settle whether
we are to be friends or foes."
As there was no time to be lost, he hurried forward, while we halted to
await his return. In a few minutes he reappeared.
"Friends! come on," he exclaimed; and once more moving forward, we
reached an open space near the bank of the river, where we saw a tent
pitched and two white men and a party of six blacks, two of whom were
cooking at a fire, while the rest were seated in the shade. They rose
to greet us.
The white men were French traders, they told us. They spoke a little
English, and we understood enough of their language to be able to carry
on a conversation. As they were inclined to be friendly, and appeared
to be honest, we told them that we were escaping from a piratical slave
craft, which we described. They appeared to know her well, and seemed
greatly to commiserate us. They informed us that they were proceeding
up the river to trade with the natives; that one of their number had
fallen ill and was now suffering from fever inside the tent. They hoped
by spending a day or two where they were that he would recover
sufficiently to enable them to continue their voyage. They told us that
we were nearly two hundred miles from the sea, and a much greater
distance following the course of the river; but still it would be the
safest plan to descend it in the way we proposed, until we reached a
village where canoes were to be obtained. Though Harry and I and Tubbs
were anxious at once to set to work and build a raft, our companions
declared that they were too tired to do anything more until they had had
a long rest. Our new friends, who had plenty of provisions, kindly
bestowed some upon them, and invited us to join them in their repast,
giving us some wine, which we found very refreshing. The Frenchmen,
hearing how far we had come, expressed their opinion that the pirates
would not attempt to follow us, and that we were perfectly safe from
pursuit. We ourselves were glad to get some rest, and lay down in the
shade to wait until evening, when we proposed building the raft. The
Frenchmen had several axes amongst their goods, and furnished us with
three, so that we might cut down any small trees we required for the
framework of the raft. After a sleep of some hours we got up much
refreshed. Harry, Tubbs, and I immediately began to select trees for
our purpose. The other men, whom Tubbs roused up, however, showed no
inclination to assist, declaring that they were too tired, and must wait
until the next day. Tubbs went back two or three times to speak to
them, but without success. At last, on his return to us he said--
"I am afraid these fellows intend to play the Frenchmen some scurvy
trick. Their idea is to carry off the canoe, and if you and Mr
Bracewell won't go, to leave you behind."
"We must defeat their treachery," I observed. "I will tell the
Frenchmen and put them on their guard; I will at once do so."
Our friends, at first, would scarcely believe that the fellows would be
guilty of so abominable a trick, but when I reminded them of the lawless
lives they had led, they saw that it was too probable, and promised to
keep a guard on their canoe. We laboured away until nightfall, our
companions either sleeping or pretending to be asleep all the time.
They got up, however, to eat some supper which the Frenchmen had
prepared for us. Our hosts then produced some bottles of liquor,
looking significantly at each other as they did so. I guessed their
object, but said nothing. The seamen fell into the trap, but Harry and
I took very little of the spirits, and Tubbs followed our example. The
Frenchmen having plied the pirates with more and more liquor, they soon
appeared to forget all about their previous intentions; they talked,
laughed, and sang, and clapped their entertainers on the back, vowing
that they were thorough good fellows. They then became very uproarious,
and seemed disposed to quarrel amongst each other, but by degrees they
became quiet again, and ultimately crawling to the bank of the river,
lay down to sleep, entirely thoughtless of the risk they ran of being
snapped up by alligators.
"They will do us no harm at present, at all events," said one of the
Frenchmen, "and to-morrow I hope that our companion will be well enough
to enable us to continue our voyage. We are much obliged to you for
your timely warning, and we would advise you to part company from such
lawless associates as soon as possible."
Harry and I assured him that such was our purpose, although we would
gladly have enabled the men to escape from the pirates, hoping that they
would take to a better course of life. We sat up talking with our
friends for some time, and were then glad to lie down outside their hut,
having agreed to keep watch with them during the night. We drew lots as
to who should keep the watches. Harry had the first, from eight to ten;
Tubbs the next two hours; I from midnight until two o'clock, and the
Frenchmen the morning watch. Tubbs roused me up and said that all was
quiet, and that the ex-pirates were sleeping soundly. I paced up and
down between the tent and the boat, in which some of the black crew were
sleeping, while the rest were near their master's tent. Frequently I
stopped to listen for any distant sounds. I could hear occasionally the
cries of wild beasts far away to the eastward, and the shrieks of night
birds, the chirping of crickets or other insects, and the croaking of
frogs; but no human voice reached my ears. I trusted that we should be
able to finish our raft early the next day, and begin the voyage down
the river. With this hope, having called up one of the Frenchmen, I lay
down to sleep, feeling more drowsy than usual. I had just opened my
eyes and discovered that it was dawn, when I was startled by the most
fearful yell I had ever heard, and the next instant a hundred dark
forms, flashing huge daggers in their hands, leapt out from among the
bushes on every ride. Harry and Tubbs, who were sleeping next to me,
sprang to their feet. Our first impulse was to run to the trunk of a
large tree and place our backs against it, so that we might defend
ourselves to the last. As the unfortunate Frenchmen were crawling out
of their tent, the savages were upon them, while others seized upon the
drunken and still helpless seamen, and a fearful scene of slaughter
ensued. Three of them we saw killed, while some of the crew of the
canoe were also mercilessly put to death. Two of the seamen, however,
Herman Jansen and Caspar Caper, seizing their weapons, fought their way
out from among the savages, and, we concluded, took to flight, for we
saw a party of blacks start off in pursuit. Our enemy, seeing us well
armed, had not hitherto attacked us. We expected them to do so every
moment. In a few minutes the whole of the party except the two men who
had taken to flight and ourselves, were massacred.
"We must fight to the last if we are attacked," said Harry; "but don't
fire first. Perhaps the savages, when they see the bold front we show,
will think it wiser to let us alone."
Our hopes, however, were soon dashed to the ground; for the negroes,
seeing only our small force opposed to them, after shouting and
shrieking, and making significant signs, advanced towards us. Although
we might have shot down three of them, we should inevitably have been
overpowered. Still we would not yield without striking a blow, and we
were on the point of firing when a white man appeared, followed by a
fresh party of blacks, and as he advanced from the shadow of the wood, I
recognised Mr Pikehead, the first mate of the "Vulture." On seeing
only Harry, Tubbs, and me together, he exclaimed--
"Put down your arms and your lives are safe. The other fellows have met
the fate they deserved," and he kicked the body of one of the pirates.
"They were deserters; but you had a perfect right to make your escape if
you could. You have, however, failed, and must come back with me. Our
captain will decide what is to be done with you."
"We'll not yield until you call these fellows off," answered Harry; "we
shall then be able to treat with you."
The pirate laughed, for he fancied that he had us in his power.
"What shall we do?" asked Harry, addressing Tubbs and me.
"We had better give in, sir," said Tubbs. "The odds against us are too
great, and although we might shoot that fellow and a couple of the
blacks, we should be certain to lose our lives. If he promises to carry
us safe on board the schooner, scoundrel though he is, he will keep his
word, and we may have another opportunity of escaping."
"We must make a virtue of necessity," I observed, "and I agree with
Tubbs."
In the meantime the mate was shouting to the blacks to fall back,
allowing him space to approach us.
"I again promise you your lives, my men," he said, as he stopped a few
paces off, still holding a blunderbuss in his hand, pointed towards us.
"You are plucky fellows, and I wish to do you no harm, although you have
given me a long tramp which I would gladly have avoided."
I felt convinced from his tone that he spoke the truth, and we all three
accordingly lowered our weapons. By this time two of the pirate crew
and several of the blacks whom we had seen at the village appeared, and
by the mate's directions we delivered our arms to them.
"I'll not bind you," he said, "but you must give me your word that you
will not run away."
This, of course, as we could not help ourselves, we did. While the mate
was engaged with us, the rest of the blacks had been employed in
plundering the cargo of the French trader's canoe, over which they soon
commenced quarrelling, flourishing their daggers and gesticulating
furiously at each other. For some time the mate did not interfere, but
I heard him direct his own party to take possession of any provisions
they could find: "Leave the rest to the black fellows," he added.
We were not sorry to see some cases of preserved meat, a box of
biscuits, and a bag of flour brought up, with a case of tea, some sugar,
and other eatables. The fire was quickly lighted, and one of the white
men with two of the blacks set to work to prepare breakfast. By degrees
the tumult of the blacks, who had been quarrelling over their booty,
subsided; they had apparently come to some arrangement among themselves
without the interference of the mate, and each of them now appeared
habited in the various articles they had appropriated--some with pieces
of coloured calico round their loins, others in the form of turbans
round their heads or over their shoulders, evidently supposing that the
appearance they presented was very distinguished. Shortly afterwards,
however, the return of the party who had gone in chase of the two
pirates, irritated at having failed to overtake them, created a fresh
disturbance, each one among them claiming some of the booty.
On this occasion, bloodshed would certainly have ensued, had not the
mate interfered, and insisted on the portions claimed being given up.
As he and his followers had firearms, and the blacks had only their long
knives, they were afraid of disobeying him, and order was again
restored.
Notwithstanding the unfortunate termination of our adventure, we all ate
heartily of the food placed before us. The remainder of the provisions
was done up into packages, so that each of us might carry enough to last
until we reached the village.
Mr Pikehead had certainly no wish to be in the company of his black
allies, whom he had instigated to attack the camp, for making them a
speech in their own tongue, he sent them off in a different direction to
that we were about to follow. He then directed each man to take up his
package, gave the word to march, and we set off.
CHAPTER FIVE.
WE ARE MARCHED BACK TO THE VILLAGE--CARRIED ON BOARD THE "VULTURE"--SENT
DOWN BELOW--TUBBS REFUSES TO TURN PIRATE--AN UNPLEASANT NIGHT--THE SHIP
UNDER WEIGH--CROSSING THE BAR--ALLOWED TO GO ON DECK--AT SEA--ANOTHER
NIGHT--ATTEMPT TO ESCAPE A PURSUER--SOUNDS OF A FIGHT REACH US--WE BREAK
OUR WAY OUT--THE CAPTAIN ATTEMPTS TO BLOW UP THE SHIP--WE STOP HIM AND
MAKE HIM PRISONER--A PARTY FROM THE FRIGATE ON BOARD THE PIRATE--CHARLEY
APPEARS--LIEUTENANT HALLTON DOUBTS THE VESSEL BEING A PIRATE--TRUSTS THE
CREW--A PLEASANT SUPPER--UNPLEASANTLY AROUSED FROM SLEEP BY SEEING THE
LIEUTENANT AND CHARLEY IN THE HANDS OF THE PIRATES--A TRICK TO DECEIVE
THE FRIGATE--THE PIRATE MAKES SAIL AND ESCAPES FROM THE FRIGATE.
Harry and I trudged along side by side, feeling dreadfully out of
spirits at the ill success of our attempt to escape, as also at the
thought of the sad fate which had befallen the good-natured Frenchmen.
We also could not help considering ourselves in a degree guilty of the
death of the three men we had induced to desert, as well as of that of
our friends and their attendants. Tubbs tried to cheer us up.
"Maybe the blacks would have attacked the Frenchmen whether we had been
with them or not," he observed; "and as for the rest, it is the fortune
of war. We tried to escape but failed; better luck next time, say I."
This, however, was but poor consolation, as we could only expect the
harshest treatment at the hands of Captain Roderick, even if he did not
put us to death. Whether he would do that or not was doubtful. The
mate, however, did not seem inclined to ill-treat us, except that we
each had to carry a heavy load, while a dozen men were placed behind and
on each side of us; but we were allowed to march as we liked, and to
converse freely together. Though we had slept the previous night, we
were pretty well tired out when a halt was called and preparations made
to bivouac. Supper was prepared by the cooks, and we were allowed as
large a share as we required. The mate then told us to lie down
together, a couple of black fellows with arms in their hands being
placed over us.
"You'll not attempt to run," observed the mate. "I have given orders to
these fellows to shoot you if you do; so the consequences be on your own
heads."
"No fear of that," answered Harry. "We'll promise to sleep as soundly
as we can until we are called in the morning."
"One good thing, we've not got to keep watch," observed Tom Tubbs; "and
I hope our black guards will keep a look-out for any snake, leopard, or
lion who may chance to poke his nose into the camp; although I wish that
Mr Pikehead had left us our arms to defend ourselves."
We were too tired to talk much, and I believe we all slept soundly until
morning, when we were roused up to breakfast and resume our march. It
was late in the day when we reached the village. Fortunately for us,
the owner of the house we had formerly occupied was still absent, and
the theft committed by the pirates was not discovered. Soon after we
arrived Captain Roderick made his appearance, a sardonic smile on his
countenance.
"You thought to escape me," he said. "You acted foolishly, and must
take the consequences. Had you been shot, your blood would have been on
your heads, not on mine. I intend to take good care that you shall not
play the same trick again. You will now come on board the `Vulture,'
and it is your own fault that you will not be treated with the same
leniency that you were before. My crew will see that I do not allow
such tricks to be played with impunity. Lash their hands behind them,
Pikehead, and bring them along."
The mate, with the aid of three seamen, immediately secured our hands
behind our backs, and we were led down, amid the hoots and derisive
laughter of the population, to the boat which conveyed us on board the
"Vulture." Having been allowed to stand for some minutes in that
condition exposed to the view of the crew, we were ordered down below.
As we passed near the main hatchway, we saw that the slave-deck was
already crowded with blacks, seated literally like herrings in a tub, as
close as they could be packed side by side, with shackles round their
necks and legs. Our destination was, however, lower down by the after
hatchway. As soon as we were below the deck, our arms were released,
and we were able to help ourselves down the narrow ladder which led into
the cable-tier. Here, in a space which allowed us room only to sit with
our knees together, without being able to stand up or walk about, the
mate told us we were to remain.
"You may consider yourselves very fortunate, my fine fellows, that worse
has not happened to you," he said. "How you'll like it if it comes on
to blow, and the hatches are battened down, is more than I can say.
You'll get your food though, for the captain doesn't want to take your
lives--he has some scruples about that--nor do I. Indeed, you might
have escaped as far as I was concerned, although it was fortunate for
you I came, up when I did, or those Ashingo savages would have put you
to death as they did your companions."
"We are grateful for the leniency with which we have been treated, but
may I ask what the captain intends doing with us?" I said.
"Why, I suppose that he intends to sell you two young gentlemen as
slaves in the Brazils. He will give your faces and bodies a coating of
black, and put you with the rest of the negroes," answered the mate.
"And as for you," he exclaimed, turning to Tubbs, "you might have been
treated as a deserter; and if you don't sign articles and join us, you
will probably have to walk the plank. I say this as a hint to you. If
you act wisely, you'll be set at liberty as soon as we get into blue
water."
"You reckon wrongly if you think I'll join this craft or any other like
her," answered Tubbs stoutly. "I'm ready to take the consequences, for
turn pirate I won't; so you have my answer."
The mate laughed.
"Many a fine fellow has said that and changed his tone when he has seen
the plank rigged or the yard-arm with a running bowline from it.
However, I must not waste words on you. I'll send you down your
suppers, and you must manage to stow yourselves away in the best manner
you can think of for sleep. One of you must needs sit up, and he'll
have plenty to do in keeping off the rats and cockroaches, for you'll be
somewhat troubled by them, I suspect."
We thanked the mate for the promise of sending us some supper, and
wished him good-night; and I really believe that, as far as his
brutalised nature would allow, he intended to be kind to us. Cramped as
we were in the hot stifling hold, it was a long time before any one of
us could go to sleep. We were, I should have said, left in total
darkness; not the slightest gleam of light descending into the part of
the hold in which we were confined. At length I was awakened from a
tolerable sleep by a noise which betokened that the ship was getting
under weigh. I did not like to arouse my companions; but Tubbs, who had
been sitting on a locker, started up exclaiming--
"Ay, ay! I'll be on deck in a twinkling." The blow he gave his head
against the beam above him, roused him up. "Bless my heart! I forgot
where I was," he said. "Yes, the ship's under weigh, no doubt about
that, and we shall be out at sea in the course of a few hours if we have
the tide and wind with us, and don't ground on the bar and get knocked
to pieces."
After some time Harry awoke. I told him that the ship was running down
the river.
"Our chance of escape for the present is over, then," he said with a
deep sigh.
He had naturally been thinking of home and Lucy and his blighted
prospects; so indeed had I. Tubbs, as before, tried to cheer us up by
talking on various subjects.
"There's many a slip 'twixt the cup and the lip," he observed.
"Although the captain fancies his craft faster than anything afloat, he
may catch a tartar in the shape of a British man-of-war before we cross
the Atlantic. As to selling us into slavery, I don't believe he'll
attempt it. He must know that before long we would find means of
communicating with a British consul or some other authority, and make
our cases known. If he had talked of selling us to the Moors or Turks,
the case would have been different. Once among those fellows, we should
have found it a hard matter to escape."
"Still he may sell us," observed Harry; "and perhaps months and years
will pass before we can let our friends know where we are."
"Well, well, that'll be better than having to walk the plank or being
run up at the yard-arm," said Tubbs. "We must not cry out until we are
hurt, although I'll own that I'd rather have more room to stretch my
legs in than this place affords. I hope Master Pikehead won't forget to
send us the food he promised; I'm getting rather sharp set already."
Harry and I confessed that we were also feeling very hungry. Even the
talking about food gave a new turn to our thoughts. At last we heard
the hatch above our heads lifted, and the black steward came down with a
bowl of farina and a jug of water. It was the same food the slaves were
fed on, but we thought it wise to make no complaint.
"It shows that the captain has no intention to starve us," observed
Harry. "However, this is better than mouldy biscuit and rancid pork,
such as I have heard say seamen are too often fed upon."
"You've heard say the truth, sir," observed Tubbs. "Often and often
I've known the whole ship's company get no better fare than that, with
little better than bilge water to drink. If we get enough stuff like
this, we shall grow fat, at all events."
The steward, leaving the bowl between us, quickly disappeared up the
hatchway. The only light we had was from a bull's-eye overhead, which
enabled us, as Tubbs said, "barely to see the way to our mouths;" we
could not, at all events, distinguish each other's features. Although
we could not see, we felt the claws of numerous visitors crawling over
us, and smelt them too, and now and then were sensible that a big rat
was nibbling at our toes, although, by kicking and stamping, at the risk
of hitting each other's shins, we kept them at bay. Notwithstanding
this, we managed to sleep pretty soundly at intervals.
Tubbs assured us that the ship was gliding on, although it might be some
time before she reached the bar, as it was impossible to judge at what
rate she was sailing. Now and then we felt her heel over slightly to
starboard, showing that the wind was more abeam, or rather that we were
passing along a reach running to the southward; then, when she came up
again on an even keel, we knew that we were standing directly to the
westward. At last we felt her bows lift, then down she glided, to rise
again almost immediately afterwards, while the increased sound of the
water dashing on her sides showed us that we were crossing the bar.
"There is some sea on, I guess, and I know what it is with these African
rivers. Should the wind suddenly shift southward, we may be driven on a
rock or sandbank, and we and all on board will have a squeak for life,"
observed Tubbs.
"I hope not, although anything might be better than being carried into
slavery," observed Harry. "But we ought not to despair. I have been
thinking and praying over the matter, and know that God can deliver us
if He thinks fit. We must trust Him; I'm sure that's the only thing to
be done. In all the troubles and trials of life. At all times we must
do our duty, and, as I say, trust Him; even when bound hand and foot as
we are at present, all we can do is still to trust Him."
I heartily responded to Harry's remark, and so I believe did Tubbs, who,
although nothing of a theologian, not even knowing the meaning of the
word, was a pious man in his rough way.
"Ay, ay, sir," he said. "I know that God made us, and He has a right to
our service; and if we don't run away from Him and hide ourselves, He'll
look after us a precious deal better than we can look after ourselves.
That's my religion, and it's my opinion it's the sum total of all the
parsons can tell us."
"Not quite," said Harry, "although it goes a long way. We are sinners
in God's sight, whatever we are in the sight of men; and if God in His
mercy hadn't given us a way by which we can be made friends to Him and
saved from punishment, we should be in a bad condition."
"You are right, sir," answered Tubbs; "but to my idea that's all
included in what I said."
We sat listening in silence.
"We are pretty well over the bar now, and I don't think we shall be cast
away this time," he observed a few minutes afterwards.
That he was right we were convinced by the more regular movement of the
vessel, as she slowly rose and fell, moved by the undulations which
rolled in towards the coast. We could judge that she was making good
way, and Tubbs was of opinion that all sail was set, and that we were
standing to the westward. At the time the slaves were fed, we had a
bowl of farina brought us, but the man put it down and disappeared again
without saying a word. Soon afterwards the mate came down, and told me
that I might come on deck for a quarter of an hour to stretch my legs.
I was thankful to breathe the fresh air, although there was but little
of it, and the ship was almost becalmed. I glanced astern, and could
distinguish the shore, although I could no longer make out the mouth of
the river. We had, at all events, got a safe offing. When my time was
up I was sent below and Harry took my place, and he was succeeded by
Tubbs. We were treated, however, with no more consideration than was
afforded to the slaves, who were brought up on deck at intervals in the
same fashion. The hold felt doubly close and oppressive after the
mouthful of fresh air we had enjoyed.
The second night of our captivity was even more trying than the first,
for the atmosphere of the hold, into which the horrible odour from the
slave-deck penetrated, was becoming every hour more and more
unendurable. I feared that should we be kept below during the voyage,
I, at all events, would sink under it, for I already felt sick almost to
death, and my spirits were at a lower ebb than they had ever before
reached. Harry was almost in as bad a condition as I was. Tubbs, who
had been well seasoned in the close air of forecastles, held out better
than we did.
"Don't give way, young gentlemen, whatever you do," he said very
frequently to us. "Cheer up, cheer up! When we get a breeze, some of
it will find its way down here perhaps; and if not, I'll ask the skipper
if he wishes to kill us by inches, and I'll tell him he'll never land
either of us if we are kept shut up in this hold and treated worse than
the negroes. They are born to it, as it were, and we are not, and have
been accustomed to pure air all our lives."
I did not quite agree with Tubbs as to negroes being born to be shut up
in the hold of a slave ship, but I did not just then contradict him. By
a faint gleam, like the light of a glow-worm, which came down from
overhead, we knew that it was morning, and soon afterwards we felt the
ship heel over to larboard, or port as it is now called. In a short
time the increasing motion also showed us that the sea had got up. We
heard sounds which indicated that sail was being shortened. We stood
on, it might have been an hour, on the same tack, when the ship was put
about, and now she heeled over more often, and pitched and tumbled about
in a way which showed that it was blowing fresh. The cries of the
wretched slaves, unaccustomed to the motion, reached our ears, while the
tossing stirred up the bilge water and almost stifled us. Two or three
hours passed, when the ship became somewhat steadier. Tubbs averred
that the helm had been put up, and that we were running before the wind.
"There's something taking place, although I cannot make out just what it
is to a certainty; but I've a notion that there is some craft in sight
which the `Vulture' wants to escape; and if so, I hope she won't."
"So do I, indeed," murmured Harry. "I shall die if we remain here much
longer."
Another hour of suffering and anxiety passed, when Tubbs roused Harry
and me--for we had dropped off in a kind of stupor--by exclaiming--
"Holloa! What was that? A shot, or I'm a Dutchman."
As he spoke I distinctly heard the sound of a gun, though it seemed to
be at a great distance. We listened with bated breath. Again there
came a faint boom, and at the same instant a crash, which told us that
the shot had struck the ship.
"Hurrah! I thought so," cried Tom; "there's a man-of-war in chase of
us, and it is pretty evident that the `Vulture' has no wish to engage
her, or she would not have been trying to get away, as she has been for
some hours past."
We waited now with intense anxiety. We knew that the "Vulture" was a
fast craft, and that it was too likely she had just passed within range
of her pursuer's guns, but might escape notwithstanding. Except by the
motion of the vessel, we could not possibly judge how we were steering.
In spite of the stifling atmosphere, our senses were wide awake. Again
there came the sound of a gun. Although the shot did not strike the
ship, yet it seemed to us that our pursuer must be nearer. Another and
another shot followed. The "Vulture's" guns were now fired, although I
was surprised to find how little noise they appeared to make, and could
scarcely believe that they were fired from our deck, had not Tubbs
assured us of the fact. Then there came a lull, and we heard a whole
broadside fired, the crashing and rending sound showing that the shot
had torn through the bulwarks and sides of the ship. The fearful
shrieks which rose from the hold made us fear that the miserable slaves
had suffered, though perhaps their cries rose from terror as much as
from the injuries they had received. A fearful uproar ensued, the roar
of the great guns, the rattle of musketry, the shouts of the slaver's
crew, the shrieks and cries of the slaves, the groans of the wounded,
the rending and crashing of planks mingled, were well-nigh deafening
even to us. Presently there came a crash. The ship seemed to reel, a
shudder passed through her whole frame.
"They've run us aboard," cried Tubbs, "and maybe the ship with all hands
will be sent to the bottom. We must get out of this somehow to try and
save our lives. There will be no one on the look-out to stop us."
The boatswain's exclamations made us fear that probably our last moments
were at hand.
"We must try and find something to help us to force our way out," cried
Tubbs. "If we cannot get the hatch off, we must make our way through
this bulkhead. Hurrah! here's an iron bar."
As he spoke, Harry and I laid hold of it to be sure that he was not
mistaken. How it came there, of course we could not tell.
"Now, keep behind me, that I may have room to use it," he exclaimed.
We obeyed and he commenced a furious attack on the bulkhead. The crash
which followed showed that he had succeeded in driving in some of the
planking. He worked away with the fury of despair, fully believing that
ere long the ship would be sent to the bottom. The noise he made
prevented our hearing what was going forward on deck; indeed, all sounds
were undistinguishable by this time.
"There is room to pass now," he cried.
He led the way through an opening he had formed. We followed him, but
still found that there was another bulkhead before us. He quickly
attacked that, and in a few seconds had demolished a sufficient portion
to enable us to creep through. We found a ladder, which led, we judged,
into the captain's cabin. We climbed up it, and were just on the point
of springing through a skylight which would have led us on to the
poop-deck, when we saw Captain Roderick himself enter, a pistol in his
right hand and a sword in the other, his countenance exhibiting rage and
despair. He did not observe us. Several casks of powder, which had
been brought up to be more ready at hand, were piled in one corner of
the cabin. He pointed his pistol, his intention was evidently to blow
up the ship and all on board. In another moment his desperate purpose
would have been effected. As if moved by one impulse, we all three
sprang upon him, Tubbs grasping his right wrist and turning the pistol
away, the bullet striking the deck above. Mercifully none of the sparks
fell on the powder. Tubbs, grasping him by the throat, and throwing
himself with his whole force upon him, brought him to the deck, while
Harry and I each seized an arm and knelt upon his body to prevent him
from rising. Although we exerted all our strength, it was with the
greatest difficulty we could keep him down. He seemed now like a wild
beast than a human being. He gnashed his teeth and glared fiercely at
us.
"Be quiet, captain, won't you?" exclaimed Tubbs. "We have saved you and
ourselves from being blown into the air, and you ought to thank us."
The captain made no answer. I looked round for a piece of rope or some
means of securing him; for had he been set loose, he would probably have
accomplished his purpose, and we, of course, were eager to get on deck
and try and save our lives, for we fully believed that the "Vulture" was
on the point of sinking. The guns, however, had ceased firing, although
there was a stamping overhead, the clashing of hangers, and the
occasional sounds of pistols at the further end of the ship.
"The man-of-war's men have gained the after part, and have driven the
pirates forward," observed Tubbs; "we shall soon have some of our people
here to help us."
Again the captain gnashed his teeth and made an effort to free himself.
"It's all of no use, captain," said Tubbs. "I don't want to take your
life, but if you don't keep quiet, I shall be obliged to draw my knife
across your windpipe."
The captain evidently fully believed that the boatswain intended to do
what he threatened.
"You've treated us with less severity than we might have expected,
Captain Roderick," said Harry. "Will you give us your word that you
will not again attempt to destroy the ship, or to attack any of the
people who have captured her, and we will conduct you into a cabin where
you must remain until to-morrow, or until you are set at liberty?"
Captain Roderick made no reply.
All this time the ship, I should have said, had been rolling and
pitching, and it was very evident that she had broken loose from the
man-of-war. It might possibly be that the pirates had gained the upper
hand, but the appearance of Captain Roderick below convinced us to the
contrary. At length the sounds I have described ceased, although there
was a continuous tramping of feet overhead, and the rattling of blocks
and yards.
"They are shortening sail," observed Tubbs; "we shall soon have some one
below to relieve us of this gentleman, and I'm thankful to say I don't
believe the ship's going down just yet. If he had thought she was, he
wouldn't have taken the trouble to try and blow her up."
We could see Captain Roderick's eyes glaring at us, but Tubbs held him
too tight by the throat to allow him to speak. So violent were his
struggles, however, that he nearly got one of his arms loose, on which
Tom tightened his grip until the pirate captain was nearly black in the
face. In spite of this, giving a sudden jerk, he freed the arm Harry
was holding down, when three persons appeared at the door. One was, I
saw, a naval officer, by his uniform--the other two, seamen. I shouted
to them to come to my assistance, and seeing what we were about, they
sprang forward.
"Get some rope and lash this man; he is mad, I believe," I cried out.
"Go and get it," said the officer. One of the sailors sprang on deck,
while the two newcomers assisted us in keeping down the infuriated
pirate. He was, I fully believed, from the almost supernatural strength
he exhibited, mad.
The seaman quickly returned with a coil of rope, with which the officer
and his men, aided by Tubbs, soon lashed Captain Roderick's arms and
legs in a way which prevented him from moving until he was secured to
the mizenmast, which came through the cabin, when we felt that we were
safe from his attacks. I had not hitherto looked into the countenance
of the officer, nor he into mine. What was my surprise, then, to see a
face I well knew.
"Charley!" I exclaimed.
"Dick!" was the answer. "Can it be you?" and my brother and I grasped
each other's hands. He had grown into a tall young man, and certainly I
should not have recognised him by his figure. I was also greatly
altered; besides he would not have recognised me in my present
condition--my countenance pale, my dress begrimed with dirt, torn, and
travel-stained. I introduced Harry and Tubbs to him, and he shook hands
with them both. There was no time for talking. He told us that the
frigate had lighted the slaver, which had refused to heave to, and had
had the audacity to fire at his Majesty's ship. A gale coming on, as
the only means of securing her, the frigate had run the slaver on board,
when he with a lieutenant and eight men had leapt down on her deck,
expecting to be followed by more of the crew, but, before they had time
to spring on board, the ships parted. The slaver's crew, as he called
them, had made a desperate resistance, but a considerable number having
been killed and more badly wounded, the survivors had been driven
forward and yielded. "Having ceased to resist, the slaver's crew," he
said, "had promised to assist in shortening sail, and apparently in good
faith, having yielded up their arms, set about doing so. We have now
got under snug canvas. There is too heavy a sea running to allow of a
boat with more hands being sent to our assistance. However, as we have
complete mastery of the people, we can do very well without them. Mr
Hallton, the second lieutenant of the `Rover,' our frigate, was
inquiring for the captain of this craft, when he was told that he must
either have been killed or fallen overboard, but one of his crew
suggested that he might have gone below. Another then owned that he had
heard the captain say, that sooner than fall into the hands of an enemy,
he would blow the ship up. On hearing this, Mr Hallton sent me down
below to search for him."
"You would have been too late had we not providentially prevented him
from executing his mad scheme," I observed; and I then told him how we
had discovered the captain in the very act of attempting to blow up the
ship. "But you mistake the character of this craft," I said; and I
briefly told him how she had captured the "Arrow," and how we had been
treated since we fell into Captain Roderick's hands.
"That greatly alters the aspect of affairs," he observed, looking grave.
"If you will come on deck with me, we will inform Mr Hallton. Perhaps
he is inclined to treat the crew rather leniently, and to put more
confidence in their promises than he would do if he were aware of her
real character."
Harry on this desired Tubbs to watch the pirate.
"I should be glad to do it, sir, but I should like a sniff of the
sea-breeze," answered Tom. "I want just to pump out all the foul air
I've got down my throat."
"Well," said Charley, laughing, "one of my men shall remain instead of
you. Noakes, stand by this man, and shoot him through the head if any
one approaches to set him free or he manages to cast off the lashings,
although he'll not do that in a hurry, I suspect."
On going on deck, we found Mr Hallton, the second lieutenant of the
"Rover," standing aft, giving directions to heave the dead bodies
overboard and to collect the wounded, to attend to whom he summoned
several of the most respectable-looking of their shipmates. The
"Vulture" had not suffered much in her rigging, and was now hove to
under a closely-reefed main-topsail. She rode so easily that I was not
aware until then that a heavy sea was running, and had been surprised at
Charley telling me that the two ships could not communicate. Charley
introduced me to Mr Hallton, and briefly ran over the events of which I
had given him an account.
"A pirate, do you say she is?" exclaimed the lieutenant. "I must really
beg leave to doubt that. She is full of slaves, in the first place, and
the captain and his crew very naturally fought to defend their property.
But you say, Westerton, that you have found the captain. I will
examine him and ascertain the state of the case."
"But my brother here, sir, and Mr Bracewell, and the boatswain of the
`Arrow,' aver that they were taken out of their vessel and detained by
force on board this ship, and there can be no doubt of her piratical
character."
"I beg that you will wait to give your opinion until you are asked for
it, Mr Westerton," answered the lieutenant in a gruff tone. "I say
that she's a slaver, and, as such, being taken full of slaves, we will
condemn her. With regard to her piratical character, that has to be
proved."
I was very much surprised at the way in which the lieutenant spoke.
Charley told me that the report on board was that he himself had served
on board a slaver, if not a pirate, in his younger days, and that he was
stubborn and ill-tempered in the extreme. "Whether or not he has found
any of his old associates on board the craft I cannot say, but I know
that the crew gave in very soon when they saw him leading the boarders
across the deck. To be sure he fought like a tiger, and cut down
several fellows, so that I cannot suppose that he has any great love for
them, at all events."
The cries and groans which ascended from the slave-deck soon drew our
attention towards it, and Mr Hallton sent Charley with four hands down
to ascertain their condition. I accompanied him, having procured a
brace of pistols and a hanger, without which I should not have liked to
venture among them. A dreadful sight met our eyes. Three or four of
the frigate's shot had entered and swept right across the deck, taking
off the heads of not less than eight men in one row, and wounding others
on the further side of the ship in another row as if it had gone through
diagonally; while the legs of a still greater number had been shot away.
Most of the badly wounded were dead, but others were still writhing in
agony. I need not picture all the horrors we witnessed. Charley told
me to go on deck and obtain assistance. The lieutenant replied that I
might take some of the slaver's crew, but that he could not spare his
own men. I went forward to where they were collected, but found only
three, to whom Harry and I had rendered some service in dressing their
wounds, willing to give themselves any trouble in performing the task.
They, however, got tackles rigged, and we hoisted up three and sometimes
four bodies together, all dripping with gore, a terrible sight, and then
swung them overboard. Even this took some time. The wounded thought
that they were to be treated in the same manner, and we had great
difficulty in persuading them that we intended to do them no harm, but
rather to attend to their hurts. Altogether, fifty men had been killed,
or had died from fright, or succumbed directly they were lifted on deck
from their wounds. Charley proposed having the survivors up, so that
the slave-deck might be washed and cleaned from the mass of gore and
filth collected upon it, but Mr Hallton replied that it was perfectly
unnecessary, and that if the slaves should break loose, we might have to
kill them all, or be ourselves overpowered. This I thought very likely
to happen, though I felt that a few might safely be brought up while the
part of the deck they had sat upon was cleansed. Harry and I, however,
did our best to attend to their wants. We carried down water and
supplied a cup to each. They mostly received the water scarcely casting
a glance of gratitude towards us; but one man exhibited a marked
contrast to this behaviour, and, as I handed him the cup, he exclaimed
before drinking it--"Tankee, massa, tankee, massa," and then quaffed it
eagerly, showing how much his parched throat required the refreshing
fluid.
"Do you understand English?" I asked, thinking perhaps that these were
the only words he could speak.
"Yes, massa; him talky English, him serve board English ship."
I inquired his name. He told me it was Aboh. I found, however, that
although he might understand me, his vocabulary was very limited. I
should have liked to have given him another cup of water, but as I knew
that the rest of the slaves would consider themselves ill-treated if I
favoured one more than another, I refrained from doing so, but I
promised to remember him. I then begged that he would speak to his
companions, and advise them to be quiet, telling them that we would do
everything in our power for their benefit. I heard him shout out what
appeared to me to be perfect gibberish, but it had the desired effect,
and they at once became far more tranquil than they had hitherto been.
Night was now rapidly coming on; the frigate was hove to about half a
mile to windward, and, as Tubbs observed to me, both ships appeared to
be making very fine weather of it considering the heavy gale blowing.
The frigate showed signal lights, and the lieutenant ordered ours to be
hoisted in return. Captain Roderick had hitherto remained lashed to the
mast, but he could not, without cruelty, be left there all night, and it
was necessary to decide what should be done with him. Lieutenant
Hallton considered that it would be sufficient to shut him up in one of
the cabins and place a sentry over him. Charley suggested that his
wrists, at all events, should be placed in irons, as in his savage mood
it was impossible to say what he might do. The lieutenant was
obstinate.
"The man was only acting as he believed right in defending his own ship,
and I'm not one to tyrannise over a fallen enemy," he answered in
somewhat a scornful tone.
Charley could say no more. The lieutenant went below to look out for a
suitable cabin in which to place Captain Roderick--Tubbs, Harry, and I,
with three men, accompanied him. To our surprise, we found the pirate
quiet enough. His mad fit had apparently passed away.
"I am sorry to give you all this trouble," he said quite calmly. "You
young gentlemen will, I hope, return good for evil, and I shall be
grateful."
We were, however, not to be deceived by such an address. Charley
replied that his orders were to place him in his cabin by himself, and
that was better treatment than he might have expected.
"Certainly," answered Captain Roderick, looking quite pleased; "it is a
favour I should not have ventured to ask for. If my steward has
escaped, I'll trouble you to tell him I should like some food. He is a
good cook, and if you order him, he will prepare supper for you,
gentlemen. He knows where all the provisions are stowed and will
speedily carry out your directions."
On this being reported to Mr Hallton, he immediately ordered supper to
be prepared in the chief cabin.
As I moved across the deck, the only difference I could see between the
man-of-war's men and the pirates was, that the former were armed and
that the latter were not; but as they still numbered more men than the
party from the "Rover," it struck me that they might easily possess
themselves of the means of offence and master their captors. During
daylight it was not likely that they would venture to do this, as the
frigate would quickly have retaken the ship. I clearly remember this
idea passing through my mind. As Harry and I had had nothing but farina
for the past three days, and for several hours we had been without food,
we were very glad when we were summoned into the cabin. Here we found a
really handsome repast spread out, everything secured by "fiddles" and
"puddings," for the ship was tumbling about too much to allow the plates
and glasses otherwise to have remained on the table.
As Tubbs was a respectable man in his appearance, the lieutenant, with
more politeness than might have been expected, invited him to supper.
It may be supposed that we all did justice to the meal placed before us.
Charley had to go on deck until the lieutenant had finished supper;
when he had done so, he went up saying that he would send my brother
down to have some food.
Charley, however, had to hurry again on deck, as he said Mr Hallton
wanted him to keep a look-out. The lieutenant had, considering the time
he had been occupied, imbibed no small amount of liquor, though it did
not appear to have affected his head.
Harry, Tubbs, and I ate our suppers more leisurely. As may be supposed,
having obtained but a few winks of sleep the two previous nights, we
soon became drowsy Harry proposed turning in.
"If we do, we must keep one eye open and our hangers by our sides,"
observed Tubbs. "I don't quite like the freedom of the lieutenant with
these buccaneering fellows. If we hadn't got the King's ship close to
us, they would be playing us some scurvy trick, depend upon that."
As Harry and I could be of no use on deck at night, and Tubbs really
required rest, we all lay down, Harry and I each taking a sofa at the
further end of the cabin, while Tubbs stowed himself away in a berth
which had been occupied by one of the mates who had been killed in the
late action. I was just dropping off to sleep when I heard a scuffle,
and on looking up, what was my dismay to see two seamen grasping the
arms of the lieutenant, who had just before entered the cabin, while two
others were hauling Charley along. The sentry, instead of attempting to
assist Mr Hallton, presented his musket at us, exclaiming--
"If you interfere, gentlemen, I am ordered to shoot you."
As we saw several other men at the entrance of the cabin with muskets in
their hands, we knew that resistance was useless. I was indeed too much
astonished and confused, suddenly awakened as I had been out of my
sleep, to say or do anything. I fancied for some seconds that I was
dreaming. Here were the tables turned, and that with a vengeance. It
was very evident that the pirates had tampered with the man-of-war's
men, who were probably a bad lot, as was too often the case on board
King's ships in those days, and that thus they had easily been won over.
Mr Hallton's folly and obstinacy had also greatly contributed to
enable the pirates to carry out their project. I should have been less
surprised had Captain Roderick been at liberty, but, as far as I could
then see, he had had no hand in the business. I had good reason to
dread the way he would serve us when he once more found himself in
command of the ship and that we were in his power, when he would, I
feared, wreak his vengeance on our heads for the way we had treated him.
These thoughts passed rapidly through my mind. Harry and Tubbs, who had
been fast asleep, were awakened by the entrance of the party, and now
sat up rubbing their eyes, as much astonished as I had been.
Tubbs, who was but partly awake, sprang to his feet and made a step
forward as if to interfere, but seeing the sentry pointing his musket at
his head, he sat down again.
"Well, this is a pretty go," he exclaimed. "Who commands this ship I
should like to know, and then I can settle whether I'll do duty or turn
in and go to sleep again?"
"Belay your jaw-tackle, master," growled out one of the pirates who had
advanced into the cabin. "You're mighty too free with your tongue, fine
fellow as you think yourself. A better man than you commands her, and
he'll soon show you whose master."
I must own I cared very little about Mr Hallton, but I felt the deepest
anxiety as to how Charley might be treated. I feared the pirates less
than I did the "Rover's" men, who had thus turned traitors to their King
and country, for they were too likely to add crime upon crime, and to
murder their officers. Had Mr Hallton and Charley been armed, we might
have made an effort to release them, but they had both been deprived of
their swords and I felt sure that Harry, Tubbs, and I would be
unsuccessful, and only make matters worse.
The seamen, having now bound the arms of the two officers behind them,
led them into an inner cabin, where, shutting the door, they locked and
bolted it.
"Now, you three, go on deck and help work the ship," said one of the
men, whom I recognised as the third officer of the "Vulture," but who
had slipped into sailor's clothes, probably to deceive his captors.
I could scarcely suppose that all this time Captain Roderick had any
hand in the mutiny, for, to the best of my belief, he had been shut up
in the cabin, and was still there. The mate teemed to be of the same
opinion, for he bade the sentry open the door. He did so, when Captain
Roderick was seen stretched on his couch. At the first glance I thought
he was dead, but he was only in a deep sleep, so deep that all the noise
outside had not aroused him. The mate shook him by the arm, but it had
no effect. I was thankful for this, for I dreaded that, should he awake
and find us in his power, he might commit some act of violence. Lest he
should be awakened, Harry, Tubbs, and I gladly made our escape on deck.
I prayed that no harm would be done to Charley, for I felt more anxious
about him than about myself. On reaching the deck, I looked out for the
frigate, I could just see her light away to windward, but it seemed to
me much further off than before. The gale had abated somewhat, but both
ships were still hove to. The mate speedily followed us up, and gave
orders to the men to bring some long spars to the quarter-deck. He then
got a grating, to which he fixed the spars upright, so as to form a
cone-shaped structure; then turning it over, he secured some rather
shorter spars in the same way, fixing a shot at the point where they
united. Inside the points of the upper end, a ship's lantern was
securely hung, when the machine was carefully lowered overboard, the
light we had hitherto carried being extinguished. Immediately this was
done, the order was given to put the helm up, and the foresail being
squared away, we ran before the gale, leaving the light burning at the
spot where we had been. There was no doubt about its object; it was to
deceive the man-of-war, so that, until the trick was discovered, it was
not likely that we should be chased. The hope that I had hitherto
entertained that we might, after all, be quickly recaptured, now
vanished. The mate assumed the command--the crew seemed willing to obey
him. Whether he intended to retain it or not I could not tell, but I
thought that he certainly would should he find that Captain Roderick
remained as mad as I was convinced he was when he attempted to blow up
the ship.
As the gale slightly decreased, more sail was made, and before morning
the "Vulture" had as much canvas packed on her as she could carry. We
were kept on deck pulling and hauling until our arms ached. When dawn
broke I looked astern. The frigate was nowhere to be seen.
CHAPTER SIX.
MORNING--THE FRIGATE NOT IN SIGHT--AGAIN PRISONERS--THE MATE OF THE
"VULTURE" TAKES COMMAND--ORDERS US TO DO DUTY AS SEAMEN--THE LIEUTENANT
AND CHARLEY KEPT BOUND--WE GO BELOW TO SLEEP--AWAKENED AND SEE CAPTAIN
RODERICK WITH PISTOL IN HAND APPROACHING THE LIEUTENANT AND CHARLEY--WE
SPRING UP, OVERPOWER HIM, AND RELEASE OUR FRIENDS--SUPPOSE THE CAPTAIN
TO BE MAD--A DISCUSSION AMONG THE CREW--HOPES OF RECOVERING THE SHIP--
THE "VULTURE" COMES TO AN ANCHOR--A SINKING BOAT GETS, ADRIFT--FEARFUL
DEATH OF ONE OF THE CREW--MANY OF THE SLAVES DIE--A GALE COMES ON--
DANGEROUS POSITION--ATTEMPT TO BEAT OFF THE LAND--DRIVEN TOWARDS THE
SHORE--THE SHIP AMONG THE BREAKERS--WE SET THE CAPTAIN AT LIBERTY--THE
SHIP STRIKES--WE KNOCK THE SHACKLES OFF THE SLAVES' LIMBS--THEY RUSH ON
DECK--WE FORM A RAFT AND LAND THE SURVIVORS--RETURN ON BOARD AND SUPPLY
OURSELVES WITH GUNS, AMMUNITION, AND STORES--REGAIN THE SHORE--THE
BLACKS, WITH ONE EXCEPTION, HAVE DISAPPEARED.
As the day advanced the wind decreased, and the ship closehauled was
headed up towards the coast. How far off we were I could not tell, but
Tubbs told me he should not consider that we were less than a hundred
miles, perhaps more.
"So far that's satisfactory. It is possible that the `Rover' may
overtake us," I observed.
"If she finds out the course we have steered, sir; but we had run
seventy or eighty miles at least before she was likely to discover the
trick the pirates played her. Besides, to tell you the truth, I'd
rather she didn't overtake us. The fellows on board would fight with
ropes round their necks, and they would not give in as long as a plank
held together, and then we should have to go down with them. I would
rather run the chance of getting on shore and making our escape
afterwards."
I at once agreed with him, and we made up our minds that it would be
well for us to get out of the ship without the risk of another battle.
The mate, I observed, remained on deck, issuing all the necessary
orders; the boatswain of the "Vulture" and one of the man-of-war's men,
with one of the mutineers, acting as his subordinates. He ordered Harry
and me about, treating us like the common seamen, and if we were not as
smart as he wished us to be, he sent the boatswain or the mutineer from
the "Rover" with a rope's end to start us. Tubbs at once fell into his
ordinary duty of boatswain. The mate, it appeared to me, wished to win
him over, and always spoke civilly to him, although he was not very
particular in regard to his language when he addressed us. The evening
was drawing in, we had been on deck all day. I was, of course, very
anxious to know how it fared with poor Charley, who was kept a prisoner
below. Whenever Harry or I attempted to leave the deck, the mate called
us back and told us to attend to our duty. We got some food, however,
for the cook, a good-natured black fellow, gave us some at the caboose,
or we should have starved. Still, it was much better than being shut up
in the dark hold, and, of course, we wished to avoid being sent below to
our former place of confinement. I saw some messes of soup and porridge
being cooked and carried into the cabin, and I concluded, therefore,
that Lieutenant Hallton and Charley would be fed. Harry and I agreed
that it would be wiser for us to obey the orders of the mate as long as
he thought fit to issue them.
"I shall go and lie down in the cabin," said Harry to me. "I can but be
sent up again, and I have no fancy to go and sleep among the men."
Accordingly, as soon as it grew dark, while the mate was looking another
way, we slipped into the cabin, and coiled ourselves up on the sofas we
had before occupied. Tired as I was, however, the heat and the
cockroaches and the thoughts of our dangerous position kept me awake,
although I tried hard to go to sleep. A lamp hung from the deck above,
but the part of the cabin where we were was in perfect shade. I had not
lain long when I saw the door of Captain Roderick's cabin open, and out
he stepped, looking round him as if trying to recover his scattered
senses. Presently he advanced across the cabin, when, by the light
which fell upon him, I saw that he held a pistol in his hand; what he
was about to do with it I could not tell. To my horror, he opened the
door of the cabin in which the lieutenant and Charley were confined.
Although he had looked unusually calm as the light fell on his
countenance, the moment I saw his movements I felt convinced that he had
some evil intention. Springing up, I grasped Harry by the arm, and
rushed towards the open door. I could see the lieutenant and Charley
standing upright close together, with their arms bound behind them
against the opposite bulkhead.
"Oh, oh!" exclaimed the captain, fixing his eyes on the lieutenant; "you
thought to capture me and hang me at your yard-arm; but the yarn's not
spun nor the bullet cast which is to take my life. I might order you on
deck and run you up to the yard-arm before five minutes are over; but I
intend to have the satisfaction of shooting you myself."
Lieutenant Hallton, unprincipled man as I believe he was, stood calm and
unmoved. Charley was endeavouring to draw his arms out of the ropes
which bound them. Twice Captain Roderick lowered his pistol as if he
had changed his mind, but still he went on taunting the unfortunate
officer. It would have been prudent in the latter to have held his
tongue, but instead he went on answering taunt for taunt, rather than
endeavouring to calm the rage of the pirate captain, which increased
till I feared every instant that he would pull the trigger.
Harry and I stood ready to spring upon him, but I saw that in doing so
we might run the risk of making him fire the pistol, and bring about the
very catastrophe we desired to prevent Charley in the meantime caught
sight of us. I made a sign to Harry to get out his knife. I knew that
to cut the ropes which bound my brother's hands would be the work of a
moment, and I hoped, by the suddenness of the attack we were about to
make, to keep Captain Roderick down until that object was effected. We
should then be three to one, or four to one if we saved the lieutenant's
life.
Harry understood perfectly what he was to do. One bound would carry him
to where the pirate stood. The moment came, I sprang forward, and
throwing my arms round his neck, kicked him violently behind the knees.
Although I was so much lighter, the effect was what I expected. Down he
fell, and his pistol went off, the ball grazing the lieutenant's
forehead. The lashings which held Charley were cut, and he immediately
came to my assistance, while Harry performed the same office for the
lieutenant without difficulty. The sound of the pistol would, I feared,
bring some of the crew down upon us. Fortunately at that moment a
strong breeze had struck the ship. The officers were issuing their
orders, so that we had hopes we might be undisturbed. No time, however,
was to be lost. We quickly lashed the pirate's arms and legs, and
crammed a handkerchief into his mouth. Lieutenant Hallton proposed to
throw him overboard, and then, rushing together on deck, to master the
officers, and try to recall the crew back to their duty. To the first
part of the proposal none of us agreed, but we forthwith dragged the
unhappy man back to his cot and lifted him in. He appeared to me to be
insensible. At all events, when Charley took the handkerchief out of
his mouth, he did not cry out or utter a word, although his eyes glared
at us.
"We might have put you to death," said Charley, "but you are safe if you
will remain quiet, and not attempt to summon any one to set you free."
The pirate did not reply, and I was doubtful if he understood what was
said to him. He must indeed have been surprised at finding himself
again a prisoner at the very moment he supposed that he had regained his
authority. We had now to decide what to do. We might certainly master
one or two officers, but it was a question if the men from the "Rover"
would return to their duty, and still less likely that the pirates would
yield to our authority. Lieutenant Hallton then suggested that we
should drag the pirate up on deck, and, holding a pistol to his head,
threaten to shoot him if he did not order the crew to obey us. To this
I for one strongly objected.
Charley thought that Captain Roderick was perfectly mad, and I also was
very unwilling to injure a brother of Mr Trunnion's, villain as he was.
"If he is really mad, he will not know what has happened," said Charley.
"The best thing you can do is to return on deck, and try and negotiate
yourself with the mate, who has now the command, and will probably wish
to keep it. Tell him that I am your brother, and as he has no one on
board who understands navigation, that I shall be happy to assist him in
navigating the ship; that we have no wish to inform against him and his
men if we obtain our liberty, and that all we request is that he will
set us on shore at the first place we touch at."
This seemed the only feasible plan, and Harry and I set off to try and
find Tubbs and consult him, while Charley and the lieutenant returned to
the cabin in which they had been confined. Harry and I, as agreed on,
went on deck.
Our absence had not been discovered. Slowly groping now on one side,
now on the other, we at length discovered Tubbs. Taking him by the arm,
I led him away apart from where any one was standing.
"To my mind, sir, the mate will be very much obliged to you for what you
have done. He has no wish to give up the command, I can see that; and
if you can persuade Captain Roderick--should he come to his senses--that
such is the case, we should have him on our side. I suspect, also, that
there are two or three of the `Rover's' men who are sorry for their
conduct, and would join us. The truth is, I believe, when Captain
Roderick is in his right mind, that he wishes he had a better calling,
but when the mad fit comes over him, he goes back to his bad ways."
"That may be true," I could not help remarking, "but it is no excuse for
him; he must have an evilly-disposed mind to have taken to such a
calling; he should seek for strength from Heaven to overcome his wicked
propensities. Even the worst men at times regret the harm they have
done on account of the inconvenience and suffering it has caused them,
but the next time temptation is presented they commit the same crime,
and so it goes on to the end."
It was settled, therefore, that the next day Harry and I should go
boldly up to the mate and speak to him as agreed on, while we were to
see that no one in the meantime came down to set the captain at liberty,
though, as Tubbs observed, "The mate would take very good care of that."
Soon after this a fresh watch was set, and as we were supposed to be in
the first watch, we took the opportunity, accompanied by Tubbs, of again
slipping down below. Scarcely had we stowed ourselves away out of
sight, than the mate came down and looked into the captain's cabin. As
not a word was spoken by either, we concluded that he had not discovered
the state of things; for, locking the door and taking away the key, he
returned to his own cabin, which was further forward on the opposite
side. Altogether, as must be seen, affairs were in a curious state on
board that ship. I at length dropped off to sleep. How long it was
after I closed my eyes I know not, when I heard a sound like that of a
cable running out Tubbs started up at the same moment. "Why, we have
just come to an anchor," he exclaimed. "We must have been closer in
with the land than we supposed."
Harry being awakened, we both stole quietly on deck. The crew had
furled sails, the night was perfectly calm, the stars shone brightly
overhead. Looking over the larboard side, we saw the shore, a high land
with a point running from it, off which we lay. By the ripple of the
water against the bows, I knew that a strong current was running, which
accounted for the ship having been brought up. Looking forward, I saw
that a bright light was burning at the bowsprit end, and presently it
was answered by a rocket fired from the shore, which rose high in the
air, scattering its drops as it fell. Exclamations of satisfaction
escaped the mate and several of the crew who were on deck.
"Lower the starboard quarter-boat," shouted the mate.
"She's well-nigh knocked to pieces, and can't swim," was the answer.
"Lower the larboard boat."
This was done, and several of the crew jumped into her, but most of them
as quickly hauled themselves on board again. She sank beneath their
feet, as she too had been injured by the frigate's shot. The boat
getting adrift, one of the men, before he could spring up the side, was
drifted away in her, the current of which I have spoken carrying him
rapidly astern. The longboat amidships was in a worse condition, being
riddled with shot.
"I hope that the people on shore will send off to us," observed the
mate; "it's very certain we cannot get to them until the boats are
repaired."
"They'll not do that in a hurry; for, as it happens, the carpenter and
his crew are all killed, and there is not a man on board able to do the
work," I heard Tubbs observe.
In the meantime, the cries of the poor fellow in the sinking boat
reached our ears, but it was impossible to render him any assistance.
Farther and farther he drifted at a rapid rate, until he and the boat
were lost sight of, although, we could hear his shouts every minute
becoming fainter and fainter. At last there arose a dreadful shriek,
which, although from a distance, was piercingly clear.
"Poor fellow! Jack shark has got him," said Tubbs. "There are plenty
of those creatures about here, and I was sure that it wouldn't be long
before they had hold of him."
I have not mentioned the poor slaves all this time. The wounded were
suffering dreadfully, and since they had again been sent down to the hot
slave-deck, several had died. The mate, while waiting for the expected
boat, ordered some hands below to overhaul them. Six dead bodies were
brought up, which were without ceremony thrown overboard, as if they
were so many rotten sheep, and the men reported several more not likely
to live out the night. The mate, hardened villain as he was, did not
order them to be got rid of, as was sometimes done by slavers to save
themselves trouble, and to economise the food the poor creatures might
have consumed. He became impatient when, after waiting some time, no
boat appeared. The weather, too, although so fine and calm when we
brought up, gave indications of a change. The sky was overcast, and
heavy undulations began to roll in towards the shore. Though as yet the
wind had not increased, our position was becoming dangerous, and I for
one wished that we were miles off the coast.
"If there's no harbour into which we can run, we shall be in a bad way,"
said Tubbs. "I suspect that the mate doesn't know of one, or we should
have steered in for it at once."
"What had we better do?" I asked.
"Do, sir! Why, there's nothing we can do but ask God to take care of
us. If it comes on to blow, as I believe it will, ten to one but that
the ship is driven on shore, and with the heavy surf there will be,
before many hours are over, breaking on the coast, and the sharks
waiting for us outside, there won't be many who will reach the shore
alive. The best swimmers could not help themselves, and that's all I
can say."
I was convinced of the truth of what Tubbs said. That he was right with
respect to a gale approaching was soon proved; the wind, bursting
suddenly on us, striking the ship, and, although all her sails were
furled, making her heel over before it, and at the same time the rollers
which came in from the offing increased in height, and we could hear
their roar as they broke on the shore to leeward. The ship pitched
fearfully into them, and every moment I expected to see the cable part.
Should such be the case, I was very sure that not many minutes
afterwards all on board would be struggling for their lives. I thought
of my brother and the lieutenant, and of the unhappy captain. I
intended, should the cable part, immediately to rush below and set them
all at liberty. Although the captain had so cruelly ill-treated us, I
could not reconcile it to my conscience to allow him to perish without a
chance of escaping, which he would do were he left bound hand and foot.
I told Harry what I thought of doing.
"No doubt," he said. "Should the captain escape, he would scarcely fail
to be grateful to us for saving his life; and if he is drowned
notwithstanding, we have done our duty."
The mate, who had been below, now came on deck. He evidently did not
like the look of things. Two or three times he went forward and
examined the cable, at which the ship seemed to be tugging with all her
might as she rose on the summits of the heavy foaming swells. He then
got another cable ranged to let go should the first part.
"If I were him, I'd get ready to make sail. The sky looks to me as if
the wind were coming more to the south'ard; and if so, we may chance to
stand off shore should the ship cast the right way."
"I would not hesitate to tell him so," I observed; "when his life may
depend upon it, he may perhaps take your advice, although he will not
follow that of any other man."
"At all events, I'll try it," said Tubbs; and going up to the mate, he
told him what he thought. I had very little hope, however, that the
mate would listen to him.
"You think yourself a better seaman than I am. Just go and attend to
your duty," was the answer. Not two minutes had elapsed, however,
before the mate ordered the crew to stand by the halyards. Presently he
shouted, "All hands make sail."
The boatswain went forward, axe in hand, to cut the cable. The
topsails, closely-reefed, were let fall, the fore-staysail and jib
hoisted.
"Cut!" shouted the mate.
The ship cast the right way to starboard, the helm was put to port, and
she begun to stand off from the shore.
"She'll do it, and we shall have a new lease of life," observed Tubbs
when he rejoined Harry and me; "that is to say, if the wind holds as it
is; but if not, the chances of our hauling off the shore are doubtful."
For some minutes the ship stood on with her head to the north-west, all
hands anxiously watching the sails, and casting a look every now and
then towards the dark outline of the shore, which could be distinguished
through the gloom. The current was all this time drifting us to the
northward, but it appeared to me that we were getting no farther from
the coast. Of that, however, it was difficult to judge by the rate at
which we were sailing, as although she might be moving fast through the
water, she might really be making but little way over the ground. Tubbs
several times went aft to the binnacle.
"She has fallen off two points, I'm sorry to say," he observed; "still
it is possible that we may beat off, as the wind may shift again; but I
wish that it had kept steady, and we should have done it."
Scarcely, however, had he spoken, when the sails gave a loud flap.
"No higher!" shouted the mate to the man at the helm, "or you'll have
her aback."
The helm was put up in time to prevent this danger.
On looking over the starboard side, we now saw that the land was broad
on the beam, and that we were thus standing almost parallel with the
coast, towards which it was too evident that the heavy rollers were
gradually setting us. Still it was possible, as Tubbs thought, to keep
off the shore until daylight, when the mouth of a river might be
discovered and we might run into it; or the wind might again shift, and
we should, once more, be able to stand off, and get to a safe distance
from the hungry breakers, which we could hear roaring under our lee. I
was struck by the change which had come over the crew. Generally, when
on deck together, they were shouting and swearing, and exchanging rough
jokes or laughing loudly. Now scarcely a man spoke, all stood at their
stations turning their gaze towards the shore. It was evident they were
fully aware of the dangerous position in which the ship was placed. I
asked Tubbs how long he thought the ship could be kept off the land,
standing as she was now.
"Oh, maybe for half an hour, maybe for less," he answered. "The current
is sending her along at the rate of two or three knots an hour, and we
may fall in with some headland which we are unable to weather, or we may
find ourselves standing across a wide bay which will lengthen the time
before she drives on shore."
"At all events, I will tell my brother and Mr Hallton. It will be
wrong to let them remain longer in ignorance of the danger we are in.
Perhaps we ought to set the captain at liberty."
"No, no, sir; let him stay until the last, we don't know what mad things
he will do if he comes on deck. Perhaps he will be shooting the mate or
one of us. It will be time enough to let him out of the cabin when all
chance of saving the ship is gone."
I saw at once the prudence of this, and settled to act accordingly.
Taking an opportunity, I slipped below, and found Charley and Mr
Hallton asleep. Having roused them up, "I have not got very pleasant
information to give you," I said; and I then told them that Tubbs
considered the ship would drive on shore in less than half an hour.
Mr Hallton, though supposed to be a brave man, was much more agitated
than was Charley.
"The ship cast on this abominable coast in less than half an hour!" he
exclaimed. "Why, even down here, the sound of the breakers reaches us."
"Well, Dick, if the worst comes to the worst, we must have a struggle
for life," said my brother calmly. "You stick to me, and I'll do my
best to help you. I am well accustomed to the sort of work we shall
have to go through, and I hope that we shall manage somehow or other to
get on shore." Of course, they were both unwilling to remain longer
below, and as neither the mate nor the crew were likely to interfere,
they made up their minds to come on deck with me. I had some hopes that
Mr Hallton, who was a first-rate seaman, might devise some means for
escaping. I first consulted Charley about setting the captain at
liberty, but he thought that it would not be prudent to do so until the
last moment, when it would be right to give him a chance of saving his
life with the rest of us. We soon gained the deck. Whether Charley or
the lieutenant were observed, I could not tell. I waited anxiously to
hear what opinion Mr Hallton might offer as to the state of affairs.
"If we get much nearer the shore, we must bring up, and perhaps the
anchor will hold until the wind moderates. It is the only chance we
have of saving the ship. If we were to go about now, we might miss
stays, and there is not room to weal without getting perilously close to
the breakers," he observed.
At the rate we were sailing, we must have gone over thirty or forty
miles from the point where we exchanged signals with the shore, and as
most probably the country was inhabited by a different tribe, who might
be at enmity with the white men, those of us who might reach the shore
would run a great chance of being slaughtered or carried off into
slavery. I said as much to Harry and Charley. The same idea had
occurred to them.
"It may be the case, but we may fall among friends, and we will hope for
the best," observed Charley.
Dawn was at length approaching, but there was no abatement of the gale,
while it was too clear that we were drifting nearer and nearer to the
coast. Every moment I expected to hear the mate give the word to furl
the sails and let go the anchor. I suggested to Tubbs that he should
advise him to do so.
"He would not listen to me; although he may know it is the best thing to
be done, he'll just put off doing it until it's too late," he answered.
Gradually the coast became more and more distinct, and we could make out
the white line of breakers as they burst upon it. We stood watching it
with straining eyes, the minutes turned into hours, the ship all the
time rushing through the water at a furious rate. Presently a headland
appeared on the starboard bow. It seemed impossible that we could
weather it. Still the mate issued no order except to the man at the
helm.
"Luff all you can," he shouted out; "we don't want to cast the ship away
on that point if we can help it."
In a few minutes--how many I cannot say--we saw the breakers close under
our lee, the ship was almost among them, but on she stood. Again the
land appeared to recede.
"Can there be a harbour in anywhere here?" I asked of Tubbs.
"The mate doesn't think so, or we should be running into it," was the
answer.
It was only a small bay across which we were passing. Not a quarter of
an hour afterwards another point appeared. As we had succeeded in
weathering the first, the mate evidently expected to pass this in the
same way.
Mr Hallton, convinced that we could not do so, shouted out, "Down with
the helm--shorten sail--let go the anchor--let fly everything."
"Who dares give orders on board this ship?" cried the mate.
The crew, however, were convinced that the first order was the wisest.
The tacks, sheets, and halyards were let go, the stoppers of the cable
cut, the helm put down to bring her up to the wind. She pitched into
the seas, but the anchor held. The crew now flew aloft to try and
gather in the canvas, fluttering wildly in the gale.
"In three minutes more we should have been knocking to pieces on the
rocks," observed Mr Hallton. "It is a question whether the anchor will
hold now; if it doesn't, we sha'n't be much better off."
Scarcely had he spoken when a loud report was heard. "The cable has
parted!" shouted several voices.
"Let go the last hope."
The anchor so called was let go, and although it brought the ship up in
a couple of minutes, it also parted, and the helpless ship now drifted
rapidly towards the breakers, which could be seen curling up along the
shores of the bay into which we had driven.
"Come aft," said Charley to Harry and me. "The moment the ship strikes
the masts will go, and we shall chance to be crushed as they fall."
"The time has come to set Captain Trunnion at liberty," I said.
Charley and I hurried below and burst open the door of the cabin. The
unhappy man was still sleeping, with his dog Growler at his feet. Surly
as the animal was to others, he was faithful to his master, and he
seemed to understand that we had come with no evil intentions, for
though he uttered a low bark, he did not attempt to fly at us. By the
light of the lamp we saw that the captain had no arms near him. To cut
the ropes which bound his limbs was the work of a moment.
"Captain Trunnion," I exclaimed, "we have come to warn you that the ship
will be in the midst of the breakers in the course of a minute or two.
If you wish to save your life you must come upon deck."
Not, however, until Harry and Charley had shaken him well did he wake
up. He gazed around him with a bewildered look.
"What is that you say?" he asked.
In a few sentences I told him.
"Then it is time to look out to save our lives," he said springing up,
apparently quite himself. He looked as cool and composed as he had ever
been. We were about to return on deck, when there came a fearful crash
overhead, followed by several others. The ship had struck and the masts
had all gone together by the board. Shrieks and cries arose, but many
of the voices were speedily silenced, as the sea, breaking over the
ship, washed several men from the deck into the seething cauldron into
which she had been driven. The captain, followed by Growler, sprang up
the companion ladder, and we saw no more of them. The cries of the
helpless slaves below, uniting in one fearful chorus, overwhelmed the
voices of the white crew.
"We must set these poor wretches at liberty. It would be a fearful
subject of thought if we were to leave them to perish," observed
Charley. "There is a hatch, I know, which leads from the main cabin to
the slave-deck, although it is kept closed."
"Ay, ay, sir! But we can't do it without the instruments," said Tubbs.
Hunting about, he discovered some irons used for the purpose, with which
we each supplied ourselves. With this means we soon opened the hatch.
There was great risk in the merciful task we were about to perform, but
Charley, setting the example, we quickly knocked off the manacles of
Aboh and the slaves nearest to us, and, with the assistance of the
former, made them understand that they were to perform the same
operation to their fellow-captives. Some obeyed, but others rushed
immediately on deck. However, we persevered, and, faster than I could
have believed it possible, we contrived to set all the slaves free.
Many of the poor wretches enjoyed their liberty but for a few seconds,
for they were quickly washed off the deck, or were drowned in a vain
attempt to reach the shore by swimming. All the time the sea was
striking with terrific force against the sides of the ship. The loud
crashing sound overhead showed us that her bowsprit and bulwarks and
everything on deck was being rapidly carried away.
While we were thus engaged daylight appeared, and when we reached the
deck we saw that the wind had greatly gone down. Although there were
rocks on either side of us, there was a clear piece of sand, on which,
could a raft be formed, those who could not swim might land. The blacks
were mostly clustered aft, the part least exposed to the fury of the
seas. Several persons were in the water, some swimming, others floating
apparently lifeless. The greater portion of the crew had disappeared;
many had been crushed by the falling masts, others washed overboard, and
a few on pieces of wreck were trying to reach the beach One thing was
certain, there was no time to be lost, as the ship could not long hold
together, lashed as she was by the fury of the seas which rolled in from
the ocean. The surviving blacks recognised us when we appeared as the
persons who had set them at liberty and we made them understand that if
they would remain quiet, we would endeavour to provide the means for
enabling them to reach the shore. I thought that among the people
clinging to pieces of wreck I saw Captain Trunnion, but I was not
certain. The mate had disappeared, and had, I concluded, been washed
overboard, and, as far as we could learn, Mr Hallton had shared the
same fate. We had reason to be thankful that we had been below, or we
also might have lost our lives. We immediately set about forming the
raft from some spars which still remained lashed to ring bolts on the
deck and from fragments of the bulwarks. Every instant the wind was
going down, rendering our task less difficult. The tide too was
falling, and as it did so rocks rose out of the water, which further
protected us from the fury of the breakers. When the blacks saw what we
were about, some of the more intelligent among them offered to assist
us. At length a raft capable of holding a dozen people at one time was
constructed. We also obtained a rope of sufficient length to reach the
shore, so that we might haul it backwards and forwards. This we made
the blacks understand that we intended to do, and that we could only
take off a certain number at a time. The head men, who had all along
held an authority over the rest of their fellow-slaves, now came forward
to maintain discipline. By this means only the number which the raft
could carry were allowed to descend at a time. As soon as we had a
cargo we commenced our passage to the shore, and happily landed all
those we had taken on board, who at once squatted down on the beach
waiting for their companions. We immediately put back and took in
another cargo, and thus we continued going backwards and forwards until
we had placed the whole of the slaves on shore.
"We must look out for ourselves now," observed Charley. "I saw some
firearms in the cabin; we must secure them, as well as some ammunition,
clothes, and provisions. It will not do to trust those black fellows
when they at once find themselves at liberty."
Of course we all agreed to Charley's proposal, and climbing up the side,
made our way into the cabin. We each got a fowling-piece or musket, a
brace of pistols, and a good supply of ammunition. We also found some
dollars, which we stowed away in our pockets.
"The money may not be of much use while we are among the savages, but it
will come in very handy when we get into a more civilised region," said
Charley. "Hurrah! here are some things which will be of immediate use,"
and he produced a boxful of strings of beads of various colours.
We each stowed away as many of them as we could carry. Under the
circumstances in which we were likely to be placed, they would prove of
the greatest value.
As the ship it appeared probable would hold together for some time, we
hunted about until we found as many things as we could carry likely to
be of use. Among others, were a pocket compass, a knife apiece, and
other things. Tubbs produced a cooked ham and a box of biscuits, which
were divided and put into some canvas bags well suited for the purpose.
We were still engaged in our search, when a loud crashing sound reached
our ears. We rushed on deck, and found that the sea had made a breach
clean through the ship. Fortunately the raft was secured to the after
part. We quickly lowered ourselves down on it, and shoved off in time
to escape another sea, which came rolling in, and committed further
damage, sending fragments of the wreck floating about in the
comparatively smooth water between us and the shore. We had great
difficulty in avoiding the pieces of timber which were driven towards
our frail raft. Every moment it seemed as if we were about to be
overwhelmed. On looking towards the beach, we found that the blacks had
disappeared, with the exception of one man, who stood ready to assist us
in getting on shore. A few more hauls on the raft, and we, with our
packs, were able to spring on the sand, the black seizing our hands as
we did so, one after the other, and dragging us up out of the seething
water, which came foaming up around us.
CHAPTER SEVEN.
THE BLACK ABOH REMAINS WITH OUR PARTY--THE MARCH TOWARDS THE FOREST--
CHARLEY CHOSEN LEADER--SUFFERINGS FROM THIRST--WE FIND TRACES OF THE
BLACKS--AN ENEMY AT HAND--BATTLE BETWEEN THE NATIVES--FLIGHT AND PURSUIT
OF THE BEATEN PARTY--FEAR OF BEING CAPTURED--WE CONCEAL OURSELVES--I AND
ABOH ATTEMPT TO SUCCOUR THE WOUNDED--WE REJOIN OUR FRIENDS AND PUSH
FORWARD--OUR THIRST BECOMES INTENSE--I AM ON THE POINT OF SINKING--
ENCOURAGED BY HARRY, I STRUGGLE ON--WATER DISCOVERED--ABOH'S
DUCK-HUNTING--NAPPING ON GUARD--THE BIG SNAKE--WE DECIDE ON THE ROUTE TO
BE TAKEN--MAKING HATS.
Our first impulse on reaching dry ground was to kneel down and thank
Heaven for having mercifully preserved our lives, the black standing by
and watching us with a wondering look as we did so. We rose to our
feet.
"Where are the rest?" I asked of the friendly negro, whom I recognised
to be Aboh, the man to whom I had given water in the slaver's hold, and
whom I had just set at liberty.
He pointed over his shoulder, signifying that they had gone inland.
"And you wish to remain with us?" I asked, at once seeing that it would
be of importance to have a native with us who might act as our guide and
interpreter.
"Yes, massa; me like white man. Once serve board man-of-war; cappen
kind, sailors kind; but me went on shore to see me fadder, modder, me
brodder, me sister; but dey all get catchee, an' all de oder people run
'way, an' dey take me for slavee."
The beach, which was here of some height, prevented us at first from
seeing what had become of the people; but climbing up the bank of fine
sand to the summit, we caught sight of some of them making their way
towards the forest, about half a mile off.
"They have gone there, poor fellows, to look for food, or perhaps some
of them think that they are not far from home, and expect to get back
again," observed Tubbs.
This appeared very likely. Before, however, we set off to join our
companions in misfortune, we searched about for any of the white men who
might have been cast by the surf on the beach. We found several dead
bodies, but not a single living person could we discover. On looking
eastward, we observed numerous rocks, stretching out to a considerable
distance, which, now that the tide had fallen, appeared above water. It
was a mercy that the "Vulture" escaped striking on any of them, for, had
she done so, she must have been knocked to pieces at a distance from the
shore, and probably not one of us would have escaped alive.
We now sat down on the beach and consulted what to do. As it was not
likely that any ship, trader, or man-of-war, or even slaver, would
willingly come near that part of the coast, we resolved to travel either
to the north or the south, hoping to reach one of the French
settlements, which existed at the mouths of two or three of the rivers
running into the ocean in that region. On looking along the shore on
both hands, we saw a wide extent of sand.
"It will never do to attempt travelling over that, gentlemen," said
Tubbs. "We shall certainly find no shade, and probably not a drop of
water, without which we cannot get along. If you'll take my advice,
you'll follow the blacks to the forest. It's water, to a certainty,
they've gone to look after; they're thirsty beings, and their instinct
has told them where they can find it."
Aboh, who had been listening all the time, evidently understood what was
said, and nodded his head. We, that is, Charley, Harry, and I, agreed
to do as Tubbs had proposed, and we all accordingly set off eastward,
accompanied by the black. The forest appeared much further away than we
supposed, or perhaps the soft sand, into which our feet sank at every
step, made us think the distance longer than it really was. The sun,
which was now high in the heavens, beat down with terrific force upon
our heads, and as we had on only our sea-caps, which afforded little or
no protection, we felt the heat greatly. We found some comfort,
however, by shifting our packs onto our heads. Aboh, who saw how much
we suffered, offered to relieve us of them. He carried my pack and his
own on his head, and another on his shoulders, with perfect ease. I
bethought me of a handkerchief which I had in my pocket, and fastened it
like a turban over my cap; Harry imitated my example. Charley and Tom,
who were stronger than either of us, continued to carry their packs with
comparative ease on their heads. We had lost sight of the blacks, the
last of whom had disappeared before we commenced our march. At length
we reached the outskirts of the forest, and were thankful to sit down
and rest under the shade of a tree.
"I have been thinking," said Harry, "that we ought to have a leader who
should decide what we should do. It will save a good deal of trouble
and discussion."
"You are right, Mr Bracewell," said Tom, "that's what I've been
thinking too; and I propose that we at once elect Mr Westerton, Mr
Harry's brother. Although I'm older than any of you, he's a naval
officer, and I for one shall be ready to obey him."
Of course Harry and I agreed to this, and Aboh, who understood almost
everything we said, nodded his head, just to show that he also consented
to the proposal.
"I will do my best, my friends," said Charley, "although, had you chosen
Mr Tubbs, I should have been willing to follow him, for I feel
convinced that he is a man of courage and judgment."
"Thank you, sir, for your good opinion," said Tom. "You have been more
accustomed to command than I have, although I shall be happy to give you
any advice whenever you ask it, to the best of my power."
"Well, then," said Charley, "the first use I will make of my authority
is to select a northerly route. I have been trying to recall the map of
the country, which I frequently studied on board the `Rover,' and I
think we shall, by proceeding as I propose, fall in with the Gaboon
River, at the mouth of which there is a French settlement. I remember
that three days before the frigate captured the pirate we sighted Cape
Lopez, some way to the south of which I calculate we now are, in what I
think is called the Pongo country."
"I believe you are right, sir," said Tom. "We shall have to make a
pretty long march though, I suspect; but if we can manage to keep near
the coast, we may sight a ship, and by making signals, get her to send a
boat on shore to take us off; always provided there happens to be no
great amount of surf."
"Well then, friends, if you are all rested, we will commence our march,"
said Charley. "We will first, however, try to overtake the blacks, who,
as Mr Tubbs observes, have been led by their instinct, or rather their
knowledge of the country, in the direction where water is to be found;
and I daresay you all feel as I do--very thirsty."
"That I do, sir," said Tom. "I feel for all the world as if my mouth
was a dust-hole, and that a bucketful of hot cinders had been thrown
into it."
We confessed that our sensations were very similar to those Tom
described. We accordingly all got up and shouldered our packs, for
neither Harry nor I would allow Aboh to carry our any longer; not that
we thought he would attempt to run away with them. We told him,
however, when we camped in the evening, that we would divide them, so as
to give him a separate package, and thus we should all have an equal
load to carry. Aboh pointed out the direction in which, from the
appearance of the trees, he believed we should find water, and eagerly
led the way.
It was farther inland than we had intended to go, but from his
description we made out that there was a lake or pond fed by a stream
coming down from the mountains of the interior, and which afterwards
lost itself in the sand. We had gone some distance when Aboh made a
sign for us to note that the ground had been trampled down by many feet,
and that the people who had passed that way had broken off a number of
young saplings, probably to form spears, and had also torn down the
boughs to serve as other weapons of offence or defence. After going a
short distance farther, the sound of voices reached our ears. Aboh
shook his head. "No good, no good," he muttered, and made us understand
that we must advance cautiously.
Presently he again stopped, and advised us by signs to conceal
ourselves. He then crept forward, crouching down beneath the bushes, so
that he could not be perceived by any persons in front.
"I'll go forward and try and learn what his object is," I whispered to
my companions; and Charley not forbidding me, I imitated Aboh's example
and quickly overtook him. He turned on hearing my footsteps, and seeing
that I was resolved to accompany him, made a sign to me to be cautious.
We had not gone far when the sounds we had before heard became so loud
that I knew we must be close upon the people who were uttering them.
After advancing a few paces farther, on looking through the bushes I saw
a large party of blacks encamped in an open spot surrounded by tall
trees. They were evidently in an excited state, looking up the glade as
if they expected some one to approach. They were mostly employed in
sharpening the ends of long poles in several fires they had lighted. I
at once recognised them as the blacks whom we had assisted to escape
from the wreck. They numbered, however, fewer than those who had
landed, and I concluded, therefore, that some had deserted their
companions in misfortune. Those who had gone away probably belonged to
a tribe in the neighbourhood, and were endeavouring to reach their own
people.
We were not long left in doubt as to the cause of their excitement.
Some distance off we caught sight of another large party of negroes
advancing with threatening gestures, many of them being armed with
muskets and bayonets. On seeing this, Aboh, seizing me by the arm,
dragged me back, and motioned me to climb into a large tree the lower
branches of which we could reach without much difficulty, he setting me
the example and assisting me up. We soon gained a place where we were
completely concealed and protected by the thick boughs. Scarcely were
we seated than we saw the slaves advancing towards the newcomers,
flourishing the spears they had made and shouting savagely, as if not
aware that their opponents had firearms, or fearless of their effects.
They soon, however, discovered their mistake. The enemy fired a volley
which brought several of them to the ground.
Notwithstanding this they rushed forward, and a fierce hand-to-hand
conflict ensued. The slaves greatly outnumbered their opponents, of
whom there were probably not more than fifty or sixty, but nearly all
these had muskets. Some of the firearms, I observed, did not go off,
probably because they had no locks, or it may have been that their
powder was bad. The parties were indeed more evenly matched than at
first appeared to have been the case. They fought with the greatest
desperation. Those who had muskets which would go off kept at a
distance firing at the slaves, while their comrades either charged with
their bayonets, or holding the barrels in their hands, used their
weapons as clubs.
Several on both sides had fallen, when a fresh party of armed negroes
appeared in the direction from whence the others had come. On seeing
them, the slaves, who had hitherto fought so bravely, were seized with a
panic. The greater number took to flight, making their way westward
towards the coast, though they must have looked in vain for succour in
that direction. I was afraid that some of them, flying in other
directions, might pass by the spot where we had left our friends, who
would run a great risk of being killed either by them or their pursuers.
Aboh and I were so well concealed that there was not much danger of our
being discovered. As may be supposed, we crouched down among the thick
leaves, much in the same way that Charles the Second did in the oak
after the fight of Worcester. The tide of battle swept by beneath our
feet, and a more fearful din of shouts and shrieks and cries I had never
heard. Those of the slaves who had been engaged in the front rank,
deserted by their companions, were mostly bayoneted or shot down or
knocked on the head, but the courageous way in which they fought enabled
the rest to get to some distance before their rear ranks were overtaken
by their pursuers. At length not a combatant was to be seen, but the
ground was strewn with the dead and dying. As I was anxious to rejoin
my friends, I immediately descended. Had I possessed a drop of water I
would have taken it to the poor wretches, whose moans as they lay
expiring reached my ears.
"Do you think we could help some of them?" I said to Aboh, pointing to
the wounded men.
"No good," he said, and made a sign that they would soon be dead. I
went up to three or four, and was convinced from the nature of their
hurts that I could do nothing for them; indeed, the spirits of most of
them fled while I stood by. Aboh then, seizing my arm, hurried me away.
I found Charley and Harry very anxious about me, for hearing the firing,
they supposed that I must have been in the thick of it, and by my not
coming back they thought that I was either killed or taken prisoner.
"One thing is certain, we must not remain here a moment longer. The
negroes will very likely pass this way, and either kill us all or carry
us off into captivity," observed Charley. "I have heard that the black
people in this part of the country are among the most savage of the
African tribes, and that some--the Fans--are cannibals. I don't know to
what tribe Aboh belongs, but I hope he is not a Fan."
"Maybe he is, and intends to deliver us to his countrymen, to serve as a
feast given to celebrate his safe return to the bosom of his family,"
said Tom, in a tone half in joke half in earnest.
"He has hitherto shown only good feelings, and we will trust him, at all
events," said Charley.
He made signs to Aboh that we wished to move on, and being anxious to
find water, we begged that he would lead us to it as soon as possible.
He nodded, and pointed to the east. We were too thirsty to hesitate
about going in that direction, although we should thus be led farther
than we wished from the coast.
We accordingly once more set off, Aboh hurrying us along as fast as we
could make our way through the thick forest, stopping at first every now
and then to listen as the sound of distant firing was heard, and then
apparently to ascertain whether any of the blacks were coming towards
us. Aboh's object was evidently to avoid both parties. It was most
likely that the slaves whom he had deserted would murder him for having
left them, while the people of the other tribe were probably hereditary
enemies of his, and would without ceremony have put him to death. We
were by this time very hungry as well as thirsty, but our thirst
prevented us from eating, and we urged Aboh to endeavour to find water
without delay. He merely pointed eastward, and nodded his head as
before.
"Well, keep moving, my black angel; whatever you do, keep moving, and
lead us to the water," said Tubbs, patting him on the back.
We marched chiefly under the shade of the forest trees, where we found
it tolerably cool; at the same time, as Tom observed--"In the opening
the sun was hot enough to roast an ox."
At last I felt that I could go on no longer. I threw myself down at the
roots of a large tree. Harry, who was marching with me, while the rest
were ahead, endeavoured to rouse me up.
"No, no," I said; "go on. If you find water, bring me some, though I
doubt if I shall be alive by that time;" and I spoke as I felt.
"Nonsense!" cried Harry. "You are the last person of the party I should
have expected to give in. I'll stay by you until you are rested, and
then we will hurry on after our friends."
"Perhaps we shall lose them if we are separated," I answered.
The thought made me arouse myself, and rising to my feet, I staggered
on. Harry shouted to Charley and Tom, and they came back to give me
their assistance. We had not gone far after this, when Aboh shouted
out--
"Dere water, water!"
We caught sight of a bright gleam shining through the trees. Though we
were in Africa, we knew that it was no mirage, which only appears on dry
and sandy deserts. We all hurried on, knowing that our burning thirst
would soon be relieved. As we drew nearer, we saw a lake stretching out
before us, on the banks of which appeared numberless birds. There were
long-legged storks, cranes, pelicans, pink-winged flamingoes, ibises,
and similar waterfowl of various descriptions. As we appeared, those
nearest to us took to flight, the beautiful flamingoes rising in the air
with their long legs stretched out behind them. One thought, however,
occupied our minds. How to get to the water, for we feared that we
should find muddy banks, which might prove impassable. Aboh's quick
eye, however, detected a small inlet into which a rivulet fell. He led
us down to a hard, gravelly bank, where the water ran as clear as that
of an English trout-stream.
We did not stop to consider whether alligators lurked beneath the lilies
which floated on the surface, or huge snakes were concealed near at hand
waiting for their prey, but kneeling down, we plunged in our heads, and
drank huge draughts of the cooling liquid. Cooling it was to us,
although probably it would have been thought somewhat tepid in a colder
climate. In an instant I was revived, and my companions felt the same
sensations.
We could now sit down and enjoy a few mouthfuls of the food we had
brought from the wreck, which we took to stay our appetites. We
intended, before many minutes were over, to have some of the waterfowl
flying round us cooking before the fire. Charley and Harry, being
tolerable shots, agreed at once to try and knock over a sufficient
number for our wants, while Tom and I collected sticks for a fire.
Aboh, seeing them set off, started by himself in an opposite direction.
"We're not likely to starve on our journey, Mr Westerton, if we are
fortunate enough to fall in with as many birds as we see around us just
now," said Tom.
"I am afraid that we cannot expect always to camp on the borders of a
lake or river," I answered. "It will be plenty one day, and starvation
the next. However, if we are prudent, I hope that we shall get along
without much suffering. There are probably wildfowl to be found, and
then we may fall in with friendly tribes, of whom we can purchase food.
At all events, don't let us expect misfortunes until they come."
"That's what I never have done, and never intend to do," answered Tom.
"I've always held that there's `a sweet little cherub who sits up aloft,
to take care of the life of poor Jack;' and although that may sound like
a heathen song, there's truth in it notwithstanding."
We were talking thus while engaged in collecting sticks, cutting some
with our axes, and picking up others, until we had made a large pile,
sufficient, Tom averred, to roast an ox, when we saw our friends coming
back, each loaded with half a dozen ducks. Directly afterwards Aboh
appeared, carrying a still greater number, which he gave us to
understand that he had captured by swimming out into the lake, his head
concealed by a cap of rushes, towards a flock floating unsuspicious of
danger near the margin, and that, getting close to them, he had pulled
them down under water by the legs. As the slight repast we had eaten
had only just taken off the edge of our appetites, we eagerly plucked a
bird apiece, and had them spitted in a few minutes before the fire.
"If we only had some pepper and salt, we should do well," said Harry.
"Here they are, sir," said Tom, producing from his knapsack a bag of
each.
"We are greatly indebted to you, Mr Tubbs, for your forethought,"
observed Charley; "but remember, we must husband these treasures, for it
may be a long time before we are able to replenish them."
By the time we had finished our repast, the sun had sunk behind the
trees of the forest we had passed through, and as we could not go
farther that night, we agreed to camp where we were. It was important
to keep up the fire, as we might otherwise receive an unwelcome visit
from a lion, elephant, or leopard, or perhaps from a huge species of
ape, numbers of which we had reason to suspect were in the
neighbourhood, though we had not as yet seen any. It was, of course,
settled that we should keep watch, each one of us taking it in turns.
Not knowing how far Aboh might be trusted, we did not ask him. Before
sitting down we collected a further supply of fuel, and cut down some
boughs, with which we constructed a rude arbour to shelter our heads and
bodies from the night dew, although it would have been of little service
in case of a fall of tropical rain. Tom suggested that, as Charley was
leader, he ought not to keep watch.
"No, no," said Charley. "I will share with you all in that respect;"
and he offered to keep the first watch. Harry took the second, Tom the
third, and I the morning watch.
Tom called me, saying that he had been listening to the mutterings and
roars of lions, the occasional cries of deer as they were pounced on by
some savage beasts, and the shrieks and other strange noises of night
birds. "But you mustn't mind that, sir," he said; "you'll soon get
accustomed to them. If you see anything suspicious, don't mind rousing
me up, although you may not wish to awaken the whole party."
I promised to do this, and began to walk about in front of the fire.
However, feeling very tired, I sat down, placing my rifle by my side.
While thus seated, I confess that, unexpectedly, my eyes closed. It
appeared to me but for a moment, although when I opened them daylight
had broken, and a bright gleam cast from the orange-tinted sky was
thrown over the lake. I was about to spring to my feet and stoop to
pick up my rifle, when I found it had gone. On looking round, I saw
Aboh holding it in his hand and moving cautiously away from the camp,
while he presented it at some object of which he had caught sight a
little distance off, and on which his eye was intently fixed. He did
not appear to hear me as I followed, when what was my horror to see an
enormous serpent, its neck rising in the air, its mouth extended as if
about to spring. Aboh stepped behind a small tree, which afforded him
some protection, and resting the barrel of the rifle against the trunk,
fixed his eye on the creature. It seemed to me about to make its fatal
spring, when he, and perhaps my companions and I as well, might have
been destroyed. The serpent rose in the air, Aboh fired, its head
instantly dropped, although the body continued to writhe and twist along
the ground.
The report aroused the rest of the party, who sprang to their feet.
They looked greatly astonished when they found it was Aboh and not I who
had fired. This, I may say, was the first of many dangers we escaped
from the huge monsters of that region. On measuring the snake, we found
it full thirty feet in length, with a girth as large as the body of a
stout man. Indeed, we agreed that the creature could have swallowed any
of us, or all of us in succession, had he been so disposed.
"Good eat," said Aboh, as he cut off the creature's head.
While we cooked the ducks, he roasted a piece of the snake's flesh at
the fire, and ate it in preference to them.
We had now to decide what course to pursue, whether to take the eastern
or western side of the lake. Charley was disposed to think that we
should find the western very marshy, for, looking in that direction, the
ground appeared to be covered with tall reeds, while the distance round
the eastern side would evidently be much longer. On consulting Aboh, he
gave the preference to the eastern side, intimating that the people we
had seen, who had attacked the slaves, resided between the lake and the
sea, and that probably they would not allow us to pass through their
territory without depriving us of everything we possessed, even should
we escape with our lives.
"If you'll take my advice, gentlemen, before we start, you'll make some
hats to keep the sun off your heads; it won't take us long, and depend
upon it, we shall find it very hot along the borders of the lake. Mr
Westerton, I daresay, knows how to make a straw hat as well as I do."
Charley said he did, and he and Tom quickly procured a quantity of dried
palm-leaves, which, splitting up, they formed into wide rough plaits.
Harry and I imitated their example. In a few minutes they had enough
plaited to form a hat, when, with some large thorns for needles, and
fibre for thread, they stitched the plaiting together as quickly as they
made it Harry and I were longer about our task, for we managed to make
only one hat while they put together two, but in less than an hour we
were each provided with a very fair straw hat. Some handkerchiefs,
which we had brought from on board served to line them, and make them
more impervious to the sun.
Our task completed, strapping our knapsacks on our backs and shouldering
our rifles, we commenced our march along the shores of the lake.
CHAPTER EIGHT.
OUR MARCH WESTWARD ALONG THE SHORES OF THE LAKE--TOM AND THE CROCODILE--
CHARGE OF ELEPHANTS--A NARROW ESCAPE FOR CHARLEY--ANXIETY ON TOM'S
ACCOUNT--BESIEGED IN A TREE--WE HAVE RECOURSE TO STRATAGEM AND RECOVER
OUR RIFLES--ABOH'S DARING--RENEWED ATTACK--THE ENEMY REPULSED--SEARCH
FOR OUR COMPANION, WHOM WE FIND SEVERELY INJURED--WE CAMP--DANGER FROM
CROCODILES--COOKING THE ELEPHANT-MEAT--ABOH'S SKILL--STRANGE NOISES
HEARD AT NIGHT--WE ARE COMPELLED TO HALT--AN AFRICAN FOREST GIANT--TOM
RECOVERING FROM THE ACCIDENT SLOWLY--CHARLEY PROPOSES TO BUILD A CANOE.
According to Aboh's advice we proceeded eastward, with the lake on one
side and the vast trees of the forest rising up to an immense height on
our right. Frequently the indentations in the shores of the lake
compelled us to keep away from the water, when we trudged on completely
surrounded by trees. Even at mid-day it was dark and gloomy, not a ray
of the sun penetrating to the ground which we trod. Sometimes the
silence was profound, when suddenly it was broken by the shrill scream
of a parrot, or the chatter of a monkey as he caught sight of us from
his leafy covert.
We saw no other animals, though we discovered elephant tracks and other
marks on the ground. Aboh, on examining them, said that they were made
by leopards, those savage animals abounding in the forest through which
we were passing. On the shore of the lake, however, we caught sight of
numerous crocodiles, some poking their ugly snouts above the surface of
the water, others basking on sandbanks, or on the points projecting out
into the water.
Once, as we were keeping along the shore, the head of a huge monster
rose not ten feet from us. Aboh shouted, "Run, massa, run." His
warning came only just in time. Charley, who was farthest from the
water, instantly brought his rifle to his shoulder as he saw the
crocodile making a dash at Tom, who was nearest to him. Aboh shouted
and shrieked to scare the creature. Its jaws were within a foot of
Tom's legs, when Charley, knowing that our companion's life depended
upon the correctness of his aim pulled the trigger and the ball entered
the monster's head through the eye. Tom gave a desperate leap on one
side, the crocodile still moved on, and I fancied that Charley must have
missed. Harry and I, imitating Tom's example, sprang out of its way.
It had not run five yards on dry ground, however, before it stopped,
then rolling on its side, began to kick violently. Harry quickly had
his rifle ready, and firing down its throat, put an end to its
struggles. Aboh proposed cutting some slices out of its body for
dinner, but we declined joining him in the repast, as we hoped to catch
as many birds and monkeys as we might require. The narrow escape we had
had taught us that we must in future avoid marching close to the water,
and that it would be prudent to keep a bright look-out when near the
shores of the lake not to run the risk of being snapped up by a
crocodile.
We were disappointed in consequence of this at not being able to sleep
securely, as we had expected, close down to the water, so that we might
have only one side of our camp to defend. From the experience we had
obtained we now saw that we should run a greater chance of being carried
off by crocodiles than even by lions or leopards.
We had marched on for about an hour after the occurrence I have
described, when finding that we could cut off a point by proceeding
straight on, we had of necessity to leave the shore of the lake, the
water of which we had hitherto always had in sight. We had made good
some distance, often having to cut away the creepers which impeded our
path, and were expecting soon again to catch sight of the water, when
loud trumpeting sounds reached our ears.
We stopped to listen, and were soon convinced that the sounds we heard
were uttered by elephants, and, moreover, that they were for some cause
or other excited by rage. However, as the animals were, we judged,
still at some distance on our right hand, we agreed to continue our
course, hoping that they would not discover us. In case they should do
so, and we should have to defend ourselves, we put bullets into our
rifles. The evening was approaching, and it was necessary to look out
for a spot sufficiently open to enable us to light the fire, and at the
same time not in too dangerous proximity to the lake. That we might
have a better chance of finding the spot we were in search of, we
separated, Tubbs and Charley going on ahead, while Harry, Aboh, and I
searched round on either side of where we then were. We found that we
were at no great distance from the lake, the shining water of which we
saw between the trees.
"Here's a spot just suitable for us," cried Harry, "but we shall have to
cut down the grass that the fire may not spread, otherwise we may create
a blaze which would prove very inconvenient."
Just as he spoke the trumpeting sounds we had before heard again reached
our ears, but very much nearer. Aboh stopped in an attitude of
listening. Presently there came a noise as of the crashing of branches
and the tramping of heavy feet on the ground. "Elephant come dis way,"
exclaimed Aboh; "run, massa, run;" and he set off in the direction of
the lake, pointing to a large tree at no great distance from us.
Harry and I followed his example, hoping that Charley and Tubbs would
hear the sounds in time to make their escape. The trumpeting and
crashing sounds drew nearer. Presently we caught sight of several huge
trunks lifted in the air, with gleaming tusks below them, and the huge
heads of the savage monsters among the leaves.
"Here, massa, here, get up!" exclaimed Aboh, reaching the foot of the
tree.
As he spoke, seizing a bough, he swung himself up with the agility of a
monkey onto a lower branch. I cast my eye behind me, when what was my
horror to see Charley coming along with three or four elephants dashing
at full speed not thirty yards behind him. It seemed scarcely possible
that he could reach a place of safety before he was overtaken. All my
thoughts were now turned on Charley, and I regretted that I had not
managed to hand my rifle to Aboh before climbing up myself. Charley had
dropped his, and came bounding along, the elephants, however, gaining on
him. He saw us, and made towards the tree. Aboh and I stooped down to
catch his hands and help him up. He was within twenty yards of us, when
his foot caught in one of the treacherous vines which crept in snakelike
coils over the ground and hung from numberless branches, and he fell.
He was instantly, however, again on his feet, and came rushing on as
before; but the delay had enabled the leading elephant to gain on him.
We shrieked and shouted to encourage him, or perhaps impelled to do so
by our fears. He reached the foot of the tree. In another instant the
elephant would have seized him with its trunk or trampled him under its
feet. Had he not possessed unusual activity his destruction would have
been certain. He grasped the bough nearest him. Aboh sprang down and
got him by one hand. I seized him by the other. The elephant's trunk
was already touching his leg, which would the next moment have been
encircled in its fatal embrace. We tugged and hauled; the animal caught
his shoe, which happily gave way, and Charley was out of its reach. We
now breathed more freely, for the tree was far too stout to enable the
elephants to tear it down. The beast which had so nearly caught Charley
stood trumpeting with rage beneath our feet, lifting up his trunk in a
vain attempt to reach us.
We, as may be supposed, climbed higher up, so as to be well out of his
way. In a few seconds the remainder of the herd came up, surrounding
the tree and all trumpeting together. It was a sound sufficient to make
our hearts quail. Had we possessed our rifles, we might have quickly
put an end to the animals, mighty as they seemed. Fortunately, in their
rage they did not discover them, as they were concealed in the tall
grass and leaves between the roots. We dreaded, however, every instant
that their feet would come down and crush them, when they, in all
probability, would have been rendered perfectly useless.
Our thoughts were now turned towards Tom. Charley said that he had lost
sight of him just before he saw the elephants, but that he trusted he
had sought safety in a tree as we had done. We shouted out, hoping that
he would hear us; but the trumpeting of the elephants drowned our
voices. However, although we did not get any answer, we still hoped
that he might have escaped.
"I wish that I had not lost my rifle," said Charley, "although I think I
should be able to find it again if the beasts did not trample upon it,
and I don't think they did, for I threw it as far from me as I could
into a thick bush."
"If you hadn't thrown it away, both you and it would have been crushed
to pieces," answered Harry. "I think it is fortunate that you had
presence of mind to get rid of it. But, I say, I wonder whether these
beasts are going to lay siege to us all night. I'm getting very hungry.
If they don't go away we shall be starved."
"Perhaps the best thing we can do is to climb up higher and hide
ourselves, and then, when they don't see us, their rage may abate, and
they will go away," I remarked. "They are not likely to remain here all
night, and will probably go to the lake to drink, and give us time, at
all events, to get down and recover our rifles."
"What does Aboh think about the matter?" asked Charley.
I inquired of the black, making the usual signs by means of which we
carried on a conversation with him, and using such simple words as he
was likely to understand. He evidently comprehended what I said, and
highly approved of our plan of hiding ourselves, setting the example by
climbing up and concealing himself from the elephants below. We three
did the same, though I managed still to watch them by peeping through
the leaves of the bough on which I had perched myself. The creatures in
a short time ceased their trumpeting, but still remained walking slowly
round and round the tree, looking up in a sagacious fashion to ascertain
what had become of us. At last they appeared either to forget us, or to
fancy that we were birds, and had flown away. The biggest elephant,
which had so nearly caught Charley, then led the way down to the lake,
the rest following him. It was with infinite satisfaction that we saw
them go.
"Now, quick, quick! let us get our rifles, at all events, before they
come back," whispered Charley.
Aboh, seeing me about to descend, made a sign that he would go himself,
and, with wonderful agility, he slipped down the tree, while Charley
descended to the lowest bough to reach the rifles as he handed them up.
I followed, keeping a little above my brother, that I might pass them on
to Harry. I felt very thankful when Aboh handed up my rifle to Charley,
who giving it to me, I passed it on to Harry. Aboh then, again slipping
down, handed up Harry's. To our infinite relief neither of them were
injured, though the feet of the elephants must have trampled the ground
on either side.
"Him go get massa officer's rifle," said Aboh, who was delighted to make
use of some of the words with which he was best acquainted; and without
waiting to obtain our sanction, he darted off in the direction from
which Charley came.
"See if you can find Tom anywhere," I shouted.
Aboh turned and made a sign to us to be silent, pointing at the same
time towards the lake, where the elephants were drinking. I regretted
having cried out, lest my voice should have attracted the creatures'
attention, and might cause them to return and look for us. Although
Aboh probably thought that Tom was concealed somewhere in the
neighbourhood, yet, knowing the importance of silence, he did not cry
out to ascertain his position.
We watched him anxiously, for we feared that at any moment the elephants
might come back before he could discover the rifle, which might take
some time to find. We saw him hunting about, but Charley said that he
thought the spot where he had thrown it away was much farther off. At
length he was altogether hidden from our sight by the thick foliage.
"Harry, do you climb up and keep a look-out for the elephants, and Dick
and I will stand by to help up Aboh when he comes back. If you see the
beasts coming, send a shot into the head of the leader; if you don't
kill him, it will probably bring him to a standstill or turn him aside,
and give the black more time to climb up the tree," said Charley.
"Ay, ay!" answered Harry, taking his rifle; "I'll do my best to stop the
brutes coming this way, at all events."
Charley and I waited on the lower branches, my brother being beneath me,
watching for the return of Aboh. At last we saw him coming along with
Charley's rifle in his hand. At the same instant Harry shouted out--
"Here come the elephants with their trunks turned up, but they are
walking leisurely along, as if they had forgotten all about us."
"Don't fire, then, unless they come close to the tree," answered
Charley, while he made signs to Aboh to hasten his steps, pointing as he
did so towards the lake. Aboh sprang forward, but the quick ears and
quick sight of the elephants had detected him, and sticking out their
trunks, they begun trumpeting and moving rapidly forward. I scarcely
thought it possible that Aboh could escape them. Just then we heard the
report of Harry's rifle over our heads. A shriek of rage escaped the
leading elephant, and he had, we concluded, been hit. At the same
moment Aboh stopped, and levelling his rifle, fired. The ball struck
the animal, which, however, still came on, although at a slower pace
than before, and Aboh, grasping the rifle, darted up the tree holding it
above his head, so that Charley could stoop down and seize it by the
barrel. Handing it to me, he was able to assist Aboh, who nimbly
scrambled up.
We all then retreated to our former resting-places, out of the reach of
the elephants' trunks. The whole herd came on, the leader bleeding but
still trumpeting furiously. We, however, had him in our power, and felt
pretty sure that his trumpetings would soon be over. My weapon was
still loaded, Charley asked me to let him have it, as he was in a better
position for firing than I was. I handed it to him, and as the
elephants came near he took aim at the leader, waiting until in his
circuit round the tree his head presented a fair mark. He fired, the
huge monster immediately sank down, and almost without a struggle was
dead. We could not resist joining Aboh in the loud shout of triumph he
raised as we saw our enemy destroyed. On the fall of their leader, the
other elephants became alarmed, and uttering a few trumpetings, more of
fear than anger, rushed off together into the forest, crushing down the
shrubs and young trees as they went, making a good pathway towards the
southward, which would have saved us much trouble to have followed had
we wished to go in that direction. We now, feeling sure that they would
not return, descended. Our first care on reaching the ground was to
reload our rifles.
"I wish that we could carry off the tusks," said Harry. "I'm sure they
would be worth no small number of dollars if they were safe on board."
"It is very certain that we cannot get them down to the sea at present,
and probably before we can return to fetch them some other hunters will
have carried them off," observed Charley.
While we were discussing the subject, Aboh had got out his knife and was
working away at one of the animal's feet, which he succeeded in cleverly
amputating.
"Him good eat," said the black pointing to the foot he had just cut off.
Although we certainly could not agree with him, we did not contradict
his assertion. He then cut some slices out of the back, which had not a
more attractive appearance than the foot. The black, however, seemed to
think that we had now an ample supply of food. We should have camped on
the spot, as the shades of evening were already coming on, had we not
been anxious to discover Tom.
"We must find him before nightfall," I observed; "for even although the
creatures may not have killed him, he may be injured and unable to
rejoin us."
"Certainly, unless he has got to a considerable distance, he must have
heard our shouts," remarked Harry.
Charley agreed with us, and we accordingly proceeded in the direction of
the spot where Charley had left our companion. As we went on we shouted
out his name, while we looked carefully on either side, dreading at any
moment to discover his mangled remains. Aboh hunted about with great
care, but for some distance the ground was so trampled by the elephants'
feet, and the trees and shrubs so torn, that any footsteps of a human
being must effectually have been obliterated. Presently, however, we
crossed the path formed by the herd as they had made their way towards
us, and all traces of them ceased. A short time afterwards we saw Aboh
examining the ground, then he pointed ahead and went on at a rapid rate,
we following his footsteps. Again he stopped, and stooping down picked
up a rifle. We recognised it as Tom's. What had become of its owner?
Still Aboh went on.
By this time the forest was so shrouded in the gloom of approaching
night that we could with difficulty see anything before us. Again Aboh
stopped and cried out, "Him here! him here!" We hurried forward. There
was our poor friend stretched on the ground, his leg caught in a vine
below a tall tree with branches coming close to the ground. The
dreadful thought seized me that he was dead.
"Tom, Mr Tubbs, speak to me," I cried out I heard a groan. At all
events, he was alive. Stooping down, I rested his head on my knee.
Charley and Harry quickly came up. We soon released poor Tom's foot.
On examining it, we feared that it was dislocated, or at all events
severely sprained, and that probably he had fainted from the pain.
Having water in our flasks, we poured some down his throat. By wetting
his hands and chafing his arms we in a short time brought him to. He
looked round him, evidently very much astonished.
"Where am I, mates? What has happened?" he asked at length. "I was
dreaming that a shark or a tiger or some beast or other had bitten off
my foot."
"Not so bad as that," said Charley, "although you have hurt it
considerably, I fear."
"Ah, now I recollect all about it. I was afraid, Mr Westerton, that
you were caught by the elephants, and I was expecting to share the same
fate. As I could not help you, I thought the wisest thing I could do
was to run for my life. I confess it, I never was in such a fright
before. I somehow dropped my gun, and then, just as I was about to
climb up into that tree overhead, I found myself caught with a round
turn about my leg, and down I came. The honest truth is, I don't
remember anything more of what happened after that."
It would have been unjust to blame poor Tom for the very natural panic
which had seized him on finding himself alone in the forest, and, as he
supposed, with his companions killed. He had acted as most people would
have done under similar circumstances, and endeavoured to save his life.
We fortunately found not far off just such an open space as we were
searching for. Our first business was to light a fire in the centre of
it, after having cut away the surrounding grass.
"We must keep up a good blare, or we may have some unwelcome visits from
wild beasts," said Charley. "It will be necessary to keep an eye
towards the lake, or one of those horrid crocodiles may be crawling up
in search of some supper when the odour of the roasted elephant-meat
reaches his nose."
While Charley and I attended to poor Tom, Harry and Aboh made up the
fire as proposed. We had brought an iron saucepan, with which Aboh
intimated that he would go down to the lake to get some water, making a
sign to Harry to accompany him with his gun.
"If big ting come out of de water, fire at him head," he said, showing
that he was fully alive to the danger of approaching the lake,
especially of an evening, when the crocodiles are more active than at
other times during the day.
We kept the fire blazing up brightly, so that it might scare any wild
beasts prowling round about us. However, not trusting to that alone,
Charley and I kept our rifles by our sides and our eyes about us, lest a
lion or leopard might spring upon us unawares. Having got off Tom's
boot and sock, we examined his ankle. It looked blue and swollen, and
when we touched it he complained that it pained him much. Still, as far
as we could judge, no bone was broken.
"The only thing I can think of is to bind it up in a wet handkerchief,"
observed Charley; "the inflammation may thus be allayed."
While we were speaking we heard a shot from Harry's gun, showing that we
must not expect to obtain even a saucepan of water without trouble.
Shortly afterwards Aboh returned with the water. Charley asked for some
of it, and saturating a handkerchief, which he fortunately had in his
pocket, he bound up Tom's ankle. Harry told us that scarcely had Aboh
dipped the saucepan into the water, than a crocodile poked its ugly head
above the surface and made a dash at him.
"I was too quick, however, and firing, hit the creature in the throat,
when it slid off again into deep water," he added, "whether killed or
not I cannot say, as it sank immediately."
"You have done so well that we must get you to make another trip as soon
as we have eaten our soup, which, I suppose, Aboh intends to make out of
the elephant-meat, for I doubt if it will be palatable cooked in any
other way," said Charley.
We found that the black had brought several stones from the shores of
the lake. He now, having placed them in the fire, dug a hole near at
hand, into which he scraped some of the ashes, and then put in the
stones with the elephant's foot on the top of them. Above this having
placed some thick leaves, he quickly filled up the hole.
"Him soon good eat," he said.
Harry had in the meantime cut up some pieces of elephant-meat, which he
put into the saucepan. Having placed it on the fire, he stuck some
other slices on forked sticks as close as they could be placed to the
flames.
"We shall have the opportunity of trying the comparative excellencies of
three styles of cooking," he observed, laughing.
"I have no great faith in Aboh's mode of proceeding," remarked Charley.
"Nor have I, except to produce any especially excellent soup," said
Harry.
Our patience was to be severely exercised. We were all so hungry that
Charley consented to serve out a small piece of biscuit to each of us,
just to stay our appetites; but that produced a very transient effect.
At first I saw him tightening his waist-belt; then I had to tighten
mine, as Harry did his. Poor Tom was suffering too much pain to care
about eating, and Aboh was well accustomed to endure long hours of
fasting.
"When is that mess of yours likely to be ready?" Charley and I kept
crying out to Harry.
"I think that it is done to a turn now," said Harry, and he produced
five pieces of black-looking stuff.
"A very long turn," said Charley as he took his share. "Why, it's as
hard and dry as shoe-leather, and quite as tough, I suspect."
"Chew it, man, chew it," answered Charley, laughing; "it's better than
that in the soup."
We all cut off little bits, hunger making us in no way particular; but
it was a difficult business to get down a mouthful. At last I took to
scraping it with my knife, by which means I was able to swallow more
than I otherwise could have done.
We next tried the soup. The warm liquid could at all events be
swallowed, and it appeared to do good to poor Tom, to whom we gave
several cupfuls. The meat, however, was scarcely an improvement upon
the steaks. Aboh had been watching us all the time while he munched his
share without showing a sign of dissatisfaction.
"As we shall want some more water for poor Tom's foot, I wish you would
go down, Harry, to the lake and fill the saucepan," said Charley.
"I will go with Aboh willingly enough, provided he carries a torch, for
otherwise the chances are that we shall not get off as easily as we did
before," answered Harry.
Aboh understood what was proposed, and taking a brand from the fire in
one hand, and the saucepan in the other, he set off, Harry accompanying
him with his rifle ready for instant use. Charley and I, in the
meantime, got up and examined the forest around us. Strange noises were
issuing from it; but our ears being unaccustomed to the sounds of an
African wilderness, we could not distinguish either the animals or birds
which produced them. Here and there we picked up sticks, which we
carried to the heap prepared for keeping up the fire during the night.
I was stooping down, expecting to take up a thin stick, when I saw it
glide away. I had nearly caught hold of a snake by the body. It might
have been harmless, but if venomous, I should have probably been fatally
bitten. I sprang back, as may be supposed, and was very cautious after
this to feel with the pole I carried in my hand before I picked up any
other sticks. In a short time Harry and Aboh came back with the
saucepan of water, from which we filled our mugs, for the tough
elephant-meat made us thirsty. We were all suffering from hunger, and
as we expected to find Aboh's dish as unpalatable as ours, we had made
up our minds to lie down, if not exactly supperless, as hungry almost as
before.
"Now, massa, him 'tink foot ready," said Aboh, and without more ado, he
opened the hole and produced the foot hot and steaming. Just taking off
the top, as if it had been a piece of piecrust, what was our surprise
and very great satisfaction to find the interior full of a rich
glutinous substance. We eagerly hooked it out with our knives, and it
was pronounced excellent jelly, although somewhat strong tasted. The
single foot contained more than we altogether could eat, although Aboh
got through twice as much as either of the rest of us. We regretted
that we had not brought along more of the elephant's feet.
Instead of going supperless to bed, we thus had a more ample meal than
we had eaten since we landed. As it was important that Tom should have
a night's rest, Charley, Harry, and I agreed to keep watch in turns. We
did not ask Aboh, though he would, we felt sure, have proved
trustworthy. I had the middle watch. As I walked round and round the
camp, my ears were saluted by distant mutterings and the occasional roar
of lions, the trumpetings of elephants, or the shrill agonised cry of
some hapless deer on which a stealthy leopard had pounced, the shrieks
of night birds, the chirp of insects, and the croaking of frogs. Every
moment I expected to see some monster shove its nose out amid the dark
foliage; but if any came near, the fire prevented them from springing on
us. I occasionally stooped down and wetted Tom's bandage, so that his
leg was kept cool all the night. Charging Harry to do the same, I at
length lay down, and in a moment was fast asleep. Next morning we found
Tom better, but utterly unable to proceed. We, therefore, had to make
up our minds to camp for another day at least, unless we could manage to
find a canoe in which to cross the lake. Harry and I, as soon as we
were on foot, took our guns, accompanied by Aboh, in search of game for
breakfast. We soon came upon a number of ducks, and were fortunate in
killing half a dozen in three shots, two being brought to the ground
each time we fired. We did not forget the crocodiles, nor did Aboh, who
was very wary when picking up the birds. As we made our way through the
forest, I was especially struck by the variety and luxuriance of the
trees and shrubs, the number of vines which hung from the branches in
wreaths and festoons, the length of the leaves, some rising from the
ground, others forming crowns on the summits of tall trees, surmounted
by flowers of bright red or yellow or blue.
"Dere, massa, what you 'tink dat?" said Aboh, throwing himself on the
ground as if to contemplate at his ease the magnificent tree before
which we stood. "Him 'board ship worth many tusks."
"What tree is it?" I asked.
It was certainly one of the finest and most graceful trees we had yet
met with in the African forest. Its leaves were long, sharp-pointed,
and dark green, hanging in large clusters. Its bark was also a dark
green and very smooth. The trunk rose straight and clean to the height
of sixty feet or more, from whence large leafy branches projected to a
considerable distance. Aboh pointed to his own skin and then laughed.
"He means that it's an ebony tree, and so I'm sure it is," said Harry.
"It is one of those articles we were to have procured."
On examining the tree we found that it was hollow, and Aboh made us
understand that the branches also were hollow. On cutting through the
bark we came to some white wood, which at first puzzled us. We expected
to have found it black, but Aboh made signs that we were to cut deeper
into it, and we thus ascertained that the white wood was simply sap
wood, and that farther in the wood was perfectly black. We found
several others of the same description growing around; and we agreed
that if we could fall in with some friendly natives, we would advise
them to cut the trees down, and should any navigable river exist running
out of the lake, to convey them to its mouth, where they could be
embarked. We, however, had to hurry back to cook our ducks for
breakfast. We continued keeping our poor companion's ankle constantly
wetted, but, to our disappointment, even the next day he was unable to
do more than stand up. The moment he attempted to walk, the pain
returned, and we had to make up our minds for a longer stay. Charley
proposed that we should cut down a tree and scoop out a canoe in which
to cross the lake. When he explained his intentions, however, to Aboh,
the black replied that it would take us several weeks, if not months, to
construct a canoe, and that we should get round the lake much faster by
land.
"That may be the case," said Charley; "but suppose Tom's ankle is
broken, or so injured that he is unable to walk, we shall have no
alternative. We cannot leave him behind us in this wild forest, and we
must try to find a village of friendly natives, where he can remain
until he is recovered."
"I'm sorry to keep you back, gentlemen, and if it was a matter of life
or death, I'd say go on and leave me behind, but it would be a terrible
thing if that were necessary; so I would rather say, let us build a
canoe, or, if we cannot, a raft on which we can cross the lake. I don't
think it would take as long as Aboh supposes, if we could find a soft
tree. He doesn't know what our sharp axes can do; besides, we can clear
out the inside with fire. Even if I hadn't sprained my ankle, I again
say, provided that we can find the right tree, let us build a canoe."
Charley agreed with Tubbs, and Harry and I had no strong opinion the
other way. We told Aboh we wished he would hunt about to find a big
tree of soft wood.
Aboh agreed to do as we wished, at the same time he shook his head,
saying, "Too long, too long."
"No, no," answered Tom; "we will build a handsome short craft with
plenty of beam, so that we may turn her about in any of the narrow
streams through which we may have to make our way."
CHAPTER NINE.
DETERMINED TO OVERCOME OUR DIFFICULTY, WE DECIDE ON BUILDING A CANOE,
WHEN UNLOOKED-FOR HELP ARRIVES, AND ABOH FINDS A RELATIVE--A PLEASANT
BREAKFAST--TOM TAKEN ACROSS THE LAKE BY THE BLACKS--WE PREPARE A PRESENT
OF GAME FOR THE KING--LOOKING OUT FOR THE RETURN OF THE CANOE--THE
CROCODILE AND ITS VICTIM--WE CAMP FOR THE NIGHT--AN UNWELCOME VISITOR--A
FORTUNATE SHOT--THE LEOPARD'S SKIN--RETURN OF THE CANOE--WE EMBARK--
STORM ON THE LAKE--SAFE AGAIN WITH TOM TUBBS--A NATIVE DOCTOR DECLARES
THE KING BEWITCHED--WE CHANGE THE BOWL OF POISON--PRESENTED TO KING
QUAGOMOLO--THE TEST OF THE "POISON-CUP" APPLIED--THE KING'S QUICK
RECOVERY CELEBRATED WITH REJOICINGS--TOM HAVING PERFECTLY RECOVERED, WE
DETERMINE TO RECOMMENCE OUR JOURNEY--THE KING FINDS MEANS TO DELAY AND
DETAIN US--I SAVE THE KING'S CHILD FROM A CROCODILE--PRISONERS.
The very evening on which we had determined to form a canoe, we
commenced our search for a tree suitable for the purpose. In vain,
however, we hunted in the neighbourhood of the lake. Aboh pointed to
the south. "Find him dere," he said.
We were, however, unwilling to go to a distance from our companion, for
we knew not to what dangers he might be exposed should he be left alone,
even although he was able to sit up and handle his rifle, and might
perhaps have hobbled to a short distance. Still he would have to do
that at the risk of again injuring his ankle.
"I will remain with him if you and Charley like to set off with Aboh as
a guide," said Harry. "If you can find a tree at no great distance, you
can cut it down and shape it where it falls, so that it will not give us
much trouble to transport it to the lake."
"More than you suspect, unless we can find a level path down to the
water," observed Charley.
Though I agreed with my brother, we notwithstanding made up our minds to
start early the following morning, and should we find a tree suitable
for a canoe within a mile or so, to cut it down; but if not, to give up
the undertaking. We had cooked overnight some waterfowl for provisions,
and Aboh, I should have said, had found some fruits, which were highly
acceptable. We rose at daybreak, summoned by Harry, who had kept the
morning watch, and at once set off, having determined not to wait for
breakfast, as we wished to have the whole day before us. Charley and I
directed our course to the shore of the lake, to which we had discovered
a path, formed probably by elephants, leading directly to the water.
Just as we were approaching the lake, we caught sight through the bushes
of a canoe paddled by a single rower skimming lightly over the surface
towards us. Wishing to open a communication with the man in the canoe
in order to obtain information from him as to the best course we could
take to get to the northward, or perhaps to induce him to ferry us
across, we hid behind the bushes. The stranger, by his movements,
appeared not to be aware that any one was in the neighbourhood, and came
on without hesitation to the shore, close to the spot where we were hid.
Aboh had remained behind to assist Tom in gathering sticks and lighting
the fire, while Harry had settled to come a short distance with us. The
black had on no other garment but the usual white cloth, showing that he
belonged to one of the wild tribes to the west. He ran his canoe right
up on the bank, and then without hesitation stepped out, carrying a
spear in one hand, a quiver of arrows on his back, and a bow in the
other. We allowed him to advance some distance, until suddenly he came
in sight of Tom and Aboh engaged in making up the fire. Immediately
stopping, he was about to fix an arrow in his bow, when Charley and I
showed ourselves. On seeing us he retreated a few paces, and then fell
to the ground overcome by terror. Charley and I, wishing to reassure
him, advanced as Harry came up to him.
The black, seizing his foot, placed it on his neck in token of
submission. So sudden was the movement that Harry, who could not
prevent him from doing this, was nearly upset, and would have been so
had not he supported himself by his rifle. On this I turned round and
shouted to Aboh to come and interpret for us. As Aboh approached,
Charley and I stooped down and lifted up the negro, who was still
trembling with alarm, though we endeavoured by the tone of our voices
and our gestures to reassure him.
"Come, Aboh, come; let him know that we are friends," cried my brother.
Aboh hurried up. As he got near he stopped, gazing with astonished
looks at the stranger, uttering a few words unintelligible to us. The
stranger answered in the same language. Soon they began to speak more
rapidly, stepping towards each other; then suddenly with loud
exclamations of delight they sprang forward, and throwing themselves
into each other's arms, burst out into tears.
"Brodder! him brodder!" shouted out Aboh, turning round to us to signify
that he had found a relative.
This was indeed satisfactory, as the stranger would be able to render us
all the assistance we required. His canoe, however, was but a small
one, and certainly would not convey all the party across the lake.
"We shall still have to build one, unless our friend here can find us
another," said Charley. "I think a better plan would be to get Aboh and
his brother to ferry Tom across the lake while we march round and find
our way to his village."
On explaining our proposal to Aboh, he had a long palaver with his
brother. The result was not satisfactory.
"Bad man dere," he said, pointing to the eastern end of the lake.
"What do you advise, then?" asked Charley.
"Stay here; Shimbo him go and bring back big canoe," was the answer.
When we suggested that Aboh and Shimbo should take Tom across, they at
once agreed to do so, Aboh observing that Shimbo's canoe would easily
carry three people, but that it would require two canoes of similar size
to paddle us all across. Tom had no objection to accompany the blacks,
and we were anxious that he should get under shelter as soon as
possible. We ourselves proposed remaining where we were and hunting, so
that we might carry a good supply of game with us as a present to our
friends' tribe.
Instead, therefore, of starting off to look for a tree to make a canoe
as we had intended, we all repaired to the fire which Tom had been
blowing into a blaze, and soon had a number of wildfowl roasting before
it. As soon as he saw our pot on the fire, Shimbo ran off to his canoe
and brought back some plantains, which he set to work to peel; he then
carefully washed them, and cutting them in several pieces, put them into
the saucepan. Then he half filled it with water and covered it over
with leaves, on the top of which he placed the banana peelings. The
vegetables were boiled by the time the ducks were roasted. He also
roasted a few ground-nuts, both of which were very acceptable to us
after not having tasted vegetables for so long a time. We thought the
boiled plantains were rather insipid, until Shimbo produced a bag full
of cayenne pepper, with which he sprinkled them as he hooked them out of
the pot, and placed them on some broad leaves to serve as plates.
Altogether, we had not had so satisfactory a meal for some time. We
told Aboh that we hoped to have plenty of game for his friends, and
urged him to come back as soon as possible. Tom looked rather grave as
we lifted him into the canoe. Perhaps he was not so confident as we
were that he would receive a friendly reception.
While watching the canoe as she skimmed over the calm surface of the
lake urged by Aboh's and Shimbo's paddles, we could just see the blue
outline of the opposite shore, with here and there what we supposed to
be tall trees rising above those of the usual forest growth, but they
might be hills or hillocks, so wide was the lake. It would evidently
have taken us many a day's march to get round the way we proposed. Then
we might have been stopped by the bad people of whom Aboh spoke.
Our meditations on the subject were interrupted by the appearance of the
snout of a crocodile, who, swimming by, had taken a fancy to have one of
us for his lunch. We shouted loudly; he beat a retreat, looking out,
while passing slowly on, for any unwary duck or other wildfowl floating
calmly on the smooth water.
"We must keep our promise and get as many birds as we can," said
Charley; "so come along. It will be as well, however, not to separate,
for we may fall in with a lion or leopard, or a herd of elephants. We
ought to be ready to support each other."
Harry and I of course agreed to this. We were very successful, and in
the course of a couple of hours had shot three dozen ducks. Our
difficulty, however, was to preserve them. Even though we hung them up
on the boughs of trees, the ants would manage to get at them, or birds
of prey were likely to carry them off, or, unless they were placed at a
considerable distance from the ground, a leopard or other wild animal
might do so; while it was necessary to look out for a shady spot, or
they would have become uneatable before the following day. We
accordingly set to work and made some baskets of vines, interwoven with
thick leaves, which would protect them from all other creatures with the
exception of the ants. This occupied us two hours or more, and we
agreed that it would be useless to expend a further amount of powder.
We then cooked a duck apiece, and the remainder of the roots and nuts
which Shimbo had left us.
After dinner we went down to the lake to look out for the canoes,
thinking that by this time Aboh might be returning; but none were to be
seen as far as our eyes could reach over the surface of the water. We,
therefore, walked along under the shade of the trees, though at a safe
distance to avoid danger from the sudden rush of a crocodile. After we
had gone some way, we caught sight of a beautiful deer gazing into the
waters of the lake, apparently admiring itself, and occasionally
stooping down to draw up a mouthful. Retiring behind the trees, we
advanced cautiously, hoping to get a shot, and to add the creature to
our larder. I was ahead, and having got well within distance, had just
raised my rifle, and was on the point of drawing my trigger, when I was
startled by seeing a huge crocodile literally leap out of the water, and
then, like a flash of lightning, spring back again, holding the
unfortunate deer struggling violently in its tremendous jaws. I fired,
but my bullet glanced off the side of the scaly monster, which
disappeared with its victim. It was much the same to the deer whether
it was eaten by us or the crocodile, but we were greatly disappointed at
losing it. However, the occurrence made us look out more carefully for
deer, as we might hope to catch one or two, and venison we calculated
would be highly prized by our friends. Besides which, we ourselves were
getting somewhat tired of duck every day.
As we thought it very likely that another deer would come down during
the afternoon to drink at the lake, we formed a screen of boughs, which
served as a favourable look-out. While two of us kept watch for the
deer, the third guarded the rear of our ambush lest a wild beast might
carry off one of us for his supper, instead of our supping off deer as
we hoped to do. It was very fortunate that we took these precautions.
We had not occupied our posts more than a quarter of an hour when Harry,
who was on the look-out, whispered--
"There's a creature crawling along not a hundred yards off."
Charley took a glance round. "It's a leopard, and it evidently sees us;
we must be ready to fire," he whispered.
"But if we do, we shall frighten the deer; so don't pull a trigger
unless it comes nearer," I observed.
The leopard slowly crept by, being apparently itself in search of prey.
It soon disappeared, and although we kept a bright look-out, it did not
return. After this we waited patiently for nearly an hour, when we saw
a small herd of deer coming down the glade. So anxious were we, that we
scarcely dared breathe lest we should alarm them. I remembered the
leopard, and thought that it might possibly be on the look-out for the
deer, and might put them to flight before they could come within shot.
On they trotted, however, as if thoughtless of danger. We allowed the
leader to reach the water. Charley signed to me to point out the one at
which I intended to aim. We each selected one.
The cracks of our three rifles were heard almost at the same moment.
Two of the deer fell killed. The third, at which Harry had aimed,
attempted to escape, while the rest, looking about them with a startled
glance, bounded off. Scarcely, however, had the leader gone a dozen
yards than a leopard sprang out, and seizing the creature in its
powerful jaws, carried it off through the forest.
"Load, quickly, load," cried Charley.
We did so, and then rushed out to secure the deer we had killed, fearing
that another leopard might have a feast off it. We were not, however,
molested, and with infinite satisfaction we dragged the animals one by
one up to the neighbourhood of our camp, where we commenced cutting them
up, although, I must confess, we were not expert in that part of the
huntsman's art. By the time we had finished our task, and hung up the
deer as near to our fire as possible, the sun had sunk below the
horizon.
We again went down to the lake, and were much disappointed at not seeing
the canoe Aboh had promised to bring us. As it was not likely,
therefore, that he would arrive that night, we made up our minds to camp
at the same spot as before. There was no time to lose, and so,
collecting firewood, we prepared to pass the night. It might seem an
easy task to get a supply of sticks, but it was a dangerous one. Not
only did we run the risk of disturbing some venomous snake, but were
nearly certain to find scorpions almost as deadly among the dried wood.
Our plan, therefore, was to scrape together the sticks with a long
staff, and turn them over before attempting to bind them up into faggots
for conveying to the camp. I had not long been thus employed, when a
big scorpion crept out from a mass of bark; I laid my stick, which it
bit severely, on its back, striking its sting into the wood before I
crushed it to death. Having collected a sufficient amount of fuel to
last for the night, we put up a lean-to, under which we could shelter
ourselves from the night dew, though it would afford but a slight
protection against any hungry animal which might venture near, as
leopards and lions might occasionally do. We filled our saucepan with
water, and made every preparation for the night, not forgetting to cook
as much venison as we could possibly eat. Having taken a plentiful
supper we were about to lie down, when Charley said that he would first
take a look round the camp. Not far off was the huge trunk of a fallen
tree, over which bushes had already begun to grow. I saw Charley
suddenly sink down behind it, and as I was following him, he made a sign
to me to creep along under its shelter. I did so, and presently caught
sight of a huge animal advancing in a stealthy fashion along the open
ground. I at once knew it to be a leopard. Charley put up his hand,
signing me to be cautious. The leopard approached, attracted, I have no
doubt, by the smell of the venison, or by the remainder of the carcasses
of the deer, which were not far off.
Whether or not it was the same leopard we had seen in the afternoon, I
could not tell. The creature moved on in its cat-like fashion, looking
cautiously around. Charley and I kept ourselves well concealed, still
it apparently suspected that an enemy was near. It got directly in
front of us. If Charley missed I must, I knew, take care to bring it
down, for if not, it would make nothing of a bound over the tree, and
would carry one of us off. Charley levelled his rifle; a sharp crack
was heard ringing through the night air, answered by the chattering of
numberless monkeys and the shrieks of flocks of parrots and other birds.
The smoke for a moment prevented me seeing the leopard; the next
instant, what was my horror to observe it approaching. In another
instant it would have been upon us. I fired; it leapt high in the air,
and rolled over close to the trunk of the tree.
"Well done, Dick!" cried Charley. "I hit it, but my bullet missed the
vital part."
The leopard was perfectly dead. We easily found the two bullet-holes.
Charley's bullet had struck the edge of a bone, and been slightly
deflected. Had he been alone, the result might have been fatal to him.
How thankful I felt that he had escaped! It was a lesson to us never to
go out hunting singly, and we agreed that we would keep to that rule.
The leopard had fallen just under the bough of a tree, and as we were
anxious to preserve its skin, and yet did not wish to spend time in
flaying the animal that night, we resolved to try and hoist it up to the
bough, where it would remain safe till the morning. We accordingly cut
a number of vines which grew near, and under Charley's directions formed
a series of tackles, by means of which we succeeded, all hoisting
together, in lifting it several feet off the ground. This done, we
returned to our camp. While we had been thus engaged, we had run the
risk, I suspect, of being attacked by another wild beast, either a
leopard or lion, as when I was on watch I heard the mutterings of the
last-named savage brutes in the distance. As I walked up and down in
front of our fire while my brother and Harry were asleep, I watched the
body of the leopard swinging in the air a few feet off, and kept my gun
on the cock ready to fire should a lion approach, as I thought would
very likely be the case, although I had no particular wish to have
another battle that night. However, it so happened that we were left at
rest. At early dawn we let down the carcase, and at once flayed it.
Our object in doing so was to present the skin to the chief of the
village we expected to visit, as we guessed it would be highly prized;
besides which, the fact that we had killed the creature being known,
would raise us in the estimation of the people. Having hung up the skin
to dry, Harry and I went down to the lake, hoping to see the canoe of
our friend, but we were again disappointed. Charley had, in the
meantime, been preparing breakfast, roasting some more ducks, and the
remainder of the ground-nuts left us by Shimbo. After this, we employed
our time in scraping the inside of the leopard's skin, which gave us
enough to do; we then made a sort of lye from the ashes of our fire,
which would have, we hoped, some effect in preserving the skin, though
we were aware that the process we adopted was very rude and imperfect.
As several hours had passed since Tubbs and the two blacks had left us,
we became somewhat anxious about them. If the natives had proved
treacherous, Tom would very likely be put to death or kept a prisoner,
and we should see nothing more of him. About noon, Harry and I had gone
down to the lake to get a saucepan of water, when we remarked a tiny
speck on the broad shining expanse of the lake, where nothing previously
had been visible.
"Hurrah! that must be the canoe at last," he exclaimed.
I was of the same opinion. "If Charley were to have a look at it, he
would be more certain about the matter," I observed; and running back, I
called my brother.
"Yes, there's no doubt about it; that must be the canoe," he said, after
he had watched it attentively.
We now hoped that we should at length get away from the spot where we
had spent so much time. After watching for several minutes, though it
was still at a great distance, and appeared to be approaching very
slowly, we could distinctly make out the canoe. We had gone back to eat
our dinners, as we had become hungry, when Harry said that he would go
down to the lake to see if the canoe was near the shore. Just as he
reached the water, we heard him cry out, "Here they are! here they are!"
Charley and I ran down to join him. The next minute Aboh and Shimbo,
with two other blacks, stepped out of a good-sized canoe, capable of
carrying us three in addition. It was formed very much like the one we
had intended to make out of the trunk of a tree. Aboh seemed as
delighted to see us as if he had been away for several weeks. Why he
had not returned sooner, we could not exactly make out, but we
understood that the king of the village, Quagomolo, was very ill, and as
the only large canoes belonged to him, Aboh could not see him to obtain
the one he wished for. Our friends had brought a supply of plantains
and several other things--manioc, sugar-cane, and squashes. There were
provisions enough for us and themselves for several days. Before
commencing the return voyage, they insisted we should cook them and have
a feast.
"We have already had our dinner," said Charley.
"Bery good! but we,--we empty stomach. No good go sea without eat,"
answered Aboh.
By which he let us understand that he and his companions required food,
and were not entirely disinterested in pressing us to have a feast on
the provisions they had brought. On seeing the deer and the ducks we
had shot, their eyes brightened. Aboh and Shimbo were both very good
cooks, and immediately set to work to dress both the venison and the
vegetables. Their only regret was, that we had not some rum to give
them, the taste of which they had acquired from the white traders who
occasionally came up to their village. I should have said that Aboh
gave us a good report of Tom, who was being well treated by the
inhabitants of the village, by whom we also expected to be received in a
friendly manner. Aboh and Shimbo were so long in preparing the viands,
that by the time they announced that all were sufficiently cooked, we
were perfectly ready to fall to. We enjoyed our meal, and as soon as it
was over, Charley proposed that we should start without delay.
The ducks and the venison were carried down to the canoe, as well as the
leopard skin. By the time we had taken our seats, it appeared to us
greatly overloaded; still our black friends were unwilling to leave any
provisions behind. Aboh, pointing to the leopard skin, exclaimed,
"King, him like much;" so that we hoped our gift would be acceptable to
his sable majesty. The day was pretty well advanced, but we hoped to
get across the lake before nightfall. All being ready, our black crew
seizing their paddles, the canoe began to glide across the lake.
Charley took a fifth paddle with which to steer, but he soon found that
the blacks could manage the canoe perfectly well without his assistance.
The heat was so great on the water that we were all thankful to avoid
any unnecessary exertion. The blacks as they paddled sang a low
monotonous song, more like a dirge. What it was about we could not
tell. By looking back we saw that we had got some distance from the
land, although we appeared not to have approached nearer the opposite
shore, which still remained as indistinct as before. After some time
the blacks ceased their song, and I saw them gazing round at the sky,
the appearance of which was rapidly changing. The sun suddenly
disappeared behind a dark bank of cloud coming up from the west, and a
leaden hue overspread the hitherto sparkling water, at the same time
that a strong wind began to blow. This soon broke the hitherto tranquil
lake into hissing wavelets, which continually toppled over into the
canoe. Aboh, turning round, handed to each of us a bason formed from a
gourd, and made signs that we should bale out the water as it came in.
He and his companions then redoubled their efforts. I caught a glimpse
of his countenance as he turned round; it showed that he was far from
satisfied with the appearance of the weather. I asked Charley what he
thought about the matter.
"I'm afraid that we are going to have a gale; and if so, a nasty sea
will get up, and we shall be obliged to heave our cargo overboard,
although we will not do so until it becomes absolutely necessary."
Every instant the wind increased, and the blacks paddled harder and
harder. At present it was on our beam, although, should it come ahead,
we should make but little progress, or perhaps be compelled to run back
to the place we had left. Notwithstanding the threatening aspect of the
weather, Aboh and his companions seemed determined to continue their
course. The water kept tumbling on board, but we continued baling it
out as fast as we could.
"I'm afraid that we must heave the birds and venison overboard," said
Charley.
I made Aboh understand what we proposed doing.
"No, no," was the answer; "dat all right."
He and his companions paddled on bravely for another half hour. By this
time it had become perfectly dark, and we could not discover the land
ahead, but the black fellows seemed to guide their course by instinct,
for I could see no welcoming beacon on the shore. To our satisfaction
the wind did not increase, though the canoe tumbled about a good deal,
and not for a moment were we able to cease baling. The blacks paddled
on bravely through the pitchy darkness. Suddenly a flash of lightning
burst from the clouds, followed by a tremendous roar of thunder. I
could see the flame dancing along over the water, mercifully avoiding
our canoe, leaving all in darkness beyond. The blacks for a moment
ceased paddling.
"Go on, go on," I cried out to Aboh; "this is no time to stop; the
sooner we reach the shore the sooner we shall be in safety."
Aboh repeated what I had said to his companions, and, thus encouraged,
all hands paddled away as before. As no land was in sight, I could not
make out how they managed to steer a straight course, but they seemed
perfectly satisfied that they were going right. Probably they were
guided by the wind on one side. Had it shifted, they would have been
thrown out. This I greatly feared would be the case; and after all,
might we be paddling up the lake instead of across it. Charley got out
his pocket compass, but the wind prevented us striking a light, and it
was consequently of no use. He kept it before him, however, in case
another flash of lightning should enable him to see it. He had not long
to wait. A vivid flash darted directly across the canoe.
"Hurrah!" he exclaimed; "we are all right; we are steering due north."
We had no longer, after this, any doubt about the judgment of our
African friends. The thunder rolled, the lightning flashed, and we
continued to bale away as the water washed into the canoe. For some
moments the lightning ceased, and we hoped the storm was over; but we
were mistaken. Another flash darted from the sky, more vivid than its
predecessors, with a loud hissing, crackling sound.
"Hurrah! I caught sight of some trees and a hut," exclaimed Charley.
He was not mistaken, in less than a quarter of an hour after this, the
canoe ran alongside the bank in a little bay, and our crew, jumping out,
welcomed us on shore.
Their loud shouts brought a number of people out of the neighbouring
huts, who quickly unloaded the canoe; while we were conducted by Aboh
and Shimbo to a hut which they said was prepared for our reception.
Within we found Tom seated on a couch formed of bamboos.
"Glad to see you, gentlemen, that I am," he exclaimed. "To say the
truth, I had begun to fear that you would never come at all, as I have
had some doubts about the intentions of our friends here. They were
very kind, howsomever, for they fed me well and tried their skill at
doctoring my foot, but I cannot say that they have done it any good; so
I hope, Mr Westerton, that you will again take me in hand."
We were thankful to find that Tom was in such good spirits. Charley, on
looking at his foot, said he hoped, as the swelling had greatly gone
down, that in a few days it would be as strong as ever. As it was so
late at night, we expected to go supperless to bed, but we had not been
long in the hut when a bevy of damsels arrived carrying baskets on their
heads, containing cooked provisions enough, including some of our
venison, to feed a dozen people. We were not sorry to partake of them,
as we had become very hungry; but as we had had but little rest the
previous night, we begged our entertainers to leave us in quiet, which
they did not appear disposed to do. At length Aboh and Shimbo making
their appearance, at our request turned all our guests out and allowed
us to sleep in quiet.
Next morning we were awakened by great shouting, and on inquiring the
cause, ascertained that a famous doctor had come to cure the king,
Quagomolo, of his disease, though what that was we could not ascertain.
We went out to see this important personage, who presented a most
fantastic appearance. His head was adorned with feathers, birds' beaks,
and claws of leopards, hyenas, and other savage brutes; half his body
was painted red, the other half white, while his face was daubed with
streaks of alternate black, white, and red. Round his neck he wore
numerous chains and charms, which tinkled and rattled as he moved about.
After having paraded himself through the village to be admired by the
inhabitants, he was introduced to the hut of the king, whom he had not
yet seen. Finding no one to stop us, we shortly afterwards followed,
when we saw the doctor seated on a low stool before a large earthenware
pot, into which he was looking intently. This done, having seized a
lighted torch smouldering by his side, he whirled it about his head till
it burst into a flame. He then waved it over the pot, muttering some
mysterious words. He continued this and similar performances for so
long a time that we were getting weary of witnessing them, when suddenly
a person rose from a couch at the further end of the room, whom we
rightly supposed to be King Quagomolo.
"Sit down, your majesty, sit down," exclaimed the doctor. "I'll soon
say what's the matter with you."
The king obeyed. Again the doctor waved his torch and gazed into the
pot, and then declared that his majesty was bewitched.
"Who are the people who have bewitched me?" asked the king in a
trembling voice.
"They are some men and women in your own kingdom, and not far off from
this," answered the doctor in a deep bass voice which could be heard
outside the hut, where a number of persons were collected.
There was a general howl of alarm, for no one could tell who would be
fixed on. The king, on hearing this, announced that the persons
implicated must drink the poisoned water, usually given on such
occasions. So we learned from Aboh, who had crept into the hut and
squatted down beside us.
"We must try to defeat the old rascal," whispered Charley. "Show us
where the poison is to be concocted?"
The doctor had now a drum brought him by an attendant, on which he began
to beat vehemently, when the king again sank down on his couch. We on
this quietly made our exit, and, led by Aboh, entered another hut,
where, by the light of a single torch, some old women were concocting
the mysterious beverage. We watched them until they had finished, when,
leaving the bowl covered up by a piece of matting, they crept out one by
one, holding up their hands, taking long, slow strides, and looking
truly like witches themselves, and, as Harry observed, "Very bad
specimens too."
As soon as they were gone, finding a jug of pure water near at hand,
Charley poured out the mixture into a corner, and filled up the bowl
again with the harmless liquid. Fortunately, we found a basketful of
what was evidently colouring matter, and having mixed some of it in the
water, we covered the bowl up again and left the hut. We then went back
to our hut. Finding that the king, in spite of the lateness of the
hour, was ready to receive us, taking our two black friends, Aboh to act
as interpreter, we carried with us the leopard skin, some venison, and
three strings of beads of various colours. His majesty was a tall,
ungainly looking man, with as hideous a countenance as can well be
imagined. His appearance was not improved by the glare of the
torchlight and the terror under which he was suffering. Having
presented the leopard skin and venison, Charley, who acted as spokesman,
threw the string of beads round his neck.
"Tell him," he said to Aboh, "that those are powerful charms, and will
quickly restore him to health."
After a short palaver we begged leave to retire, assuring his majesty
that he would be quite well in the morning, and that we were very sure
that none of his subjects had bewitched him, as would then be proved.
"If we succeed we shall have performed a very good work," said Charley,
laughing, as we returned to our hut.
Next morning the whole tribe was collected, and the accused persons
brought forward. The bowl was handed round among them. No one to whom
it was offered dared refuse to drink from it, although the distortions
of their countenances showed the alarm under which they laboured. The
king, who had been brought out to witness the ceremony on a litter, sat
by watching them, and expecting, perhaps, to see some of them drop down
dead.
To our surprise three or four of them appeared greatly agitated,
writhing about and making hideous faces, but we felt very sure that this
was the result of imagination; and even these soon recovered, while the
rest remained standing, and doing their best to smile and convince the
king and their friends of their innocence. The effect on King Quagomolo
was almost instantaneous, and before evening he declared himself
perfectly recovered. To prove this, he summoned his liege subjects to
attend a dance in honour of the event. No great preparations were
required, and that very evening was fixed for the event. The king's
wives, of whom he had no small number, and all the dames and damsels
from far and wide, came trooping in, and arranged themselves in the
large open space in the centre of the village. The men sat on the
opposite side, with a line of musicians in front. These were mostly
drummers, who beat their huge tom-toms with right good will, making the
most fearful and deafening din. Others had brass kettles, and others
hollow pieces of wood, which assisted greatly in the uproar; while at
the same time both men and women sang, shouted, and shrieked, until we,
who stood at a little distance off, could scarcely hear each other's
voices. The barbarous overture being brought to a conclusion, the king,
who had been seated amongst his wives, rose, and springing into the
centre of the circle, began snapping his fingers, twisting and turning
in all sorts of attitudes, leaping from the ground, kicking up one leg,
then another, and throwing his arms round until it appeared that he
would swing them off.
"Here am I, my friends," he shouted. "Once I was ill, now I am well;
and if our white friends here will stay with us, I never expect to be
ill again."
He danced and shouted until we thought he would have dropped. Presently
he managed to spring back, exhibiting the utmost agility to the last,
until he sat down again in the midst of his better halves, who had been
amongst the most demonstrative of his applauders. Several of his chiefs
then followed his example, but took good care not to surpass the king
either in the time they danced or the activity they displayed. Before
they sat down, several women sprang up, who, not being influenced by the
same motives as the courtiers, contrived to twist and turn themselves in
a way which was neither creditable to their modesty, nor pleasant to
look at. We had good reason to be satisfied with this commencement of
our intercourse with King Quagomolo. He presented us with abundance of
food, and the hut built for our accommodation was clean and comfortable.
In a short time, by careful treatment, Tom's ankle completely regained
its strength, and he declared himself ready to continue the journey to
the northward. We arranged, therefore, to start immediately, but we
calculated without our host. When we told Aboh of our intentions, and
asked him to accompany us, he made a long face, and shaking his head,
said, "King no let go, want fight;" by which we understood that
Quagomolo intended to detain us in order that we might assist him in
some predatory excursion he was meditating against a neighbouring tribe,
we having firearms in good order, while he and his people had among them
only a few old muskets, many of which were destitute of locks, and could
only be fired by means of matches applied to the touch-holes. On
obtaining this information, we agreed that it would not be wise to show
any mistrust of the king, but quietly to take our departure, with or
without his leave, whenever it might suit us to do so.
As we were well treated, we were in no hurry to get away, besides which
we had abundance of sport in the neighbourhood, and seldom went out
without bringing back eight or ten brace of ducks and other wildfowl.
However, at length we thought it time to tell the king that we must be
going.
We took the opportunity when he was in a good humour, having just
quaffed a few bowls of a sort of palm-wine of which he was especially
fond.
"Stay, my dear friends, stay a few days longer, and you shall go forth
with honour, and each of you shall take a wife with you and a hundred
attendants."
Charley assured his majesty that we must decline the wives, and that our
own rifles were the best attendants we desired, with the exception of
one or two intelligent men to act as guides.
"You shall have your will, you shall have your will," answered the king,
"but stay one day longer, just one day."
We accordingly, hoping to have no obstruction offered to our departure,
agreed to stay, but when the evening arrived the king sent a messenger
to say he wished to see us.
"What, my friends," he began as we entered his hut--"do you want to go
and leave me all forlorn, stay another day, stay another day."
Such was the tenor of his address which Aboh translated to us.
"Tell him that to-morrow we must go," said Charley.
The king smiled benignantly, so Harry declared, although he appeared to
me to make a very hideous grimace.
The next day, early in the morning, we all four loaded our muskets, and
asked Aboh if he was ready to accompany us.
"King, he give him leave, him go at once," he answered.
No sooner did we quit our hut than we saw all the men of the village,
fully armed, collected at the outlets, evidently resolved to stop us by
force. Although we might have fought our way through them, we could not
have done so without bloodshed. Again we resolved to make a virtue of
necessity, and remain until we could find a favourable opportunity of
escaping.
Several days passed by, and every morning, when we were prepared to set
out, we found the village guarded as before. When, however, we left our
packs behind us, we were allowed to ramble at perfect freedom. Besides
Aboh and Shimbo we found a party always ready to accompany us and act as
beaters.
Not wishing it to be supposed that we intended to leave that morning, we
quietly returned to our hut, and undoing our knapsacks again went out,
simply with our rifles in our hands, as if we intended to have a little
shooting before breakfast. We had not gone far when we saw a woman near
the shore of the lake apparently hunting about and calling out to some
one in tones of distress.
"Who is she? and what is it all about?" I asked Aboh.
"She king's wife. Go bathe, lose piccaninny."
We hurried on until we met the poor woman. She then explained that
while she was bathing in a sheltered pool she had left her little boy on
the bank of the lake to play about and amuse himself, but when she came
out of the water she could nowhere find him. Of course it at once
occurred to us that a crocodile must have carried him off, but Aboh
averred that if such was the case the mother would have heard him cry
out. He might have slipped into the water and have been drowned, but
that he might possibly be hiding from her, for the sake of playing a
trick.
"In that case she will soon find him, I hope," I observed.
Scarcely had I spoken than I saw a huge crocodile crawling out of the
bank not twenty yards from us. The next instant, stooping down its
head, it lifted up a little black boy by one of his legs.
At the sight the mother shrieked out, "My son, my son!"
The fate of the child seemed certain. As the huge creature turned to
run, I saw that its neck was exposed. Fortunately, having loaded my
rifle with ball, I fired. By a miracle it seemed, the crocodile let the
child drop, and after making a faint attempt to recover it, gave a few
convulsive struggles, and rolled off the bank perfectly dead, for we
could see it lying on its back in shallow water.
The poor mother rushed forward and picked up the little boy, who,
although fearfully bitten about the leg, was still alive. It had not
before uttered a sound, but now it began to cry as it saw the blood
streaming from the wounded limb. As far as I could judge, no vital part
had been touched, and I told Aboh to say to the mother, that if she
would let us doctor it we would do so, as I had hopes of its recovery.
Having washed it then and there in cold water, we stopped the blood,
bound up the wounds, and gave it to the mother to carry back. Quagomolo
was, we found, especially fond of the child. It was six or seven years
old, and, being in a healthy condition, by the evening appeared no
worse. At the end of three days, as lock-jaw had not set in, and the
wounds looked healthy, we assured the king of our belief that his son
would in time get well. Quagomolo and his wife both appeared very
grateful.
"Whatever you shall ask you shall have," he said; "half my kingdom, half
of my wives, or half of my children, or half of my people for slaves."
"Tell his majesty that we are much obliged to him," answered Charley;
"but the only favour we ask is the loan of a couple of his faithful
subjects, and permission to proceed on our journey to the northward,
where we expect to fall in with some of our countrymen. We are friends
to Africa and the Africans, and wish to do the people all the good we
can, but that if he keeps us here, our plans will be defeated."
The king replied "that he would consider the matter, but that perhaps he
knew what was for our good as well as we did ourselves, and that if we
wished to benefit the Africans we should remain and exercise our skill
on him and his people."
This answer was anything but satisfactory. We had accordingly, as
before, to shrug our shoulders and submit for the present, not
intending, however, much longer to comply with the fancies of the sable
monarch.
CHAPTER TEN.
KING QUAGOMOLO WILL NOT LET US GO--HE SHOWS US HIS PLANTAIN GROVE--
SCHEMES FOR ESCAPE--START ON AN ELEPHANT HUNT--ELEPHANTS CAUGHT BY TRAPS
AND NETS--TWO NATIVES CRUSHED TO DEATH--PART OF AN ELEPHANT CUT OFF FOR
THE IDOLS--A NATIVE DANCE--THE KING NOT SUCH A FOOL AS WE TAKE HIM FOR--
DETAINED BY RAIN--ENTER AN HOSTILE COUNTRY--ENCAMP AND FEAST--TOBACCO
AND PALM-WINE MAKE HIS MAJESTY WAX VALIANT--WE KEEP WATCH--A NIGHT
ATTACK--CAPTURED BY KING SANGA TANGA--HOW CAN TUBBS REJOIN US--TRY TO
EXPLAIN TO THE KING--WE GO TO GET TOM--KING QUAGOMOLO'S SURPRISE--RETURN
WITH TOM AND THE KNAPSACKS--HUGE APES--THE NSHIEGO'S HOUSE--DISTURB
DOMESTIC HAPPINESS--SEPARATED FROM MY COMPANIONS--SEE A FIRE--A CHARMING
FAMILY--I RETREAT--CLIMB A TREE--AN UNPLEASANT VISITOR--I GO TO SLEEP.
Day after day passed by, and still King Quagomolo made some excuse for
not allowing us to proceed on our journey. He could well afford to
support us, for, savage as were he and his people in most respects, they
possessed an unusually large plantation of plantains, on a piece of
level ground a short distance from the lake. He took special pride in
it, and invited us to pay it a visit. We could not calculate how many
trees there were, though there must have been upwards of twenty
thousand. The trees stood about five feet apart, and the bunches of
plantains which each tree produced weighed from thirty to fifty pounds,
those from some of the larger trees much more. There were several
varieties even in the same grove. The king informed us that some of
these trees bear fruit six or seven months after the sprouts are
planted, others, again, take two or three months longer before they bear
fruit; and what we may consider the finer species do not begin to bear
until about eighteen months after the sprouts are put into the ground,
but these last bear by far the larger bunches. This plantain grove was
one of the pleasantest sights we had witnessed since we had landed on
the shores of Africa. No cereal on the same space of ground, however
highly cultivated, could afford the same amount of food.
We complimented the king, through Aboh, on the beauty and size of his
plantation, and the fruit it contained.
"Very good for eat, but no good for trade," was the answer. His majesty
had, it was evident, an eye to commerce, and we discovered that the
article which he could obtain with the least difficulty, and sell at the
highest price, were elephants' tusks. His hunters, we found, frequently
went in chase of the monsters for a twofold purpose,--to obtain ivory,
and to keep them at a distance from the plantain grove, among which two
or three elephants in a few hours might have committed immense damage.
He had arranged a grand elephant hunt, not having taken part in one
since his illness. He had made up his mind that we should accompany
him, believing that our rifles would be the means of securing more ivory
than could his own people with their darts and spears. We hoped that if
we complied with his wishes, he would be more ready to allow us to take
our departure. We accordingly agreed to accompany him. Tom wished to
go also, but, although he was able to walk, Charley advised him not to
run the risk of again spraining his ankle, feeling sure that great
activity would be required from the experience we had already had in
getting out of the way of elephants.
"But I've been thinking, sir, that we might have a chance of making our
escape while we are out hunting. We could easily slip away from the
natives, and push on fast in the direction we want to go."
"There are two objections to that," answered Charley. "In the first
place, the natives can travel through the forest faster than we can, and
would soon overtake us; then, as we could not go out hunting with our
packs, we should have to leave them behind us; besides which, I would
rather leave the king who has treated us so hospitably, in an open
fashion, with his goodwill, instead of stealing off like deserters."
"I dare say you are right, sir," answered Tom, "but we shall look very
foolish if the king, after all, insists on our stopping with him."
"Should such be the case, we can but take up our packs and march off,
and should any attempt be made to stop us, fight the black fellows."
"That's the sort of plain sailing I like," said Tom.
We were surprised next morning at the extent of the preparations made
for the hunt. We found nearly four hundred men, armed with spears and
javelins, assembled in the great square of the village, a large number
having come from the neighbouring hamlets. The king soon came out of
his palace--for so I may call it, although it was but a rude hut,
thickly thatched with palm-leaves. He was dressed far more elaborately
than we had hitherto seen him, with a circle of feathers on his head,
and a kilt of long grass round his waist secured by a belt, to which
hung a number of fetishes or charms. The skin of a leopard hung over
his shoulder, to which was suspended a gun, while he carried also a long
spear, ornamented with a tuft of hair at the end. The rest of the
huntsmen were attired as usual, in nothing but the waist cloth, which is
worn by the most savage tribes.
The king divided his force into six different parties and desired us to
accompany the one commanded by himself. He then gave the order to
march. We all set out. Before long we reached the forest, through
which we proceeded for several hours, occasionally having to cut our way
where the thick vines which hung from all the trees impeded our
progress. Towards evening we arrived at the spot where the king had
determined to halt. His people immediately set about forming the camp,
by collecting wood and putting up shelters, which consisted of
lean-to's. Two poles with forked ends were stuck in the ground, on the
top of which rested an horizontal pole; against this a number of others
were placed, when large palm or other leaves were secured above them, so
that the hardest rain was turned off, the roof, of course, being placed
on the side against which the wind blew. A large one was built for the
king, who invited us to share it with him. It was of the same
construction as that of the rest. In front a large fire was kindled.
We had no reason to complain of our entertainment, for the king had
brought an ample supply of venison as well as plantains, and other
vegetables and food. We also slept securely, as we knew that the
hunters would keep a look-out during the night for any savage animals
which might come prowling round the camp.
At early dawn we were on foot, and the king marshalling his forces, sent
them off in different directions, so that they might form a large circle
and drive in any elephants to a common centre, where we were given to
understand some pits had been dug especially for the purpose of
entrapping them or any other wild beasts. In that part of the forest
there also grew a vast number of strong climbing plants or vines, some
extending to the very tops of the tallest trees, twisting and turning
among the branches. With these also the natives formed traps for
elephants, by weaving them in and out among the trunks in such a way
that should an elephant once get in he would be unable to extricate
himself before the hunters were upon him.
"Now," said his majesty to us, through Aboh, who was kept by his side to
act as interpreter, "we will start and show you what real sport is." I
don't mean to say that Aboh used those very words, but he said something
to that effect. We looked to our rifles and commenced our march,
keeping close behind the sable monarch, whose spirits seemed to rise as
he found himself once more in the midst of the wilds in which he had
achieved renown as a hunter. No one uttered a word for fear of giving
warning to any elephants who might be feeding near at hand, and who
would break away should they hear our voices. Before long, however, we
came upon traces of several animals; young saplings being trampled
underfoot, bows torn down, and hanging vines dragged away. The king
made a sign to us to proceed even more cautiously than before. We
expected every moment to be in sight of a herd of the huge animals.
Presently we heard a loud trumpeting, not fifty yards away from us.
"Be on the look-out, Dick," cried Charley, "the beasts will be coming
this way perhaps. Get up a tree, but don't attempt to run."
He remembered how very nearly he had been caught, indeed, Harry and I
had not forgotten the fright the beasts had given us. The blacks,
however, by their movements did not seem to expect the elephants to come
that way, but advanced at a more rapid pace than before in the direction
whence the sounds proceeded.
"Why, that trumpeting seems to be coming out of the earth," cried Harry.
Just then the chief gave a flourish with his spear and rushed on.
Presently we saw him dart his weapon with all his force, as it appeared
to us, into the ground. On nearing the spot, we saw that he had hurled
it into a pit at a huge elephant whose trunk was seen waving above the
surface of the ground. The blacks now rushed on, each man holding a
javelin in his hand, which he plunged into the back or side of the
animal, now screaming with pain. Dart after dart was buried in its
flesh. It was in a pit cleverly formed in the side of a hill, towards
which it had been apparently making its way, the upper side much higher
than it could reach even with its trunk, while the lower was of
sufficient depth to prevent it scrambling out again--it was thus
completely in the hunters' power. The pit had been covered over with
light branches and grass, so that the animal, as it rushed along, had
not seen it.
As the savages came up they continued hurling their javelins or spears
into the poor beast, which was soon covered over almost to resemble a
huge porcupine. As the creature's death was certain, we did not think
it wise to spend powder and ball on it, indeed, we were likely to offend
our fellow-hunters, as they had evidently gained a victory.
As we stood near the pit, keeping at a sufficient distance to avoid
tumbling in, we watched the poor creature in its hopeless efforts to
escape. While it continued on its feet, the savages in succession came
rushing up and throwing their darts, each man of them seeming anxious to
have a hand in its slaughter.
At length, much to our satisfaction, it sunk down on its knees, and soon
afterwards rolled over on its side, dead. The blacks immediately jumped
down, and began pulling out the darts, to be ready to attack a fresh
elephant. We soon had an opportunity of seeing another way in which
these monsters are caught. Leaving for the present the carcase of the
animal we had taken, we advanced further into the forest; presently one
of the scouts who had been sent ahead, came hurrying back, saying that
there were three elephants not far off. The blacks now began to steal
forward, keeping as much as possible under cover, and sometimes
advancing on their hands and knees. We kept, by the king's desire, a
short distance behind. Presently we heard a tremendous shout, and we
saw two elephants before us. They looked round evidently much
frightened, and then dashed forward towards one of the barriers, which
had been prepared in the neighbourhood. The natives advanced rapidly,
until the elephants were suddenly entrapped in a network of vines. The
terrified creatures endeavoured to tear them away with their trunks and
feet, but the greater their efforts, the more fatally they surrounded
themselves with the tough vines. From every side the natives now
appeared, completely surrounding the struggling creatures, which they
plied unceasingly with their spears. Some climbed up the neighbouring
trees, an example which we followed, for it seemed to us that at any
moment the beasts might break away and trample us to death before we
could possibly escape. The poor creatures found the darts showered down
on them from above, and from every side. The more daring hunters would
occasionally rush in close behind them, and dart their spears deep into
their flesh. While they were thus engaged, a third elephant, followed
by another party of hunters, who had already wounded him, came tearing
along. He, too, was caught in the meshes of the network. Several darts
were hurled into him, but suddenly turning round, he broke away from
them, and trumpeting fiercely, rushed towards a score of natives, who
were still at a little distance. They endeavoured to fly on every side,
but so unexpected was the attack of the beast, that all had not time to
do so. Two unfortunate men were caught; in an instant they were beneath
the elephant's feet, who stamped upon them with all his mighty force.
In another moment they were crushed, their skulls and all the bones in
their bodies being broken, then seizing one in his trunk, the monster
hurled it into the air, and rushed forward in an endeavour to make his
escape. The whole party, on seeing this, excited by rage, pursued the
animal, shouting and shrieking, grinding their teeth, and darting their
spears and javelins with all their might. I saw that the elephant had
not a chance of escape, indeed, in a short time, mighty as was his
strength, he sank down exhausted, with the blood flowing from a hundred
wounds, and after a few struggles was dead. On this the natives rushed
forward, and began cutting away at the creature with their knives,
uttering curses on it for having killed their friends. The noise they
had made had scared away all the other elephants--however, they appeared
pretty well satisfied with the four they had killed. They now assembled
round the last elephant which had fallen, while one of their fetish-men,
or priests, approached and cut off a portion which was carefully stowed
away in a basket; this was intended, we understood, for an offering to
their idols. A dance was now commenced, and was as savage as could well
be imagined. They shrieked, they leaped, they whirled their lances
above their heads, and twisted and turned their bodies about in the most
fantastic manner, making at the same time the most hideous faces, until,
exhausted with their exertions, they all squatted down on the ground.
Once more at a sign they rose, when they repeated the same dance round
the fetish basket. We were in hopes that the king would return home the
next day, but the hunters brought word that there were still more
elephants a short distance off, which had come to feed on the leaves of
certain trees of which they are very fond. We tried to get off
attending his majesty, and Charley suggested that if he made no
objection we should return to the village, where, having rejoined Tom,
and taken our packs, we might endeavour to make our way northward. Our
friend, however, suspected the trick we intended to play him.
"King say `No good,'" observed Aboh, while his majesty put on a knowing
look; and we had to yield to circumstances.
Next day it rained, and we were compelled to keep beneath the shelter of
our lean-to's, with nothing to do except to listen to the unintelligible
jokes of the king, many of them we suspected at our expense, although
Aboh was too polite to say so. It cleared up in the evening, but it was
then too late to start. In the morning we proceeded, after a plentiful
breakfast, to the north-east. We observed that the hunters advanced in
a more cautious way than before, and we soon discovered that we were
entering the territory of another sable monarch, who was not likely,
should he discover it, to be well pleased with our proceeding. Having
advanced all the day, we at length encamped, much in the same manner as
before. Fires were lighted, and huge pieces of elephant flesh placed to
cook before them. A party of carriers had followed us, bringing more
delicate provisions, and among them some jugs of palm-wine, with which,
after the feast, the king and his more special favourites regaled
themselves.
We each of us had brought some tobacco, which we thought this a
favourable occasion to produce, and great was the delight of the king
and his courtiers when they observed it. Pipes were brought forth,
which we filled as they were handed to us. All those thus favoured
collected round one fire. There are few things an African hunter
delights in more than sitting round a blazing fire at night with a pipe
in his mouth, and narrating for the hundredth time, perhaps, his various
exploits. We regretted not having a sufficient knowledge of the
language to make out what was said, but, from the shouts of laughter
uttered by our black friends, the yarns were highly amusing to
themselves, if not edifying to us. The shades of evening were
approaching, a few rays of the setting sun penetrating amid the trees,
cast a bright light on the boughs above us. A portion of the hunters
were engaged in collecting wood, and bringing in bundles in order to
keep up the fires during the night. The king having imbibed a good
quantity of palm-wine, waxed valiant, and seizing his spear, advanced in
front of the camp, flourishing his weapon, and addressing in stentorian
tones some fetish or spirit of the air in the forest. We of course
could not make out what he said, nor would Aboh enlighten us. Perhaps
he was merely praying for a successful hunt the following day. After
the king had thus given vent to his feelings, whatever they were, he
returned and seated himself near us at the fire, when he ordered another
jug of palm-wine to be brought One of the courtiers suggested that his
majesty was taking a little too much, on which the king, who was now
certainly beyond the point at which discretion is retained, told him to
mind his own business, and looking in his face, swallowed down another
cup. He then insisted that we should join him, wishing to show us the
highest possible mark of honour; we, to please him, took the bowls in
our hands, but the moment his eyes were averted, we handed them to some
of his courtiers, who had no objection to drink instead of us.
Night had now come on, but still the revels of the king and his
courtiers continued. We had retired to a lean-to, hoping to find some
rest, for we were all really tired after our day's excursion.
"It seems strange that the king, who ought to remember that we are in
the country of one of his enemies, should not take more care to guard
against a surprise," observed Charley. "I think we ought to keep watch,
for very likely these African fellows will forget to do so, and even if
they are not attacked by their enemies, a leopard may steal into the
camp and carry one or more of them off."
Harry and I fully agreed with this; and we drew lots, as we always did
on such occasions, to settle the order in which we should keep watch.
The first lot fell to me. I was on the point of arousing Harry, who was
to keep the second watch, when I was startled by the most fearful
shrieks bursting from every side around the camp. The next instant the
whole space was filled with warriors, who leaped down into the midst of
the sleeping hunters, clubbing some, piercing others with their lances,
and throwing cords round the arms of others. There was no necessity to
rouse up my companions, for they had started to their feet.
"Where shall we go? We are not going to fight for these drunken
fellows," cried Harry.
"Into the bush then behind us," answered Charley.
Harry and I followed him as he sprung round our leafy bower; but we had
not gone many yards when we found ourselves in the presence of a dozen
or more savages. The light of the fire falling upon us, revealed to
them that we were white men, and instead of knocking us over with their
clubs, they leaped forward and grasped our arms. We literally had not a
moment to defend ourselves--indeed, from the number of our enemies, we
could scarcely have hoped to have fought our way through them. If we
had done so without food, and with only a limited supply of ammunition,
we could not have made our way far through the country. What became of
the king and his courtiers, whether they escaped or were knocked on the
head, we could not tell. We were at once unceremoniously hurried off by
our captors, who seemed to consider us rich prizes. As we were led off
we witnessed a horrible scene. One of our unfortunate companions had
been struck down, but still breathed; when, a number of the savages
rushing towards him, some seized his arms and legs, and others, drawing
their long knives, plunged them in his body, taking care apparently to
avoid wounding any vital part.
Several women who appeared on the scene were encouraging the men in
their atrocious proceedings. The cries of the poor wretch reached our
ears for some time afterwards, till, becoming fainter and fainter, they
altogether ceased, and we were thankful to believe that his sufferings
were over. They did not, however, deprive us of our rifles, nor were we
in any way ill-treated, except that we were compelled to hurry on at a
much faster rate than we liked. After travelling for several miles we
saw lights ahead, and found that we were approaching the camp of the
people who had captured us. Our guards uttered loud shouts, and a
number of people came forth from a collection of leafy huts, which, it
was evident from their slight structure, were mere temporary erections.
The principal person of the crowd was a savage-looking fellow, about as
ugly as King Quagomolo, and dressed much in the same fashion. His
majesty, although so ugly, did not appear to have any evil intentions
regarding us, but was evidently satisfied at having got us into his
power. He invited us to join him at his camp-fire, and at once ordered
some of his slaves to bring us food, of which we thought it prudent to
partake, although we were not in reality very hungry. We had not been
seated long before parties arrived, carrying the tusks of the elephants
we had killed; and others followed, dragging along about thirty
prisoners, among whom we recognised our friend Aboh. As soon as he saw
us he shouted out to the king, who at once ordered him to be released,
when he came up to us.
"Me say talkee for you," he observed, by which we understood that he had
informed the king that he was our interpreter. He then had a long
palaver with his majesty, who seemed well satisfied with what he heard.
The intentions of the king were, we found out from what Aboh said, to
make us useful to fight his battles, to assist him in governing the
country, and to perform any service which he considered white men
capable of doing better than his own subjects. He, by some means or
other, had been informed of our being in the country, and had made the
attack on Quagomolo's camp, expressly for the purpose of getting
possession of us.
"What has become of your king and the rest of your people?" we asked of
Aboh.
"Him no killee, me tinke run 'way," he answered.
"Things are not so bad as they might have been, so we ought to be
thankful," observed Charley; "but still I am afraid that we are as
little likely as before to be allowed to continue our journey."
Our chief anxiety was about Tom Tubbs. We feared that King Quagomolo
was not likely to set him at liberty, nor was it probable that he would
deliver up our knapsacks, even should we send for them, for though he
had hitherto behaved honestly towards us, we could scarcely expect that
he would withstand the temptation of appropriating their contents under
the uncertainty of our fate. Our first object then was to get Tom to
rejoin us, and by some means or other to regain our property. Our
knapsacks contained powder and shot, beads and trinkets, with which to
pay our way, an extra pair of boots, and numerous other articles of the
greatest value to us. We were already more than three days' journey
from King Quagomolo's village, and so much on our way to the north.
Before lying down to sleep, we consulted Aboh on the subject. "Berry
bad, berry bad," he answered, shaking his head, which he always did when
he found a knotty point difficult to unravel. "Me say de King Sanga
Tanga--me go get odder white man and him goods. Suppose let me go, what
say King Quagomolo? when him come, cut off him head me tinkee."
"We don't want you to run that risk, Aboh," said Charley, "but still we
wish you to find some other way."
"Me tinkee, me tinkee, now go sleep," answered Aboh, by which we
understood that he would consider the matter and let us know the result
of his cogitations in the morning. We accordingly, as he advised, wrapt
ourselves in our cloaks which we had on when we were captured, and,
taking our positions as near the fire as we could, tried to sleep. I
observed that our captors kept a far more watchful look-out than had our
former friends--indeed, from the little I had seen of them, they
appeared to me to be a far more sagacious and keen-witted set than those
we had left. They had good reason also to be on the watch, for they
might at any moment be attacked by the followers of King Quagomolo, the
larger number of whom had escaped, and who would very likely rally and
attempt to recover their friends and us, and revenge themselves for the
sudden and unprovoked assault made on their camp. Charley expressed a
hope that such might be the case, and that we should then regain out
liberty.
"I should be sorry for the bloodshed which would ensue, for our captors
would probably fight desperately to detain us, and many on both sides
would be killed," said Harry, who was always more anxious to obtain an
object by peaceable means than by force.
"There is no use talking about the matter," said Charley, "let us go to
sleep and be prepared for whatever may occur. I'll sleep with one eye
open, and be ready to rouse you up should there be a chance of our
escaping, only take care that the black fellows do not steal our rifles,
which perhaps they may attempt to do while we sleep, although they
evidently look upon them with awe, or they would have taken them from us
before."
Following Charley's advice, we placed our guns by our sides, between us,
with our hands upon them, so that we should be awakened should any one
try to draw them away. I at length fell asleep, but I was continually
fancying that something was going to occur; the camp, however, remained
perfectly quiet, the only sounds heard within it being the snoring of
the sleepers, and occasionally the shouts of the sentries as they called
to each other.
Next morning at daybreak the whole camp was roused up by King Sanga
Tanga, and the cooks set to work to dress the plantains which they had
brought with them, and the elephant-meat which they had captured. A
liberal portion was brought to us in a basket, but as the meat was
already tainted, we preferred breakfasting on the plantains sprinkled
with red pepper. We observed a dozen men or more with drawn swords
standing near us as a guard to prevent our escape, though we were in no
way molested. We looked about for Aboh, but he was nowhere to be seen,
and without his aid we could not hope to make the king understand our
wishes. I began to be afraid that he must have been removed from us,
and carried away with the men of his village into slavery, or perhaps
put to death.
"I don't think there's a chance of their killing him or any of the
prisoners, when they can, by sending them down to the coast, obtain a
good price for them," observed Charley. "If the king wants to make use
of us, he will not wish to deprive us of our interpreter."
The king now shouted out to his followers, and they began to make
preparations for the march, still Aboh did not appear. The farther off
we got from King Quagomolo's village, the less chance we should have, we
thought, of recovering our property and getting Tom to rejoin us.
Charley, therefore, eagerly addressed the king, who passed near where we
were sitting, and tried to make him understand by signs what we wanted.
He scratched his head, but evidently did not understand either our signs
or words. At last he spoke to one of his attendants, who hurried off
and soon returned with Aboh, dragging him along by a rope fastened round
his wrists. Poor Aboh looked very downcast. "What's the matter?" asked
Charley.
"Me try run 'way, and king bind him hands with odder prisoners."
"I'm sorry to hear that," said Charley, "it would have been better not
to have attempted it. Now, we want you to ask the king to let us go
back and get our knapsacks, and our companion and we will faithfully
return to him as soon as we have done so."
"Me tinkee king no trust him," answered Aboh.
"What! not trust an officer in the navy, and two other English
gentlemen," exclaimed Charley indignantly. "Tell him then, that one of
us will remain with him, while the other two, with a sufficient guard,
go back, and say that we will return as soon as possible."
"But 'spose King Quagomolo no let go," suggested Aboh.
"Then let King Sanga Tanga say, that if we are detained, he will march a
large army to liberate us."
Aboh fully understood our wishes. He forthwith held a long palaver with
the king. The result was more satisfactory even than we had expected.
He consented to send back Charley and me with twenty men as a guard,
keeping Harry as a hostage, allowing Aboh to accompany us, under the
promise, however, of returning.
Thanking the king for agreeing to our proposal we begged that we might
set out immediately.
"Good-bye," said Harry, "I wish that we could have all gone together,
but I know you will come back for me, and I do not see how it otherwise
could have been arranged."
We forthwith commenced our march. The party was under the command of
Prince Ombay, the king's son, a good-natured, merry fellow, with whom
Aboh seemed on very good terms. Charley and I were by this time well
immured to fatigue, and our companions lightly clad were able to perform
long distances each day. We met with no very interesting adventures,
although I shot a deer, and Charley was fortunate enough to kill a
buffalo which afforded a supply of meat to our companions, and raised us
greatly in their estimation. At length we reached the neighbourhood of
King Quagomolo's village, when Prince Ombay proposed encamping, and
allowing Charley and me with Aboh to go forward and complete our
negotiations with King Quagomolo.
We had done our best to impress upon Aboh that he must not attempt any
act of treachery, and that everything must be carried on in a peaceable
manner: to this he agreed, and we hoped that we could trust him. When
we entered the village the people gazed at us in astonishment. Aboh did
not think fit to enlighten them as to the cause of our return. We went
straight to the residence of the king.
"There he is," exclaimed Charley, as we approached the house, and we
found him sleeping in the shade of the rude veranda in front of it. As
we were anxious to ascertain how it fared with Tom, leaving the king to
finish his nap, we hurried off to our own house. Tom saw us and
hastened out to greet us.
"I had given you up for lost, gentlemen, it does my heart good to see
you. What has become of Mr Harry?" he asked.
We told him in a few words the object of our visit. "I think the
chances are the king will listen to you," he answered; "he came back
very much out of spirits at being taken by surprise, and at the loss of
so many of his people. I don't think he has any stomach for a war with
the other black king."
This was satisfactory. Accompanied by Tom we went back to Quagomolo's
house. His majesty was rubbing his eyes and stretching himself after
his nap. He looked greatly astonished at seeing us stand before him.
"Now tell him what we want," said Charley to Aboh; "just hint that if he
doesn't agree to King Sanga Tanga's demands he may expect to have his
plantain groves cut down, and his village burned, and himself and his
people carried off and sold to the slave traders."
"Berry good reason for not saying No," observed Aboh.
He forthwith addressed the king in due form. His majesty scratched his
head and sides and all parts of his body with much vehemence--a sign of
great agitation within, if not irritation without, and replied in a long
speech.
Aboh briefly translated it.
"Him no want fight, him say go when you like, but him ask before you
away."
"Tell the king we are very much obliged to him for so readily yielding
to our request, and we will certainly give him a present, and if we get
safe home we will send him another, as our means at present are
limited."
Whether Aboh understood this or not, I am not sure, but whatever he said
made the king's countenance brighten up. As we wished to rejoin Prince
Ombay as soon as possible, and put him out of suspense, we begged Tom to
get ready to march at once. Returning to our house, we took out four
necklaces of beads, one as a present from each of us, and also some
knives and trinkets which we presented to his majesty, telling Aboh to
thank him again for the kind way in which he had treated us, though he
had as a mark of his favour detained us longer than we desired.
We then, shouldering our packs, and taking our rifles in our hands, bade
the king good-bye, and saluting the people as we passed through the
streets of the village, hastened to the spot where we had left Prince
Ombay and his party. No one had discovered them, and as he thought it
prudent not to remain longer than necessary in the neighbourhood, we
immediately commenced our march to the north-east. Our success had been
far greater than we expected. Our bold bearing and the authoritative
tone we had used, had, no doubt, considerable influence in inducing the
black king to yield to our demands.
Prince Ombay was in high spirits at seeing us, and gave a hearty welcome
to Tom. He proposed immediately to set out for his father's town.
"We shall now conquer all our enemies; we shall succeed in all we
undertake; with four good guns what enemy can stand against us? The
wild beasts in the forest must succumb, we shall have game in plenty,
and food. What feasts we shall enjoy, what bowls of palm-wine."
It was very evident from this that although the prince wished to treat
us kindly, he fully intended to keep us well employed in his father's
service. By this time we had picked up a good many words of the
language of the people, and Aboh had also greatly improved in English,
so that we were much better able to understand what was said. Prince
Ombay was constantly describing to us the curious creatures of the
country, and among others he mentioned some huge apes which he said were
like wild men, and built houses for themselves in the trees, and were
almost as big as men.
When I expressed doubt on the subject, Ombay said he would show us the
houses, and the apes also. He called the animal "Nshiego." They did
not live in tribes, but generally in pairs, and that the male built a
house for himself, and the female for herself, close on a neighbouring
tree.
Next day as we were travelling along, through a thick part of the
forest, we came upon some shrubs bearing a pretty sort of wild berry.
Prince Ombay at once said we should find some Nshiegoes not far off. By
going a short distance from the travelling path, he pointed out what
looked like a huge umbrella fixed on a large bough, about twenty feet
from the ground, and close to it another of similar character, both the
trees being so far removed from each other that the boughs did not
touch.
"There are the houses," said the Prince. "But the Nshiegoes have either
gone out hunting, or hearing us coming have hidden themselves, you see
what wise fellows they are. No leopard or other savage beast can get up
to them, nor could a serpent climb the trunk of that tree, as it is too
large to be encircled by its body, while no boughs can fall from any
neighbouring tree on their heads."
Charley, who was very anxious to examine the roof, managed to throw some
stout vines over the bough, above which it was placed, by this means we
climbed up. No human beings could have made the roof more neatly. It
was constructed of thick leafy branches, secured together by vines, so
formed that it was capable of completely throwing off the rain. Ombay
told us that the male is the actual builder, while the female gathers
the boughs and vines, and brings them to him; and that he builds her
nest as well as his own.
As we were soon after this to pitch our camp, Ombay promised to show us
some of these apes at home. We gladly accepted his offer. As soon as
we had pitched our camp and had had supper, Charley and I with Aboh
accompanied Ombay and two of his best hunters, set off, and after going
a short distance in the woods, they told us if we would remain quiet, we
should certainly see a couple of Nshiegoes under their nests in two
trees close at hand. We kept perfectly quiet, scarcely daring to
breathe for nearly an hour, it seemed much longer, when out of the
forest came a creature which in the gloom looked almost as big as a man;
presently it began to cry out "hew, hew," when another creature appeared
of the same description. The first of these climbed up into one of the
trees, where he sat with an arm clasped round the stem, while his feet
rested on the lower branch, and his head reached quite up into the dome
of the roof, so that it served as a night cap at the same time. The
other Nshiego followed his example, and got into her abode, when, after
exchanging a few cries, which seemed as if they were wishing good-night
to each other, they both went to sleep. It seemed barbarous to
interrupt so much domestic felicity, but the natives would have thought
very little of us if we had not killed the Nshiegoes.
Accordingly Charley taking one, and I the other, we both fired, and both
the animals fell at the same time, and the blacks taking them up,
carried them back to the camp, where, by the light of the fire, we had
an opportunity of examining them. We found them just about four feet
high, with black skins. The back and shoulders had black hair two or
three inches long, while the rest of the body was covered with short,
thin, bluish hair, the top of the head being completely bald, the nose
was flat, and ears remarkably large; the chin was somewhat round, some
thin short hairs growing on it. As soon as we had done examining the
creatures, our black escort cut them up, although, I must have been very
hard pressed before I would have eaten any of the flesh.
"You think those big apes," observed Ombay, as we were marching along.
"If we keep a look-out, we may see some much larger. I must warn you if
you do see them to keep out of their way, for they can kill a man in a
moment."
As our escort were in no hurry, having once reached their own country,
we made but short journeys each day. Having hurried over our supper, we
set out as we had done the previous evening. Charley advised that we
should try and kill as much game as possible, to please our black
companions, as well as to supply ourselves with food. I had kept on the
extreme right of the party, Charley on the left, and Tom in the centre,
so that we could communicate with each other. We had gone a mile or so
from the camp, when I caught sight of a beautiful little deer bounding
away up a glade. I followed without calling to my companions, expecting
almost immediately to come up with it. It went trotting on, and
feeding, and then bounding away in a playful manner, just keeping beyond
the range of my gun. Now I lost sight of it, but soon again saw it
before me. Thus I was led on further than I should have wished. How
many turns I had made, I could not tell but I fancied that I had gone in
a straight line. After all, just as I was about to fire, the deer took
flight, either at me, or something else, and bounded away.
Much disappointed, I turned to rejoin my companions. Before long,
however, I made the pleasing discovery that I had lost myself. I
listened, expecting to hear their shouts, but no sound reached my ears.
I had gone on, some way thinking that it was in the direction where I
was most likely to find my friends, when I heard voices in the distance
coming through the forest I at once endeavoured to make my way towards
the spot from whence they appeared to proceed. As I advanced they
sounded more strange. I kept on cautiously. They might be savages of a
different tribe, for Ombay had told me of many strange people inhabiting
that region. The shades of evening were already coming on. I caught
the glimmer of a fire in an open glade before me, and what was my
surprise on pushing aside the boughs, to see two enormous apes seated on
the ground, and a couple of young ones near them.
One seated in a sort of arbour, formed by the thick foliage above the
roots of the tree, appeared to be a patriarch, while just outside sat
his wife caressing the youngest one, while in the front of her lay the
other, warming himself before the fire. I could see the two adults were
enormous creatures, as large--they appeared to me--as any ordinary human
being, with huge chests and long arms. Had there been but one alone I
should have felt very nervous lest he should attack me, but what would
be my fate were both the creatures, aided by their infant progeny, to
set upon me. I feared almost to breathe lest I should be discovered.
Should I tread on a rotten branch, or brush by a bough too roughly, the
noise might attract them, and they might come in chase of me. Before
moving I examined my gun to see that it was ready for instant use. My
hope was that I might kill one of the terrible creatures and so frighten
the others and obtain time to reload. Even the young ones were no
contemptible opponents, should they fly at my legs or seize me by the
arms while I was engaged with their parents. This, however, they were
not likely to do unless endowed with more sagacity than the ape tribe
are generally supposed to possess. Still if their wisdom was in
proportion to their size, they might attack me in a way which would give
me very little chance of escaping in spite of my gun. I, however, felt
much more confidence with that in my hand than I should have done
without it. Never did thief creep away more carefully out of a house
than did I from the bower of those terrific apes. I had not believed
that such enormous creatures existed. Night was rapidly coming on, for
what I could tell there might be others in the neighbourhood. To spend
a night by myself in those wilds was anything but pleasant to
contemplate. As soon as I could venture to move fast, without the risk
of being heard by the huge apes, I retreated rapidly. I was not aware
at the time that I had fallen in with a family of the largest existing
specimens of the ape tribe since known as the terrible gorilla, although
at that time I was ignorant of its name. I was only too soon to become
in a terrible way better acquainted with the creature.
As I have described I was endeavouring to get as far off as possible
from the fearful monsters, when the sun having set, it became almost
immediately dark. The thick foliage overhead hid the stars from my
sight so that I could not tell in what direction I was going, whether to
the north or south, and although I occasionally got a glimpse of one
amid the boughs, it could not thus seen serve as a guide to me. I
pictured to myself the danger of thus wandering through the forest by
myself, for although I might grope my way amid the trees, yet I might be
pursued by a leopard or lion, or I might tread on some venomous snake or
get into the presence unexpectedly of a herd of elephants. For some
time I was afraid of shouting or firing my rifle, lest I might attract
the attention of those monster apes. At length, thinking I had got
sufficiently far off not to bring them down upon me, and that I might
after all be in the neighbourhood of my friends, I began to exercise my
lungs. After I had shouted several times, I fancied that I heard an
answer, but still could not be certain that the cries which reached my
ears were not uttered by the monster apes or some other creatures. Then
I fired off my gun. Forthwith there came a loud chattering and
shrieking from out of the forest, uttered by troops of monkeys and
flights of parrots. I was afraid if I fired often I might exhaust my
stock of powder, which I should require for my defence if attacked
either by huge apes or four-footed monsters.
Finding no answer to any of my signals, I judged that I had got a long
way off from my friends; I therefore thought it prudent at once to climb
a tree, hoping not to find it occupied by any arboreous ape or other
creature. I therefore threw a vine over one of the lower boughs, by
which means I was able to climb onto the branch. I then drew up the
vine, so that I might be tolerably secure. There was still sufficient
light from the sky to enable me to find my way to a part of the tree
where several boughs branched off; here I could lie down with my gun by
my side, without any fear of falling to the ground. Before going to
sleep, however, I thought it would be as well to give another shout,
hoping that, perhaps, from my lofty position, my voice would reach my
friends. I listened for an answer. Silence reigned through the forest,
broken now and then by a roar so terrific, so superhuman, that I
involuntarily trembled. It was not like that of a wild beast, nor of
that proceeding from any human throat. It seemed to come from a spot at
no great distance off. What if the creature should discover me and be
able to climb the tree in which I had taken shelter! What hope would
there be for me then? I regretted having shouted; it would have been
more prudent had I kept silence. I could only pray that the creature
might not find me out, if creature it was. I did not believe that evil
spirits in bodily form walked the earth, or I might have supposed that
the voice I heard was that of one, so awe-inspiring was it. I now
peered down from among the boughs towards the ground near the trunk of
the tree, dreading every instant to see the creature approach.
At length I saw a dark form moving along, but it went on all fours.
Could it be the creature that had uttered the sound? Presently it
approached a small tree and then reared itself, and I saw what looked
like a man of gigantic form, with a huge head, and prodigiously long
arms, holding on to the tree. He seemed to look about him as if to
examine the surrounding trees; should he discover me, he evidently could
with ease climb the tree on which I sat. I was afraid of moving, and
yet I felt convinced that he might, with his sharp eyes, discover me
looking through the boughs at him. I fortunately had the muzzle of my
gun turned towards him, and could at any moment bring the butt to my
shoulder. I could not expect to get a better mark than he now presented
to me, but then, so human looked the creature, seen through the gloom of
night, that I asked myself whether I was justified in shooting him.
While these thoughts were passing through my mind, he let go the stem of
the tree, and once more sank down, moving forward as before on his hands
and feet. At first I thought he was coming up my tree. To my relief he
turned aside, apparently satisfied that the being which had uttered the,
to him, strange sounds, was not concealed among its branches. I
breathed more freely. I was thankful that I had not fired, for I might
only have wounded the creature, and he would then, inspired by rage,
have climbed the tree to attack me. I waited, watching for an hour or
more; at length, finding sleep overcoming me, I replaced my gun by my
side, and stretched myself almost at my length, for which there was
ample room. My eyes closed, possibly I might have been surprised by
apes, snakes, or any other tree-climbing creatures without having time
to rouse myself sufficiently to offer the slightest resistance, so sound
was my sleep; and yet it was not untroubled, for all night long that
fearful cry occasionally rang in my ears, and I heard other shrieks and
noises. Whether they were really uttered by the denizen of the forest,
or created by my imagination, is more than I can possibly say.
CHAPTER ELEVEN.
I TRAVEL NORTH-EAST--BREAKFAST--A STRANGE SUPPER COMPANION--ANOTHER
DAY'S JOURNEY--MEET SOME GIRLS--THE PRINCESS CARRIED OFF BY AN APE--I
SHOOT HIM--TRIUMPHANT PROCESSION TO THE VILLAGE--THE MAIDEN'S SONG
ALARMS ME--AM THANKED BY THE KING--THE KING'S WEAVERS--MY FRIENDS
RETURN--WE ARE MOST HANDSOMELY TREATED--THE PRINCESS AND HER
GRANDFATHER--MY ALARM ONLY TOO WELL FOUNDED--CHARLEY COMES TO THE
RESCUE--DISCUSS OUR PROSPECTS.
A bright light streamed into my eyes--it was the sun, just rising,
sending his rays darting through the boughs. I felt very unwilling to
get up, and when I began to move I discovered that my limbs were
somewhat stiff from the hardness of my couch. At length I rose, and,
kneeling down, thanked Heaven for the protection which had been afforded
me. I now began to feel the sensations of hunger. I hoped, however,
that I might be able to find something with which to satisfy my
appetite, and enable me to continue my search for my friends. It was
important to lose no time; I accordingly descended, letting myself down
by the vine. I could now, guided by the sun, steer a tolerably straight
course. I judged that if I proceeded to the north-east I should in
time, though I might miss my travelling companions, at all events reach
King Sanga Tanga's village. I looked about me, half expecting to see
the monster who had passed by in the evening, walk out from behind some
thick bushes which grew around. I stood close to the very tree by which
I had seen the creature supporting itself, and although I hoped that it
had gone on to a distance, I felt a disinclination to camp at that spot.
I had, fortunately, some matches and a tinder-box in my pocket, so that
I could light a fire as soon as I had something to cook at it. I had
not gone far when a chorus of loud screams announced the approach of a
flock of grey parrots, which were issuing forth from their
resting-places in search of berries and nuts. Crouching down behind a
bush, I allowed them to come so close to me that I shot a couple, and
knocked down a third with the barrel of my gun before it had time to fly
off. Slinging them over my shoulder, I trudged on until I came to the
bank of a small stream. Going along it I found an open spot, in the
centre of which I could kindle a fire without the risk of setting light
to the neighbouring trees. I quickly had two of my parrots plucked, and
by means of the usual wooden spit, soon had them roasting. Before
sitting down, I looked carefully around to ascertain that no monster ape
was near, likely to invite himself to the repast. I must own it, I was
seized with a sort of horror of the monster apes, and as I went along I
could not help every now and then looking over my shoulder, expecting to
see one following. I dreaded the thought of an encounter with one of
the creatures far more than I did with a leopard or lion. I hurried
over my breakfast, and having taken a good draught from the bright
stream, filled up my water bottle, and stowed a portion of the cooked
parrot in my wallet that I might not be delayed by having to cook a
mid-day meal, I pushed on. The forest in many places was more open than
I expected to find it, and I made good progress.
I did not wish to expend my ammunition by firing signals, but I
occasionally shouted at the top of my voice, hoping that my friends
would hear me. I was disappointed, however, and another evening found
me still in the forest. I was certain, by the course of the sun, which
I had carefully noted, that I had kept a tolerably correct course, and I
calculated that by the end of a couple of days at most, I should reach
King Sanga Tanga's town. My chief regret was, that my non-appearance
would cause anxiety, and that Charley and Harry would be delayed in
searching for me--still that could not be helped. Had I gone in any
other direction, I might naturally have lost my way, whereas I now felt
sure that they must ultimately come up with me. I have not described
the various animals I met with. Now and then a buffalo passed at a
distance, and several species of antelopes. Once I saw a leopard
stealing by, but he did not see me, having some other game in view.
There were also hyenas, but I had no reason to be afraid of them, as
they seldom attack a human being unless they find them asleep. There
were numerous small monkeys, as well as big apes of several species.
The most curious monkey was a small frolicsome little animal which,
whenever seen, indicated that water was not far off, as they have an
especial fondness for water. They are great friends with a pretty bird,
which is constantly found in their company. They are often seen playing
together, whether it is that they are attracted by the same object, or
really have a mutual affection, I am unable positively to determine.
The country teeming with animal life, and producing numerous berries as
well as large fruits, I had no fear of suffering from hunger, provided
my stock of ammunition should hold out. Without it, in the midst of
abundance, I might have starved. Although I determined, as on the
previous night, to sleep up a tree; I lit a big fire, at which I could
cook my supper, on the ground near at hand. While the birds were
roasting, I threw a vine over the bough, by climbing up which I could
gain a place of safety. The birds I had shot being cooked, I was
discussing my supper, washing it down with draughts from my water
battle, when looking up, I saw the shadow of a creature moving some
fifty yards off; a second glance convinced me that it was a leopard.
The fire kept him at bay, but he stood gazing at me, and probably
scenting the odour of the roasted birds from afar. I saw him creep
nearer and nearer. I might have shot him, but might have missed, so
considering discretion the better part of valour, I caught hold of one
of the birds by the leg, and holding it in my mouth, I swarmed up to the
bough, where I was in perfect safety. I had before this fixed on a spot
where I could rest for the night, and at once made my way to it,
intending to start at daybreak the next morning. However, I could not
resist the temptation of watching the leopard. He walked round and
round my fire, but as long as it blazed up was afraid of approaching.
As, however, the flames sank down, and only the bright embers remained,
he made a dash at the portion of the birds I had left behind, and
gobbled them up in a moment. I then threw him the bones of the one
which I had been gnawing. He looked up very much surprised, wondering
where it came from. I was greatly inclined to shoot him, but there was
no object in doing so, as I should very likely only have wounded him,
and sent him off to die miserably. At last, finding there was nothing
more to be got, and possibly forgetting all about me, the leopard took
his departure. I slept as soundly up the tree as I did the previous
night, and coming down in the morning, immediately pushed forward in the
direction I had before been travelling. I was able to make good some
eight or ten miles before the air had become heated with the sun.
Another day passed so like the former, that I could scarcely distinguish
one from the other. Another evening was coming on. I fully expected by
this time to have reached my destination, but I had met with no
plantations, or any other sign to show that I was approaching an
inhabited spot, I therefore supposed that I must be still some way off.
I was travelling along when I heard the sound of voices--they were those
of females, several with baskets on their heads, while others were
busily employed in plucking wild fruits, which grew in abundance in an
open glade in the forest. Some thick bushes sheltered me from view. I
was thankful to see them, as I hoped that they belonged to the village
of Sanga Tanga, and that my long solitary journey was now nearly over.
Still I thought that should I appear among them suddenly I might alarm
them--I was, therefore, determined to remain concealed, and to follow
them when they should return homeward, being sure that they would lead
me, if not to the village of which I was in search, to another where I
might hope to be well received. The girls were all scattered about,
plucking the fruit from the bushes, when I heard a fearful scream, and
looking in the direction from whence it came, I saw one of those
dreadful monsters which had for days haunted my imagination, approaching
two of the girls. The creature was too far off to allow me to fire with
a certainty of killing him, and should I merely wound him, I should
probably only make him more savage; I therefore crept forward as rapidly
as I could, hoping to get close enough to shoot him before he could
seize either of the girls. One, overcome by terror, seemed scarcely
able to fly, or make an effort to escape, the others fled shrieking
away. Before I could get sufficiently close to make sure of my aim, the
hideous monster seized the hapless girl round the waist with one of his
long arms, and immediately began to make his way towards a neighbouring
tree. I dashed forward. Should he once get to my height up the
branches, nothing could save the girl, for even should I shoot him she
might be killed by the fall. I knew that by firing I ran the risk of
shooting her, but that risk must be run, her death was certain should he
escape with her. He had reached the first branch of a tree, scarcely
more than twelve feet from the ground, when I brought my rifle to bear
on him, I fired, aiming at his breast. As the bullet struck him he
uttered a terrific roar; but at the same moment opening his left arm,
which had encircled the girl, he let her fall, fortunately on a bed of
leaves. She was senseless. I was afraid that the monster would fall
upon her, and if so in his struggles he might tear her with his teeth
and claws, but he held fast to the bough, roaring loudly and striking
his breast. Under other circumstances I think that I should have put a
considerable distance between myself and the beast, but the life of a
fellow-creature was at stake. Summoning all the coolness I could
command, I reloaded and then shouted to the other girls to come back and
take their companion away. They all seemed to dread approaching the
monster. I was afraid that, should I go under the bough, he might
spring on me, and that the only safe mode of proceeding was to keep him
covered by my rifle, so that, should he make any movement, I might again
shoot. Presently I saw him swaying backwards and forwards as if his
strength was leaving him; still he growled as fiercely as before. I
moved slightly, so as to get a better aim at him. He thought, perhaps,
that I was about to fly, for he stepped onto another bough.
Now was my opportunity; I fired, and down he came with a crash, breaking
away several rotten boughs, until he reached a quantity of dead wood,
where he struggled in vain to rise. Having reloaded, I dashed forward,
and, lifting the girl in my arms, bore her towards a party of her
friends, who had stopped, gazing horror-stricken at what was taking
place. They received her with loud cries of grief, supposing her to be
dead. She, in a short time, began to breathe, and, opening her eyes,
gazed round with a scared and terrified look, then she clung to her
companion, shrieking out, as she caught sight of me standing by--"Save
me, save me!" Apparently she for a moment supposed that I was the being
who had carried her off. Her friends, however, were apparently doing
their best to reassure her; and at length, pointing to me, they made her
understand that I was the person who had saved her from the grasp of the
monster ape, which they pointed out lying dead beneath the tree. They
then all came round me, and I had no doubt from the signs they made and
their looks, that they were expressing their gratitude for the service I
had rendered them in saving the young girl.
I tried in return to make them understand how glad I was that I had done
so. I was now able more particularly to remark the appearance of the
damsel. She was young, and for a negress remarkably pretty. As she
recovered she took my hand and placed it, on her head as a sign, I
supposed, that she was much obliged to me for saving her. I tried to
make out whether the girls belonged to King Sanga Tanga's village. When
I mentioned his name they all clapped their hands and pointed to the
girl whom they called Iguma. In consequence of this action I began to
hope that she was in some way related to him, perhaps his daughter, in
which case my friends and I were likely to be better treated than we
could otherwise have expected.
As far as I could judge from the signs the girls made, I understood that
the village was not far off. Having picked up the baskets and refilled
them with the fruit which had been strewn on the ground, they prepared
to return. Four of them carried Iguma, who placed her arms round the
necks of two, while the others supported her legs. Before setting off I
was anxious to secure the skin of the huge ape--if ape it was, for it
looked to me, as it lay stretched on the ground, more like some savage
human being of the forest. I pointed it out to the girls, who, I
believe, fancied that the creature had made its escape into the wood.
As soon as they saw it and knew from the signs I made that it was dead,
they began to advance cautiously in the direction where it lay. I went
first, with my knife drawn ready to flay it. They now crept forward,
two or three of the bolder ones in front of the rest, when they would
stop and gaze at the creature, talking to each other, even now
apparently having some doubt whether it was dead or not. Then, as I got
nearer to it and at last gave it a kick or two with my foot, they came
crowding around with more confidence, crying out loudly and chattering
away to each other. I was about to begin to flay it when it struck me
that they would perhaps be unwilling to carry the skin, and I certainly
had no wish to bear it on my own shoulders all the way to the village,
even although the distance might not be great. I tried to make them
understand that if they would send some young men I should be very much
obliged. They, after a little time, took in my meaning, and two of
them, handing their baskets to their companions, set off running.
As I was not particularly anxious to skin the creature myself,
remembering that if I did so I should not be in a very fit state to be
presented to the king and the inhabitants of the village, I accepted the
invitation of the girls to accompany them at once.
Leaving the dead ape to any fate which might befall it, I set off with
my new friends, who now surrounding me, formed themselves into a sort of
triumphal procession. First went Iguma and her supporters, then
followed four of my attendants, then I came with two on either hand, the
rest bringing up the rear, all shouting and singing impromptu verses in
praise of me, for I could tell by certain words that such was the case.
The words were to this effect--
"The king's daughter with her maidens went out to pick berries, then
came a huge ape, and they fled with fright. The monster seized the
maiden, the pride of her father's heart, and bore her off to a cruel
death. Already he had reached a tree, the cries of her companions
availed her not. In another moment she would have been beyond our
reach, when a pale-faced stranger appeared with a wonderful thunder
maker in his hand. He made thunder, and the ape, huge as it was, fell
dead at his feet. The beautiful Iguma was saved. He who had saved her
has won our hearts, we will do him honour, we will do all he asks of us.
The king will rejoice, he will weep with joy over his child, and he
will give her to the young stranger as a reward. He will become our
prince and live with us, and lead our young men to battle. We will
serve him gladly."
As the meaning of these last expressions dawned upon me, I began to feel
somewhat uncomfortable. I was very happy to have saved the young lady,
but had no wish whatever to become the husband of a black beauty,
however charming she might be in the eyes of her countrymen. I was
puzzled to think how I might get out of the difficulty without offending
her or her father, or her female companions, who had so unreservedly
bestowed her on me without being asked. I could only hope that the
maidens were indulging in poetical licence, and that they did not really
mean that I should marry their mistress. At all events, I determined to
put the best face on the matter I could, hoping that they might not
insist on the event coming off immediately.
At last I caught sight of some magnificent palm trees, rising in the
midst of a number of houses. In a short time we entered a broad street
which led into the square, and in the middle were the palm trees I had
just before observed. It struck me as an exceedingly picturesque place,
and very neat. On each side of the square two other streets branched
off. Every house had a veranda in front of it, and an open space
between it and the road. I should have said as we approached we met a
party of young men running at full speed, who, after exchanging a few
words with the girls, hastened on in the direction whence we had come.
On entering the town we saw a number of persons approaching, several
playing on tom-toms and various musical instruments, and others shouting
and singing. In their midst talked their king in full costume, which I
suspect he had put on in a hurry, for his head dress was rather awry.
Coming forward, he embraced his daughter, tears falling from his eyes as
a mark of his paternal affection; then he came up to me, and saluted me
in the same fashion, a ceremony I would gladly have avoided. He then
poured out expressions which I took to signify how deeply grateful he
was to me for saving his daughter from the huge ape. He then asked me
what had become of my companions, and how it was that I was there all
alone. I may have been wrong, but this, I believe, was what he said to
me. I tried to explain by signs rather than words, how I had been
separated from them while out hunting, that I had looked for them in
vain, and then made my way towards his village, where I fortunately
arrived in time to do the happy deed which I trusted would guild my
humble name in the eyes of his majesty and his subjects. I do not know
whether the king understood what I said, but as I put my hand to my
heart and looked very much pleased, I was sure that he understood, at
all events, that I wished to say something civil. From what I heard the
girls say, I confess that I was somewhat afraid that his majesty would
propose bestowing his daughter on me at once, and was greatly relieved
when I found he had not in any way alluded to the subject. Having seen
her carried into one of the huts by her attendants, the king took my
hand and led me towards another hut on the opposite side of the square.
It was a very well-constructed building, of fair size and height and
look, remarkably neat and clean. Behind it was a plantain grove; a
garden with lime and other trees, and shrubs of beautiful foliage, with
an enclosure in which were a number of goats and fowls.
Many of the inhabitants were clothed in robes of bongo, a species of
cloth made from the delicate cuticle of palm leaflets, which are
stripped off and ornamented with feathers. These are woven very neatly,
many of them are striped, and some made even with check pattern. The
pieces of cloth are then stitched together in a regular way with
needles, also manufactured by the natives. I saw in the town a number
of men sitting at looms in the middle of a hut with a wood fire burning
near them. The weavers were smoking their long pipes, the bowls of
which rested on the ground, and shouting to each other as they worked
merrily away. Some of the king's attendants brought in cushions and
mats, which they placed on the floor. He then, begging me to be seated,
placed himself by my side, and tried to enter into conversation, but I
must confess that I had great difficulty in making out what he said I
tried, however, to look very wise, lest his majesty might lose patience,
for there was something in his countenance which showed me that he might
be apt to do so, as is often the case with persons who have been
accustomed to have their own way.
We were still carrying on this somewhat unintelligible conversation,
when loud shouts were heard, and the king and I going to the door of the
hut saw the young men who had been sent to bring in the dead ape, four
carrying the skin, with the head stuck on a pole, and the arms stretched
out, and the rest bearing the body, cut up into portions. From the way
the king licked his lips, I suspected that he intended to enjoy a feast
on the flesh of the beast. I should as soon thought of eating a human
being, so human did it look in many respects. They halted before us,
and asked what they were to do with it. I, in reply, merely claimed the
skin, at which they appeared well satisfied, and marched off with the
remainder to the king's house at the other side of the square. I hoped,
by hanging up the skin, we might be able to clean it, and preserve it
sufficiently to carry it with us to the coast, for I was sure that
otherwise no one would believe that so enormous an ape existed. I
managed to make the king understand what I wanted, and he, with several
other persons whom he summoned, assisted me in hanging it up to a branch
of a tree, my intention being to light a fire under it, and try to cure
it by smoking. I was thus employed when I heard several shots. The
king and his attendants rushed out to the front of the house, and I
followed. They were evidently in a state of agitation, wondering what
the shots could mean. Presently we heard shouts. In a short time a
number of persons appeared at the further end of the town. As they drew
near, to my great joy I recognised Charley and Harry with Tom Tubbs and
Aboh, accompanied by Prince Ombay. On seeing me they all hurried
forward, eager to know how I had been separated from them and found my
way to the village. While I briefly narrated my adventures, Prince
Ombay learned how I had rescued his sister. He now came forward and
embraced me, telling me that I was his brother, that we should never
part.
Calling Aboh, I begged him to say everything civil he could think of;
but, at the same time, not to commit me by making any promises on my
part. The king in his generosity would have appropriated a house to
each of us, but we begged that we might be allowed to live together in
the one he had fixed on for me, which was amply large enough for all of
us. We could thus, we agreed, defend ourselves should the feelings of
the people assume any unpleasant change towards us; or we could, if
necessary, better arrange for making our escape should the king take it
into his head to detain us. At present everything appeared at pleasant
as we could desire.
Soon after we had taken possession of the house a number of girls
appeared with baskets of provisions on their heads, and bowls of farina.
There was flesh and fowl and fruits of all descriptions. We told Aboh
that we should be very glad if he would bring us some big bowls of water
in which we could wash our feet, and as he had before seen us perform
that operation, he at once understood what we wanted. Hastening out, he
quickly returned with a large gourd full of cool water, supplied by a
spring which ran from a hill close to the village. We were about to
perform our ablutions, when a damsel appeared carrying a basket of fruit
on her head. She approached accompanied by a white-haired old gentleman
clothed in one of the robes I have described. Looking up I recognised
Iguma. I asked Aboh who the old gentleman was, suspecting that he had
come with some object in view.
"That's her grandfather," he answered, looking very knowing. We, of
course, rose to greet the young lady, and to receive and open the basket
she had brought. The ebon damsel then said something, and stood with
her hands clasped before her. What it was about I, of course, could not
exactly make out, and Aboh did not appear inclined to translate it. Her
venerable grandsire then made a long speech. It was even more
unintelligible to us than were the words which had dropped from Iguma's
lips. At last we were obliged to apply to Aboh for information.
"Him say makee her wife," said Aboh at length. It was certainly a great
abridgment of what had been uttered by the old man, although probably it
contained the pith of the matter.
"Tell him," said Charley, pointing to me, "that I am his elder brother,
that he cannot marry without my leave, and that I consider him far too
young to think about taking upon himself the responsibilities of
matrimony. That he must come home first then, if he gets our parents
permission, that he will come back with chains and beads and
looking-glasses, and ornaments of all sorts for the young lady, and
guns, powder and shot, and a variety of other articles for her papa.
Make this very clear, if you please, for I must have no misunderstanding
on that point."
Aboh, who understood the chief part of what Charley had said,
immediately translated it to the old gentleman, with a good many
additions of his own. Iguma pouted a little at the thought, I suppose,
of having to wait so long, on which I told Aboh to remind her of the
quantity of beads I was to bring when I got our father's leave to marry
a black wife. I must own I had my doubts how far we were justified in
using this deceit, but our position was a difficult one and might become
dangerous, and just then we did not consider the consequences which
might result from the artifice we had resorted to. I tried to make
Iguma understand how much I was obliged to her by eating some of the
food she had brought, and assuring her how very nice I found it. At
last she appeared tolerably well satisfied, and as it was getting late
she and her grandfather took their departure. We were now left alone,
with only Aboh and Shimbo to attend on us.
"Things have turned out much better than I expected, and we are very
jolly here," observed Charley; "but I wonder whether Mr Sanga Tanga
will let us proceed on our journey."
"To my mind I am afraid that, now he has got us, he intends to keep us,"
observed Tom. "These nigger chiefs fancy that white men can do
everything, and as we have arms and ammunition, the king will, I
suspect, take it into his head to try and conquer all the country round
him. King Quagomolo, as he calls himself, is evidently afraid of him,
or he would not have given me and our traps up so easily."
"We, however, must try and get away," observed Harry; "we may be jolly
enough, as Charley says, just now, but we shall soon get weary of the
life."
"We must first try fair means, and endeavour to persuade the king to let
us go home to ask our father to allow Dick to marry Miss Iguma, as I
propose," said Charley; "that appears to me to be the safest plan to
pursue."
"But suppose the king says no, and insists on your brother marrying his
daughter with or without your father's leave, what's to be done then?"
"We must cut and run," I exclaimed; "I should be very sorry to treat the
young lady ill, but if her father insists on my marrying her, I shall
regret having been the means of saving her from the wild man of the
woods. I certainly thought that he would be grateful to me for what I
had done, but I confess that he exhibits his gratitude in a very awkward
manner as far as I am concerned. However, there is no use talking about
the matter any longer, I'm getting very sleepy, and should be glad to
turn in and get a quiet snooze, after spending the last three nights up
trees."
My companions were ready enough to follow my advice, and we all wrapped
ourselves up in the pieces of matting with which our new friends had
supplied us, and went to sleep.
CHAPTER TWELVE.
WE FIND WE ARE NOT TO BE IDLE--A BUFFALO HUNT--TWO GOOD SHOTS--AGAIN AT
THE BUFFALO--A STRANGE STEED AND RIDER--I SHOOT BOTH, AND SAVE OMBAY'S
LIFE--MUCH BEAUTIFUL GAME--A COMMOTION IN THE VILLAGE--OUR SLEEP
DISTURBED--THE APE SKIN DESTROYED BY THE ANTS--TOM'S PLAN OF ESCAPE--
PRINCE OMBAY SEES THROUGH IT--A GRAND HUNT--A NOVEL USE FOR A NET--KILL
THIRTY HEAD OF GAME--WILL TOM TAKE THE PRINCESS OFF MY HANDS--A
DELIGHTFUL SURPRISE--THE MARRIAGE--A NOISY WEDDING BREAKFAST--A
BARBAROUS DANCE--THE NATIVE IDOLS--NATIVE SUPERSTITIONS--WE DETERMINE TO
MAKE OUR ESCAPE.
We were allowed a day to rest after our long journey, and were supplied
with abundance of food, but we soon found that our entertainers had no
intention that we should eat the bread of idleness. Prince Ombay, as we
called him, came to see us early the second morning after our arrival,
and began talking away at a great rate. We nodded our heads to show
that we were listening, but as we could not understand more than every
tenth word he uttered, Charley summoned Aboh.
"Him say go out hunting, kill big beast horns on head."
"I suppose he means buffalo," observed Charley.
"Or deer," suggested Harry.
"Are the animals he speaks of big and hairy, or slight and thin, with
very long horns?" I inquired of Aboh.
Aboh put his thumbs up above his head, and then with his hands described
a fat animal with long hair, and made a bellowing noise.
"Ah, he means buffalo, there is no doubt about that," observed Charley.
"Tell our friend we shall be happy to accompany him, and if he can show
us the buffalo, we will do our best to shoot them."
Ombay, on this answer being interpreted to him, appeared well satisfied.
Taking his departure, he in a short time returned accompanied by about
twenty young men armed with spears and javelins--the prince and a few of
his companions of more exalted rank having hangers, mostly rather the
worse for wear. We got our guns ready, and a sufficient amount of
ammunition for the day, and placing our knapsacks and other valuables
under the charge of Shimbo, who promised that he would allow no one to
steal them; we announced that we were ready to set off. Ombay kept Aboh
by his side, that he might converse with us whenever he pleased. We had
a long march before we stopped to dine, but the party had brought a good
supply of provisions, and we had as much food as we required. We then
again set out, and continued our way until near sunset; when we arrived
at the edge of a wide prairie, bordered by the forest through which we
had passed.
"Here big beast soon come," observed Aboh.
According to the custom of the country, our companions immediately began
to set up screens of branches, behind which we were to take our post.
Harry and I were together, Charley and Tom were stationed behind another
screen, at a little distance off. We had to wait there for some time,
when I heard Aboh, who was with us, whisper something. Presently my
ears caught the sound of the trampling of hoofs, and directly afterwards
I saw by the light of the moon, just then rising, a herd of thirty or
more magnificent animals emerging from the forest, and scattering
themselves widely over the grassy plain in front of us. We were
fortunately to leeward, or our shelter would have availed us nothing.
We had now to wait patiently until some of the herd might make their way
to our screen. How soon they would do this it was impossible to say.
At all events, there was a prospect of our patience being severely
tried. We remained as silent as death. In a short time the buffalo,
who seemed not to apprehend danger, began gambolling and sporting with
each other. As there appeared no chance of their coming close to us,
Ombay made a sign to Harry and me to accompany him, and showed us how we
were to crawl along the grass until we got near enough to have a shot.
We were prepared for this, and gladly undertook to do as he proposed.
Just then the moon was obscured by a cloud, and taking advantage of this
he set out. We followed close behind him, creeping along with our heads
just raised above the grass. We stopped whenever he did, on seeing the
buffalo look towards us. Presently we were close enough to obtain fair
shots. I was afraid, should we attempt to get nearer, that the animals
might take alarm and scamper off. I therefore signed to Harry to shoot
one, while I aimed at another no great distance from us. Without
waiting for a signal from Ombay, we rose to our knees and fired. The
two animals at which we had aimed leapt into the air at the same moment,
and fell over dead. Ombay, who had not expected us to make such
excellent shots, on this shouted with delight. The rest of the herd of
course galloped off, and were soon lost to sight amid the trunks of
trees on the opposite side of the prairie. The hunters on seeing this
rushed out, and instantly began flaying the animals, and cutting them
up.
Each man having loaded himself with as much as he could carry, we
returned to a spot inside the forest, previously chosen by our leader.
Fires were lighted, and our companions were soon making merry over the
buffalo meat. We found it fairly flavoured, but rather tough. Our camp
was formed in the usual manner with lean-to's, beneath which we
sheltered ourselves, and fires in front of them, the smoke of which
contributed to keep off the stinging insects which abounded, and the
bright light was calculated to scare the savage animals of the forest.
We had now become so familiarised to this sort of life, that we thought
nothing of it. Early in the morning Ombay called us up and told us,
through our interpreter, that buffalo were again likely to be feeding in
the prairie, and that we might have a chance of killing two or three
more. Of course we were ready for the sport,--indeed, the more animals
we killed, the more likely we were to propitiate the chief and his son.
We felt all the time that we were prisoners, although not actually in
chains, and that our masters might, at any time, change their conduct
and ill-treat us.
Jumping up from our bed of leaves, we shouldered our guns, and
accompanied by Aboh, we attended the prince and his party--a few of the
men only remaining to look after the camp and buffalo meat. As we were
making our way through the forest, we got somewhat separated from the
chief, of whom we caught a sight just as we were nearing the prairie.
We were hastening to overtake him, when a rending and crashing sound
reached our ears, followed by the most tremendous bellowing I ever
heard. Then came a sharp bark--so it sounded--and a roar such as I had
heard proceeding from the huge man ape I had encountered in the forest.
The next instant a buffalo burst from the cover. To its back was
clinging one of the monster creatures I have just mentioned. It clung
on with its powerful legs and arms with a tenacity against which all the
efforts of the buffalo to free itself were unavailing. Maddened with
terror, on dashed the buffalo, which was making its way directly towards
Ombay, who stood seemingly paralysed by fear or astonishment. No tree
which he could possibly climb up was near at hand. I saw that in a few
seconds the buffalo would be upon him, and that he would be either gored
to death or trampled under foot by it; or that the ape, springing from
its back, might, with its savage jaws and hands, tear him to pieces. I,
for a moment, was doubtful whether to kill the buffalo, or the still
more savage creature which bestrode it. I decided on aiming at the
buffalo; I might stop it in its mad career, and, rolling over it might
crush the creature on its back, or else I might have time to reload
before the ape could reach me. I took good aim, the buffalo's shoulder
was presented to me, I fired, and the huge animal, after bounding
forward three or four yards, came to the ground with a tremendous crash,
catching the leg of the ape beneath it as it rolled over on its back.
Without a moment's loss of time I reloaded, for the ape was not likely
to be much injured. Scarcely had I done so, when the monster, quickly
extricating itself, and catching sight of Prince Ombay, with a terrific
roar, striking its breast, made towards him. In another instant the
young black would have received a blow from its tremendous paws, or have
been seized by the fearful grinders which, giving a savage growl, it
exhibited as it opened its mouth. I could not have imagined a creature
with a more diabolical countenance. Human as it looked, I had no
hesitation in killing it. I fired, and my bullet striking it in the
breast, it fell flat on its face, emitting, as it did so, a hideous
death-cry, half roar, half shriek, which echoed through the forest, and
was repeated, it teemed to me, by others of the same species. Ombay,
who had been fully aware of his danger, quickly recovered, and springing
forward, dealt a blow with his hanger at the neck of the monster, which
nearly severed the head from the body. He then, seeing me advancing,
hastened forward to express his thanks, and I believe that he really was
grateful to me for saving his life, although I fancy he wished to gain
the credit of having killed his assailant himself. The uproar had
frightened away all the other buffaloes, so, with the bodies of the one
I had killed, and the ape, we forthwith returned to the camp to enjoy a
hearty breakfast. The natives cut up the body of the ape, and ate it
with as little compunction as they would have done mutton or beef.
Charley and Harry, who were close behind me when I fired, declared that
they had never seen better shots in their lives. "I felt that much
depended on my taking good aim," I replied. "I was anxious to save the
life of a fellow-creature, besides which, I hope, that by rendering him
a service, we may have a better chance of being allowed to proceed upon
our journey."
I wished that we had had our knapsacks and could have at once set off,
without the pain of taking leave of King Sanga Tanga and the lovely
Iguma.
We told Aboh that we should like to secure the skin of the ape, but he
replied that none of the young men would like the trouble of carrying
it. On our way back we met with several beautiful antelopes, and two or
three kinds of gazelles, which bounded away before we could get near
enough to obtain a shot at them. There was one of a bright orange
colour with a chestnut patch between the horns and eyes, below which was
a white crescent-shaped mark, while its body was completely covered with
stripes from head to tail, of a lighter colour than the rest of the
skin.
Although somewhat heavily built, it was graceful in its motions and
exceedingly swift of foot, so that in little more than a minute the herd
near to which we had got bounded out of sight. We saw two leopards, but
they took good care not to come near us, they were certainly upwards of
five feet in length. Tiger-cats, some of unusual size, abounded, and
would have been dangerous to encounter unarmed. Charley shot an iguana,
which, ugly as it looked, afforded us a pleasanter meal than the buffalo
meat. As to the monkeys, they were innumerable.
On passing over a stream we caught sight of several beautiful little
monkeys, not bigger than rats, frisking about among the boughs just as
we had seen them on a previous occasion. Near them were some birds,
which kept hopping to and fro on the same branches, apparently on the
most intimate terms with these diminutive quadrumana. By putting up
screens and waiting patiently, we managed to kill several antelopes and
other animals, so that we returned to the village laden with meat. On
entering, we found the inhabitants in a state of commotion in
consequence of the arrival of a person of importance, who was then said
to be having an audience with the king, but who he was, or what he had
come about, we could not learn. By this time we had expended all our
ammunition, and we hastened to our house to replenish our stock, in
case, by any chance, we might have to use our arms. We felt that our
position was critical, for at any moment our capricious masters might
turn upon us, and we might have to fight for our lives. We had cause,
however, to be grateful to Heaven for our preservation, and for the many
dangers we had gone through safely, as also that we had been enabled to
retain our health, which, in spite of the heat and fatigue we endured,
was excellent. I suspect, however, that had we not been well supplied
with wholesome food and pure water, the case would have been different.
On arriving at our house, we found Shimbo keeping faithful watch and
ward over our property. By his account more than one attempt had been
made to steal it, but he had driven away the thieves, so he said, by
presenting a stick at them, which they mistook for one of our guns. He
could give us no information as to the visitor, nor could Aboh, who went
out, learn more than his brother. There was some mystery about the
matter, that was certain. We were tired and glad to take the supper
which was brought to us already cooked, and consisted of plantains
dressed in a variety of ways, and venison, one dish roasted and another
stewed in lemon juice. Very excellent both were.
Rolling ourselves in our mats, we went to sleep. We had not closed our
eyes long when I heard Charley, who was close to the door, cry out
lustily. At the same instant I felt myself bitten by numberless
creatures crawling over me. Harry and Tom were treated in the same
manner. We all sprang to our feet, and, striking a light, discovered
that the room was full of ants. They came in battle array, a numerous
army pouring in through the door. We rushed out into the garden, where
fortunately we found a spot free from them. Immediately lighting a
fire, we formed it into a wide circle, in the middle of which we took up
our posts. Then helping each other, we were able to relieve ourselves
from our venomous assailants, and as we plucked them off we threw them
into the flames. We soon found that the whole village was attacked, and
that the inhabitants were turning out to defend themselves. They came
not in thousands but in millions, covering the streets and forcing their
way onwards. We saw that fires were lighted in all directions, but
whenever there was no time to collect fuel and kindle it, the insects,
marching onward, destroyed everything in their way. Although they fell
by tens of thousands, others took their places. It was not until the
morning that they disappeared, having destroyed in that short time a
large portion of the provisions in the place. Fortunately they did not
eat up the fruit nor the live animals, but among other things destroyed
was the skin of the huge ape which we had intended to take to England to
exhibit to naturalists, feeling sure it would create more surprise than
anything else we could carry with us. The entire skin was devoured, and
the head picked clean so that only a whitened skull remained. As we had
been up all night fighting the ants, we were glad to lie down again and
obtain some sleep in quiet.
We had just risen, rubbing our eyes and still feeling very drowsy, when
Prince Ombay came in and invited us to accompany him on another hunt,
observing that it was necessary to replenish the stock of provisions
destroyed by the ants. We, of course, could not refuse.
"I would advise, gentlemen," said Tom, when he heard through Aboh what
the prince wished, "that we carry our knapsacks on our backs, and then,
if we have the chance, we can take French leave of our friends. They
would scarcely attempt to stop us by force; and one can make them
understand that we must be off."
"Tom's advice is good," said Charley. "Let us clap on our packs as a
matter of course."
We had a scanty breakfast, as the whole of the village was on short
commons. We hoped before long to get some venison, on which we could
feast before taking to flight. When, however, the prince saw what we
were about, with a smiling countenance he said--
"Hang up your fetishes again, you can do without them when hunting, and
when you come back you can worship at your leisure."
From this we found that our knapsacks were looked upon as objects of
worship, perhaps this accounted for their not having been stolen.
Charley tried to persuade the prince that we should kill more game if we
took them, but he either suspected our intentions, or thought that they
were safer in our houses, and insisted that we should leave them behind
us. We had let Aboh understand what we had been doing, for we knew we
could trust him, but we thought it wise not to say anything to Shimbo
until the moment had arrived, when Aboh would tell him of our
intentions, feeling sure that he would be ready to accompany us.
In vain we tried to persuade Ombay that we should be more successful if
we carried our knapsacks. He, putting on a knowing look, again refused,
and we were finally compelled to set off without them.
"We must wait for another opportunity," said Charley; "it will come some
day or other, and it is very evident that we shall have to practise no
small amount of patience."
"I have been thinking seriously that I could make my way down to the
coast alone," said Tom, "and if I could fall in with an English vessel,
I might form a party of men to help you. I know that there is some
danger, but it matters very little if Tom Tubbs loses his life, although
it would be a sad thing for you three young gentlemen to be kept
prisoners by these black fellows for the rest of your lives."
"No fear of that," answered Charley. "We may find ourselves free sooner
than you expect. There must be rivers to the north of us, and if we
could once get to the banks of one of them, we could make our way down
to the sea in a canoe. The longer we remain with King Sanga Tanga, the
more confidence the people will have in us. At present we have only
Hobson's choice, stop here we must."
On this occasion the prince was accompanied by three times as many
hunters as before. We were expected to take an active part in the
sport. We proceeded nearly a couple of days journey, when we formed a
camp, and the hunters went out prepared to kill either elephants,
buffaloes, deer, or wild pigs; indeed, for some object or other, they
seemed anxious to accumulate a large supply of food. The first day they
killed two elephants, much in the same manner as I have before
described. The following day Charley, Harry, and I killed two buffaloes
and three deer, while the natives were not nearly so successful.
Parties arrived from the village to carry home the game we had already
shot. We were shortly afterwards joined by a number of strangers, who
came in, we found, from the different villages at a distance, though all
under the government of King Sanga Tanga, each party bringing a large
net, a similar net having arrived from our village. On examining them,
we found that they were made from the fibre of the pine apple plant and
that of other trees twisted into thick thread. Each net was about
seventy feet long, and nearly five feet in height.
The villagers--I should have said--were accompanied by packs of little
sharp-eared dogs, who gave vent to loud yelps. Accompanied by these
dogs, about twenty men, taking between them one of the nets, of which
there were altogether about a dozen, set off to a spot fixed on, where
there was a clearing in the forest. Not a word was spoken as the men
crept along, followed by the dogs, which were kept close together, and
seemed to understand that they were not to bark. On reaching the
ground, the hunters commenced stretching the nets, fastening them up to
the lower branches of trees and shrubs, forming altogether a
semi-circle, upwards of half a mile in length. A party was stationed at
both ends of the nets thus arranged, armed with their spears and darts,
to prevent any of the game escaping; the rest of the men, whom we
accompanied, then extended themselves in another semi-circle on the
concave side of the net, at the distance of a mile or more from it.
Thus we advanced, the dogs barking, and the men shouting, while we held
our guns ready to shoot, and the natives had their darts prepared for
instant action. We might fall in with an elephant, or buffalo, or
leopard, which would of course laugh at the nets, but the belief
appeared to be that no such animals were likely to be found within the
space we embraced. It was often difficult work making our way through
the dense forest, and the natives had to hew paths for themselves with
their hangers. Getting in sight of the nets, we saw, stopped by them,
half a dozen gazelles, and antelopes of different species, two very
large ones of the latter description, which I should have thought would
have forced their way through the net had they made the attempt. We
fired, and brought them down. Two gazelles were caught in the net, and
others were knocked over by the natives. Altogether, the haul was
considered a very good one. As soon as the animals were secured, the
nets were collected, and the party moving off to another part of the
forest, again spread them in the same way. Altogether, in the course of
the day we killed thirty head of game of different species, when we
returned in triumph to the capital of King Sanga Tanga, who came out to
meet us, and was especially civil to us, his white guests, who had so
greatly assisted in supplying him with this large amount of game. On
coming back to our house we asked Aboh if he could explain why the king
wished to obtain this large amount of game, as all the inhabitants
together could not consume it.
Aboh looked very knowing. "Him daughter goin' take husband," he
answered.
A feeling of dread came over me as he said this. What if the king
intended to make me, _nolens volens_, marry his daughter. It seemed
impossible. I expressed my fears to Charley.
"I wish that I could relieve your anxiety," he answered. "But I tell
you what, perhaps Tom would not mind so much. We may ask the king to
take him instead of you."
"But the young lady, she would object to that," I said, in a tone which
made Charley fancy that my vanity was wounded. He laughed heartily, and
Harry joined him. "Perhaps you think Tom is too old for the young
woman," he added.
"Oh! no, no," I answered, "he is heartily welcome to her for that
matter."
However, the next day the business was settled in a more satisfactory
way than any of us expected, or supposed possible. It appeared that the
prince, or the heir-apparent of a neighbouring kingdom considerably to
the northward, had seen (I must not call her the "fair") Iguma, and had
fallen desperately in love with her. He had arrived during our previous
absence with a large party of followers, bringing treasures of all
sorts, elephants' tasks, rolls of matting, and various other articles.
The king having observed my unwillingness to become his son-in-law, and
the young lady being piqued at my indifference, had accepted her black
suitor. Indeed, the treasures he offered were far greater than any we
possessed, which probably weighed chiefly with his majesty. We hitherto
had not seen the happy bridegroom, Prince Kendo, who had been living
since his arrival in a hut by himself. The ceremony was to take place
that very day, when the various gifts, or the amount he was to pay for
his bride, were to be openly presented in the square of the village. At
the hour fixed on, the prince made his appearance at the door of the
house, his head decked with coloured feathers, a panther robe over his
shoulders, his hunting knife stuck in his belt, to which also was
fastened a sort of kilt of coloured matting, ornamented with feathers,
while his whole body was freshly oiled and painted. His attendants, who
bore his goods, were habited in a somewhat similar manner. As soon as
he appeared, the king came forth leading his daughter. I cannot say
that she was over-encumbered by robes, but her arms and ankles were
encircled by rings. Her head was decked with coloured beads, and a
chain of beads and charms hung round her neck. Prince Kendo, ordering
his attendants to place the goods he had brought in front of the king's
palace, advanced, carrying a big tusk, the last article of value which
he had agreed to pay for his bride. On the king receiving it, the
prince stretched out his hand and took that of the lady's, when Sanga
Tanga gave her his paternal blessing, and apparently a large amount of
good advice, the only ceremony, as far as we could discover, performed
on the occasion. She had now become the bride of the prince, and I must
own that I breathed more freely when I saw him lead her away, and felt
satisfied that the king would no longer insist on my becoming her
husband. The ceremony, such as it was, being concluded, the people
began to shriek and shout at the top of their voices, congratulating the
prince on becoming the possessor of so lovely a bride. Tom-toms were
heard beating in all directions, and horns sounding, and the whole
capital was in an uproar. The feast then began, and the cooks, who had
been busily employed all the morning in roasting, stewing, and boiling,
produced the result of their labours in baskets and dishes, which were
spread out in front of the king's house, which was on this occasion to
serve as a banquet hall. The guests quickly assembled, the bride and
bridegroom taking, if not the head of the table, the post of honour,
while King Sanga Tanga, the heir-apparent, and the old grandfather and
other members of the family, placed themselves on either side. At first
matters were conducted quietly enough, the guests eating to their
heart's content; but when the palm-wine began to circulate freely, they,
like persons in more civilised communities under similar circumstances,
became uproarious. The old grandfather tumbled not under the table, but
at full length on the ground; King Sanga Tanga cried out that it was
time to commence dancing, and he himself starting up, set the example,
and the crowd forming a circle, he performed a series of eccentric
evolutions, similar to those exhibited on a previous occasion by his
brother monarch King Quagomolo; when at last, overcome by his exertions,
he sank down on the ground close to the royal portion of the circle, the
bride and bridegroom springing up went through a like performance.
Their places were taken by a number of courtiers and the ladies, if I
can so describe them of the royal household, but for obvious reasons I
will not describe the style of their dancing. It was barbarism run mad,
and our chief feeling was disgust that human beings should so degrade
themselves.
"Abominable!" cried Charley. "It is wrong to sanction by our presence
such doings, and if we retire to our house, and afterwards tell Sanga
Tanga why we did so, it may perhaps open his eyes to the true character
of what is going forward."
"Well," exclaimed Tom, "I've seen many a rum sight, but this beats even
the worst I ever beheld in a seaport town in England, or elsewhere, and
that's saying a good deal."
With these words Tom turned his back on the performers, and followed us
to the house. So absorbed were the spectators in the dancing--if
dancing it could be called--that they did not perceive our departure.
We could hear the shrieks and shouts of laughter and applause, the
drumming on tom-toms, and the sound of the horns until a late hour in
the night. We had evidence of many barbarous customs of the natives,
which I have not mentioned. I do not say that they are more savage, or
rather fierce, than people of other parts of the world; indeed, in some
respects they are less so, but their barbarism is the result of their
ignorance and debased condition. They have no religion--properly so
called--their only belief is in what we denote fetishism, which is a
word taken from the Portuguese _feticeira_ or witch. They have idols,
but they can scarcely be said to worship these, and they believe that
power resides in serpents and birds, as well as in inanimate objects,
such as mountain peaks, in bones, and feathers, and they believe also
that good and evil spirits exist, and that charms have a powerful
influence, as likewise that dreams signify something, but in many of
these respects they really do not differ materially from their white
brethren of more civilised countries. The ignorant people of many
European nations believe in charms. They bow down before statues,
certainly more attractive in appearance than the African's fetish god,
but still things of stone. The people we met were certainly
superstitious in the highest degree, but they nearly all differed in
their ideas, as did even the people of the same tribe. As far as we
could ascertain, they have no notion of the immortality of the soul,
although they fancy that the spirit exists for a short time after it
leaves the body. They dread such spirits more than they reverence them,
and believe that they are rather inclined to do them harm than good.
They therefore place offerings at their graves, for the sake of
propitiating them, sometimes offering up a human sacrifice for the same
purpose--some unfortunate slave who is of little value to them. In our
village we saw a large idol in a house built expressly for the purpose.
It was a hideous, ill-constructed monster, and it seemed scarcely
possible, ignorant as the people were, that they could really worship
such an object, but they did so if they wanted to gain benefit, either
to obtain victory in war, or success in the chase. On such occasions we
saw them presenting food, and then dancing and singing before it. Many
of the people also had small family idols which they worshipped much in
the same manner; but if they did not obtain what they wanted from the
idol, they were very apt to send it away in disgrace. They have also a
belief in the power of certain doctors or medicine men, who exorcise
evil spirits, and concoct charms. In these charms they have more faith
than anything else. They are generally done up in the skins of animals,
and consist of bones, or feathers, or ashes, or the skins or bones of
snakes. The manufacture of these charms brings a large revenue to the
doctors, who constantly encourage their use, just as do the priests of
certain white nations, who make their dupes pay for the trumpery leaden
figures or images, which they persuade them to wear round their necks.
"On my word, I do not see much difference after all, between the belief
of the ignorant Russians, or Spaniards, or Portuguese, or other European
people, and these unhappy blacks," exclaimed Harry one day when we were
discussing the subject. The fearful curse of the country, however, is
the belief in witchcraft. When a person is seized with illness, he
always believes that some enemy has caused it, and is not satisfied
until the witch or wizard is discovered, who is immediately compelled to
swallow poison, or is barbarously put to death in some other way. I
prefer thus giving a short account of the superstitions of the people,
and the evil which results from them, to detailing the abominations and
horrors, which on various occasions we witnessed during our wanderings
through the country. That evening we came to the resolution of
endeavouring to make our escape as soon as we possibly could. We
believed that we could depend upon Aboh and his brother, and that they
would influence several of their tribe who had been captured, but were
allowed to go at liberty.
As we could not sleep, owing to the hideous noise going on in the
village, so we sat up to a late hour, discussing our plans for the
future.
CHAPTER THIRTEEN.
WE ARE EXPECTED TO GO OUT HUNTING AGAIN--WE COMPLAIN TO THE KING AND
DEMAND OUR FREEDOM--REMIND HIM OF OUR GOOD SERVICES--HIS INGRATITUDE--
NEITHER BRIBERY OR THREATS AFFECT HIM--OUR CONDITION BECOMES WORSE--TOM
FEIGNS ILLNESS--HIS HOWLS AROUSE THE VILLAGE--HE FRIGHTENS THE KING--THE
KING FALLS ILL--WE DETERMINE TO ESCAPE WITH THE OTHER BLACK PRISONERS--
THE MEDICINE MAN THE ONLY WEASEL IN THE VILLAGE--WE ARE PURSUED--ONE OF
OUR MEN HIT--WE FIRE--TOM HIT--WE CHECK THE NATIVES--WE MAKE FOR A
DEFENSIVE POSITION--THE ENEMY AGAIN COME UP WITH US--THE MORNING IS
BREAKING--TWO VOLLEYS DISPERSE OUR PURSUERS--WE REST--SEE A VILLAGE--
SIGHT A RIVER--OUR PLANS FOR DESCENDING IT--MEET A HUNTING PARTY--THEY
SEIZE US--CARRIED BEFORE THE KING--OUR CAPTOR TELLS "ONE BIG LIE"--WE
RECOVER OUR GUNS--SLEEP IN A DIRTY HUT--EAT THE FOOD IN OUR KNAPSACKS--
THE KING SURPRISED AT OUR ENDURANCE--A WELCOME PRESENT FROM AN UNKNOWN
FRIEND--OUR CONFINEMENT AFFECTS OUR HEALTH, AND WE PREPARE TO FIGHT FOR
LIBERTY--A STARTLING RECOGNITION--CAPTAIN RODERICK UNDERTAKES TO OBTAIN
OUR RELEASE--AN AGREEABLE CHANGE OF QUARTERS--THE GENERAL'S POWERFUL
FETISH--CAPTAIN RODERICK'S DETERMINATION NEVER TO RETURN TO ENGLAND--
PATIENCE IN CAPTIVITY.
The bride and bridegroom had taken their departure northwards. We tried
to ascertain the exact position of their village in order that we might
avoid it, rather than pay the young couple a visit. As soon as the game
we had taken was exhausted, the king wanted us once more to start on a
hunting expedition, but we had come to the resolution of going as seldom
as possible, that we might avoid the expenditure of our ammunition. It
was necessary to husband that, as we should certainly require it on our
journey. Although we were apparently allowed our liberty, we were
conscious that we were narrowly watched, and that, therefore, we should
find great difficulty in making our escape by stealth. Tom Tubbs having
completely recovered his strength, and we three being in good condition,
we determined to go to the king and boldly request guides and an escort
to the northward as far as his jurisdiction extended, at the same time,
to demand the release of Aboh and Shimbo, who were willing to accompany
us instead of returning to their own village.
Taking Aboh with us, when we knew the king was at home, we proceeded
together to his palace. His majesty was seated under the veranda in
front on a pile of matting, with a huge pipe in his mouth, attending to
the affairs of state, for several of his counsellors were seated on
either side of him. Harry, who had learned more of the language than
either Charley or I, and looked considerably older than either of us,
was deputed to be spokesman, having the aid of Aboh as an interpreter,
should he come to a standstill for want of words on his part, or from
not being able to comprehend the meaning of what the king said. He
acquitted himself, as far as we could judge, wonderfully well. He
pointed out that we had been made prisoners when travelling peaceably
through the country, and been compelled to accompany his people, that we
had since then enjoyed our liberty, and that we had made good use of it.
In the first place, by saving his daughter from the wild man of the
woods, then preserving his son from the charge of the buffalo, that we
had killed enough game to support ourselves, and should have been ready
to assist him in any other way in our power, but that we now desired to
return to our own country. That we should be obliged to his majesty if
he would furnish us with the means of proceeding on our journey. The
king, who seemed to understand perfectly what was said--Aboh aiding with
a few words here and there--gave a smile and replied--
"That he would consider the matter, that he esteemed us very much, that
we were good hunters, and had brought peace and prosperity to the
country, as no enemies would dare to attack his people while we remained
with him. But, if you go away, what will become of me?" he asked.
"What shall I say to that?" asked Harry, turning round to Charley and
me.
"Tell the king that he must manage as he did before we had the honour of
making his acquaintance," answered Charley; "that we are very glad to
have been of service to him hitherto, still, that now our hearts are
yearning for home, and that if he detains us against our will, our
spirits will sink, and we shall no longer be able to help him."
The king grinned horribly, and said something of which neither Harry nor
any of us could make out the meaning.
"What did he say?" we inquired of Aboh.
"Him say, cut him head off," answered Aboh; "me tinkee him mean it too."
This was unpleasant information, but we thought it as well not to take
notice of it, but it convinced us plainly that the king would not agree
to our request. "Endeavour to bribe the king with promises of the
things we will send him," said Charley; "tell him we will pay him
handsomely."
"I'll try," replied Harry, and forthwith he began to pour out all the
native words he could recollect. It is just possible that he put in two
or three by mistake, which had a very contrary meaning, for the king
looked sometimes surprised, then angry, then highly amused, but yet he
would not give the permission we requested.
"Try again if he can't be bribed," said Charley. "Promise that we will
send him all sorts of things from England, if he will tell us how they
are to be transmitted."
Harry did his best to carry out Charley's wishes, Aboh interpreting the
words of the king. He said that a bird in the hand was worth two in the
bush, that if we got away we might forget the promise we had made, or
that if we sent the things, they might be lost long before they could
reach him.
"Now try him on the threatening tack," said Charley; "tell him what a
great man our king is, that ten of his soldiers would put to flight a
whole army of his blacks, and that if he does not let us go, our king
will send two or three hundred men, who will be landed from our ships,
and march up the country to look for us."
"They have not yet arrived," said the king, with another of those
sardonic grins in which he often indulged. "It will take them some time
to get here, and when they do come, they will have to fight us if they
come as enemies."
"Tell the obstinate old fellow that they will come notwithstanding, and
will blow him and his village up to the top of the mountains," exclaimed
Charley, who grew impatient at the king's refusal.
Harry did not say this, however, for two reasons. In the first place,
he thought it would be imprudent, and in the second, he could not find
words to express himself. He said something equivalent to it, however,
which had no apparent effect on the king's mind. At last we were
obliged to leave his majesty, determined notwithstanding, as Tom
advised, to take French leave, and go on the first opportunity. Our
condition after this became much worse than it had been before. We were
compelled to go into the plantations, and to dig and hoe the ground. We
at first refused, declaring that we were hunters and not cultivators of
the soil. We expostulated again and again reminding the king how we had
saved his daughter and son from death. He only answered "that his
daughter did not now belong to him, and his son must answer for
himself."
This convinced us that the black king had not a spark of gratitude in
his composition. We, however, addressed ourselves to Prince Ombay, who
appeared more inclined to accede to our request than was his father, but
he told us he dared not interfere with his authority.
Week after week went by, and we were kept in a state of vassalage. When
we went out hunting, the king, suspecting that we might make our escape,
always kept one of the party at home with our knapsacks. During the
whole time, however, neither we, our knapsacks, or our guns were
interfered with, the people evidently looking on them as fetishes, not
daring to touch them. They also believed us to be something above the
common, or we should not have been treated so civilly by them. At last
we could bear it no longer.
"Come with me, we must fight our way out of this," exclaimed Charley.
"That is more easily said than done. Although we might kill a few
people we should be overwhelmed with numbers," observed Tom.
"Let us try if we cannot deceive them by pretending to be reconciled to
our lot," said Harry; "or if one of us shams to be ill, they'll think we
cannot move under the circumstances; such a trick would be perfectly
justifiable."
"Of course it would," said Tom, "and I'll be the one to sham ill, you'll
see how I'll howl and shriek, until the people will be glad to get rid
of us for the sake of peace and quiet."
The next evening Tom put his proposal into execution. No sooner had the
villagers turned in than he began howling and shrieking in the most
fearful manner.
"I think you are overdoing it," observed Harry, "we shall not get any
sleep either."
"Never mind that for a few hours," answered Tom, "I must howl on until
they come and see what's the matter." He got some white earth with
which he bedaubed his face, and which made it of an ashy paleness as he
now lay covered up with mats on one side of the house.
The noise had been heard by the prince, who, with several other persons,
came to know what was the matter. Tom made no answer, but howled and
shrieked louder than ever, as if racked with pain.
Aboh, who had not, however, been let into the secret, informed the
prince that the white man was very ill, and that he was afraid we should
all catch the same complaint. This was an addition of his own that we
had not thought of.
Just as he was speaking the king with a number of his wives came in to
know what was the cause of the noise. When Aboh told him the same story
he darted off with great speed, calling on his son and the rest of the
people to beat a retreat from the infected place, and out they all
rushed helter skelter, Tom hastening them by another series of shrieks
and cries. After this we were left unmolested for the remainder of the
night, although Tom once in each watch shrieked and shouted, as he said,
"Just to keep the people from forgetting us."
Though no one came into the house for several days after this, Aboh was
allowed to go out and purchase provisions for us, which we were
frequently able to do, with some of the beads and trinkets we possessed.
At length one day he came back, looking very much alarmed, saying that
the king himself was taken ill, and having declared that some one had
bewitched him, had sent for the witch-doctor to find out who it was, and
if the rascally doctor fixed on one of us we should have to drink the
Mboundow poison.
Of course we all declared that we would do no such thing, and laughed at
Aboh.
"But, I tell you what, perhaps they'll make you or your brother, or one
of the rest of your people do so," observed Charley, "the wisest thing
you can do is for you all to come to us to-night and we will fight our
way out of the village."
Aboh agreed, fully believing what Charley said; indeed, there was every
probability that he or some of his people would be fixed on by the
witch-doctor, when they would to a certainty be put to death.
"I'll make them suppose that I'm as bad as the king, or worse," said
Tom.
As soon as it was evening Tom repeated his howls and shrieks, with even
more vehemence, if possible, than before. Just about midnight, when all
the people were in bed, Aboh sallied forth. We anxiously waited his
return. At last he came back with Shimbo, followed by a dozen of his
tribe, who had managed to possess themselves not only of bows and
arrows, but of spears and hangers, and were altogether very well armed.
Not a moment was to be lost. We had strapped on our knapsacks, and
shouldering our muskets we sallied forth as noiselessly as possible.
Fortunately no dogs barked, nor, as far as we could tell, had any of the
inhabitants heard us. Not a light was burning in any of the houses.
The king and his witch-doctor were probably also asleep. Had an enemy
attacked the village, the whole of the inhabitants might have been
slaughtered before they had time to unite and offer the slightest
resistance.
We began to congratulate ourselves that we should get a good distance
from the village before our flight was discovered. Already we had
reached the north end of the high street, and were about to emerge into
the open country, when we heard a shout uttered by a single voice.
"Who speaks?" I asked of Aboh, who was near me.
"Him doctor," said Aboh, "sleep one eye open."
"Don't answer him," said Charley, "push on; if we get a good start, they
are not likely to follow us in the dark."
Fearing that our native allies might be ready to yield, we told them to
go on, while Tom and I dropped to the rear to defend them should we be
attacked. We now heard several other voices. In a short time the whole
village was in an uproar, men shouting, dogs barking, women screaming,
fancying, perhaps, that the place was attacked. We feared, of course,
that the true state of the case would soon be discovered, and that we
should be followed. Whether Ombay and his people would venture to
molest us was the question. We marched on steadily, but we had not gone
far when we knew, by the increasing noise, that some of the people were
on our track. Charley advised us not to fire unless it should become
absolutely necessary. The shouts and angry cries of the savages drew
nearer and nearer. It was evident that they were rushing on pell mell,
still, as long as no arrows were shot at us, we were resolved not to
fire. Just then the moon, though waning, rose above the horizon, and
showed us a mass of dark forms, waving their weapons, shouting and
howling, not a hundred yards off. Tom and I turned round and presented
our rifles, shouting loudly to them to keep back. The moonbeams
gleaming on the barrels showed the blacks what we were about, and the
mob halting we rejoined our companions; again we pushed on. The number
of our pursuers increased, we had, however, made up our minds not to
yield and not to return; as soon as they saw us again moving on, they
began to scamper towards us, shouting as before.
"They beat me at that," observed Tom, "but if they don't look out, I'll
give them some cause to shriek."
Soon after he had spoken an arrow flew near our ears, but fortunately
did not strike any of the people ahead of us, another and another
followed, at last one of the blacks was hit, as we knew by the cry of
pain he uttered.
"If that's your game, my lads, you shall have enough of it," exclaimed
Tom, turning round and firing a shot into the midst of the savages. Who
was struck we could not tell, but they all immediately stopped, though
they continued shouting as before. Tom reloading, we ran on.
"The next time we must both of us stop and fire," he said.
For several minutes we began to hope that the savages had given up the
pursuit, but as we could not long keep up the pace at which we were
going, we began to slacken our speed. They again overtook us, and
shooting a flight of arrows, Tom was hit in the leg, and another black
man in the back.
"It's your own fault," cried Tom, facing about, when we both fired with
evident effect, for we could see the savages rushing back instead of
pursuing, well knowing that we had two more muskets amongst us. In
consequence of having so frequently gone out on hunting excursions, we
all knew the road well. In some places it was rather winding, and we
were afraid that the blacks, by cutting off angles, might get on our
flanks. However, that could not be helped, and we kept our eyes open to
be ready for them at any moment they might appear. Fortunately, Tom's
was merely a flesh wound, and it did not occur to us that the arrow was
poisoned. The wound bled pretty freely, but there was no time to stop
and bind it up. Our pursuers seemed to think that they might have to
pay too dearly for the attempt to recover us, and we were now allowed to
go on without molestation, we could still hear them, however, shouting
in our rear. This only served to make us increase our speed, until our
poor slave companions, who well knew that they would in all probability
be put to death if we were overtaken--though the people might be afraid
to kill us--were on the point of sinking from fatigue. At last, finding
that Tom appeared to be suffering from loss of blood, we shouted to
Charley and Harry to halt. They were glad enough to do so, both of them
coming to assist me in binding up Tom's wound.
"I don't think it's anything, and it doesn't hurt me much, if I can keep
moving I don't mind," remarked Tom, as we finished the operation.
As we were all very tired with our run, which must have carried us six
or seven miles, we were proposing to rest, when again we heard the cries
in our rear. This made us jump to our feet and push on as before. We
remembered a spot on some hilly ground, where the rocks cropped up in a
curious fashion, and Charley had observed to me at the time that it was
very like a fortress. It was still some miles off, but we determined to
make for it as fast as we could go, and there take up our position.
Listening attentively, we could occasionally catch the sound of our
pursuers' voices coming from a considerable distance, showing that we
had got a good way ahead of them, while the light of the moon enabled us
to see our way. It was very rugged, now up hills, now down into
valleys, though generally through thick woods, when the darkness
rendered our progress still more difficult. All the time we dreaded
lest some of the more nimble of our enemies might, by cutting across the
country, get on our flanks and attack us with their spears, or send a
flight of arrows amongst us from behind the trees. There was a chance,
too, of our meeting with elephants, which might obstruct the road, or a
leopard might spring out upon us. We were all well aware of the dangers
to be encountered, but no less resolved were we to face them boldly.
Charley and Harry kept calling to me every now and then, to ascertain
that we were keeping up with them. The way in which we marched
encouraged our black companions, and prevented any of the more
faint-hearted among them from deserting. Indeed, it would have been
folly in them had they done so, for they would to a certainty have been
discovered and slaughtered.
At length we reached the hill where we had determined to make a stand,
for we were so knocked up by this time, that we could not have proceeded
further without rest. It was exactly the sort of place we had expected
to find, a collection of rocks forming almost a circle, somewhat
resembling the remains of Druidical temples in England. The space where
there was no rock was occupied by trees, which would serve as shelter
should we be surrounded. We hurried in among the rocks. Our first care
was to examine the opening, and the spot where each of us should stand,
and then to place our black allies between us. This done, we looked
about to try and discover any broken pieces of timber or loose rock,
with which we might still further fortify our position. Neither Sanga
Tanga nor Ombay were likely to be thirsting for our blood--whatever some
of their people might do, whose friends we had killed--their object
being rather to recover us and keep us in slavery, to answer their
purpose of frightening their enemies, by the idea that having white men
among them they were invincible. Should we, therefore, be able to make
a bold stand, we hoped to sicken them of the attempt to recover us.
"Reserve your fire lads," cried Charley, "don't pull a trigger until you
are certain of your man. If we can manage to knock over half a dozen or
so, before they get close up to our fortification, the rest will
probably run away and give up the pursuit."
We were still engaged in stopping up gaps here and there, when we caught
sight through the gloom, for day had not yet broken, of a dozen or more
dark figures at the foot of the hill. They were apparently looking
about to ascertain what had become of us. They seemed to suspect where
we were, but were still uncertain. Some then went on ahead to see if we
had gone in that direction, while the rest remained where we first
discovered them. We might have shot four of the first party, as they
were full in our view; but Charley told us in a whisper to refrain from
firing, as they were not actually attacking us, and might, it was
possible, be peaceably disposed. We could see them clearly enough in
the open, although they could not perceive us, sheltered as we were, by
the rocks and brushwood. The sky was now becoming brighter towards the
east, and in a short time the sun would rise, and we should probably be
seen. Just then the men who had gone on returned, and shouting to their
companions told them that we were not ahead. Others were also coming up
from the southward, we could count nearly fifty of them, while further
reinforcements could be perceived in the distance. It was evident that
they were resolved on an attack. Bending their bows, they sent a flight
of arrows against the rock. We received it with a well-directed fire,
which killed four of our opponents, whom we saw tumbling down the hill.
This checked the advance, but others who had hitherto been in the rear,
pushed on with loud shouts and cries, urging on the van to a renewed
attack. We had quickly reloaded behind the rock, and waiting until
another flight of arrows had been harmlessly showered on it, we jumped
up, and again we all fired together with the same effect as before.
Without stopping to see who was killed, our enemies rushed pell mell
down the hill, tumbling over each other, while the more prudent ones,
who had kept in the rear, also turned and took to flight.
"Give them another volley," cried Charley; and having again reloaded, we
fired into the retreating masses. It had the desired effect of
expediting their flight. Away they went howling and shrieking, and we,
our own blacks joining us, uttered a loud shout of triumph.
"They'll not come back again," said Charley, who had been watching them
from the top of the rock. "I don't believe Sanga Tanga or his precious
son are with them, and although he may despatch them again when they get
back to the village, it will be a hard matter for them to overtake us.
We must have some breakfast and a couple of hours' rest, and then make
our way onwards, until we can find another secure place for a camp."
We had brought some provisions I should have said, and not far off was a
stream of water issuing from the hill. Having despatched our meal,
three of us lay down, with all the blacks except Aboh, who undertook to
keep watch with me for a portion of the time. I was then to call up
Harry, who was to be succeeded by Charley. We agreed that Tom, who was
suffering from his wound, should be allowed the full period to rest.
Shimbo was to succeed his brother, for we did not wish to trust any of
the other blacks. The moment my watch was over, and Harry had taken my
place, I was fast asleep. No one came near us, and at the time agreed
on we recommenced our march. Our chief anxiety now was about Tom's
wound. The poison, if poison there had been, we hoped had been scraped
off by the arrow going through his clothes, while the blood which flowed
from the wound yet further prevented any dangerous effects. We had gone
on for some hours, when having got beyond king Sanga Tanga's country, we
came in sight of a village. We could not tell whether the inhabitants
might prove friendly. Not to run any risk, we turned off to the right
through a thick part of the forest, until we reached a small open space.
Here we determined to wait until dark before passing the village. The
provisions we had brought with us were nearly exhausted, but we had
sufficient for another meal, and we hoped to be able to provide for the
next day by our guns, when we should be at such a distance from human
habitations that we might kill some game without the fear of the report
of our firearms being heard.
The rest was very acceptable. It enabled Tom, especially, to regain
some of the strength he had lost. As soon as we calculated that the
people in the village would be asleep, we decided again to make our way
onward. The moon gave us sufficient light to discover the path, and
also guide us in the right direction. Next morning Charley fortunately
killed a deer, which gave us an abundant supply of food for that day,
while our native allies found a number of berries and other fruits. As
they ate them readily, we gladly followed their example, for a meat
diet, especially under the burning sun of Africa, is far from
satisfactory. Thus for several days we went on, occasionally seeing
natives, but keeping out of their sight, and avoiding the villages in
which we were more likely to find enemies than friends. We were
mounting a high hill, when Harry, who had just reached the top, cried
out--
"Hurrah, there's a river, I caught sight of the bright stream between
the trees."
We hurried forward, and could see here and there among the dark foliage
the glitter of water in little patches, which extended a considerable
distance to the westward. We had great hopes that this really was a
river by which we might reach the sea. The scene was a beautiful one.
Although the country was chiefly occupied by forests, there were open
spaces visible, looking like green meadows, and to the right, downs
which reminded us of our own dear England. While we were gazing at it a
herd of graceful deer bounded across one of the nearest meadows. In
another open space I could see a couple of elephants plucking the leaves
with their huge trunks from the trees, and a small baby elephant
frolicking near them. As far as we could ascertain, there were no human
habitations, but they might be concealed by the forest, and the distance
to the river, where villages were likely to be found, was considerable.
Our great object now was to secure two or three canoes, in which we
might make our way down the river to the sea. We were, we calculated, a
couple of hundred miles at least from the mouth, and with the windings
the stream probably took it might be half as much again, still, as we
should have the current with us, the navigation might be easily
performed. Our chief danger of interruption would arise from the
inhabitants of any of the villages on the banks, who might take it into
their heads to stop us. However, we hoped by running past these at
night, we might avoid them without having to fight our way.
Ten days had passed since leaving Sanga Tanga's village. Our shoes and
clothing were, as may be supposed, in a slightly dilapidated condition,
but we were all in good health, and Tom had recovered from his wound.
On descending the hill, we made our way through the forest towards the
nearest point where we saw water. We had still some beads and trinkets
left, and we hoped, should we meet any natives to purchase canoes from
them. If not we agreed to try and build them, as Aboh told us that he
and his companions were well able to do so. We were in high spirits at
the thought of so soon terminating our journey, forgetting that months
might elapse after we reached the coast before a vessel made her
appearance.
We were pushing eagerly on through the forest, with less caution than
usual, when we came suddenly upon a large body of armed blacks, who were
out evidently on a hunting expedition. Among them was a chief who, by
his dress, we saw was a person of importance. It would have been
useless to have attempted to escape them, so, telling our blacks to keep
behind us, with the exception of Aboh, who came as interpreter, we all
advanced towards the chief. Neither Quagomolo or Sanga Tanga were
beauties, but this fellow was about the ugliest black we had yet come
across, with a most savage expression of countenance. He was very tall
and big, with a wonderful muscular development. He inquired who we
were, where we had come from, and whither we were going. Harry, who
always acted as spokesman, replied that "we had been shipwrecked, and
were travelling through the country towards the mouth of the river,
where we expected to find a ship to carry us back to England. We wished
to be friends, and begged him to assist us with canoes, as we desired to
prosecute our journey without delay."
Whether or not he understood what Harry said was uncertain. He uttered
a loud hoarse laugh, as if he thought that it was a very good joke. We
waited some time for a further reply, but the savage did not deign to
say anything. At last he exclaimed in a harsh voice, "You must come
along with me."
"We must have some guarantee that our liberty is not interfered with if
we do that," said Harry.
I do not remember the exact terms Harry used to express himself, but the
savage only grinned.
"We must keep clear of this fellow," said Charley; "fall back on our
men, he intends mischief."
Before, however, we had time to follow his advice, the savage, springing
on him, wrenched his gun out of his hand, while the black fellows
pressing round us prevented us from using our weapons. Aboh, Shimbo,
and the other blacks, seeing that we were overcome, were about to take
to flight, but they were immediately surrounded by a large body of
enemies, our whole party thus being made prisoners. We were at once
hurried unceremoniously along until we reached a large village not far
from the bank of the river which we could see flowing tantalisingly by
us. We had no time to exchange remarks with each other, or to speculate
as to what was to be our fate. At first we fancied that the ugly black
was the king of the place, but this we soon discovered was not the case,
for, as we were dragged up the main street, we saw issuing from a house
of more pretentions than its neighbours another black wearing a red
regimental coat on his back with huge epaulets, and a round hat,
battered and otherwise the worse for wear, on his head, the insignia of
royalty, as we well knew.
Our captor made a speech and described to the king how he had taken us
prisoners.
"Him tell big lie," whispered Aboh, who stood near me. "Him say great
fight, we run 'way, him kill us."
"What's the fellow's name?" I asked, meaning that of our first captor.
"Him callee Mundungo."
"And the King?"
"Him King Kickubaroo."
His majesty seemed perfectly satisfied with his general's statement. It
tickled his vanity that his forces should have conquered four white men
and an army of blacks, as was the description given of our attendants.
In vain Harry tried to explain who we were, and how the affair had
happened. The general, on hearing him speak, began vociferating so
loudly as to drown his voice. All the efforts we made were fruitless.
The louder Harry spoke, the louder Mundungo and his followers shouted.
At last the king issued an order, and we were once more surrounded by
guards and marched away to a house on the other side of the square, into
which we were unceremoniously thrust.
"I wonder what these fellows are going to do with us," said Tom. "I
say, old fellow," he exclaimed, "give me back that rifle," and he made a
spring at one of the men who had possession of his weapon, and snatched
it out of his hands. "Tell them that they are fetishes, Mr Harry,"
cried Tom, "they'll not dare to keep them."
Harry shouted out as advised, and we made a simultaneous dash at the men
who had possession of our guns. So unexpected was our onslaught, that
we were enabled to wrench them from their hands. Before they could
regain them we had sprung back into the house. Though the guns were all
loaded, they fortunately did not go off in the struggle. From the easy
way in which they delivered them up it was very evident they were not
acquainted with their use.
"Shall we attempt to fight our way out and reach the river?" exclaimed
Charley; "perhaps we may find a canoe there. Before these fellows have
recovered from their astonishment we may be able to get beyond their
reach."
"No, no!" cried Harry; "we should to a certainty lose our lives, though
we might kill a few of them, and very probably, on reaching the river,
we should find no canoe, when we should have to yield at discretion.
Since we have recovered out weapons, it will be wiser to remain quiet,
and watch for a favourable opportunity. Something or other may turn up,
or when the people are off their guard, we can steal away as we did from
Sanga Tanga's village."
Charley saw the soundness of Harry's advice. We therefore, without
making further demonstration, allowed the door to be closed on us. By
this time the people outside were shouting and howling and rejoicing
over the mighty victory they had gained.
"I am sure we acted for the best," said Harry, when we found ourselves
alone. "Probably the ugly fellow in the round hat will find out soon
that there is no use in keeping us prisoners, and will let us go."
"Can't say I agree with you quite," observed Tom. "I don't trust these
niggers. They may take it into their heads to cut off ours, or offer us
up before one of their abominable fetish gods. The sooner we can get
away the better."
Aboh, who had been shut up with us, looked very much cast down, and he
seemed fully to agree in the fears expressed by Tom. The hut consisted
of a single room about twelve feet square, without windows, the light
being let in through openings between the walls and the eaves. This
served also the purpose of ventilation. There was no furniture, not
even a mat, and the floor was anything but clean. As we were tired, we
were anxious to lie down, but hesitated to stretch ourselves on the
dirty earthen floor. On looking round the room, we, however, discovered
two pieces of board, or rather what are called shingles, being portions
of a log of wood split by a wedge. Using these as spades, we managed,
with considerable trouble, to scrape a space clear of dirt, of
sufficient size to enable us all to sit on the ground. We were going to
place our backs against the wall, but Aboh warned us that some
ill-disposed fellow might thrust his spear through it, and that it would
be much safer to take up a position near the centre. Our knapsacks had
not been taken away, as our captors possibly suspected that they were
part of ourselves; fortunately within them we had stored the remainder
of the deer and several birds we had shot the previous days, and which
we had cooked for breakfast; we therefore had abundance of food. This
was indeed providential, for no provisions were brought us; we had also
enough water in our leathern bottles to quench our thirst. We waited
until it was dark before we attacked our meal, that the natives might
not discover that we had eaten, and would give us credit for a wonderful
power of endurance. By economising the food we were able to save enough
for breakfast the next morning. At last we lay down to sleep, keeping
our rifles by our sides ready for use. We all resolved that should we
be attacked to fight to the last. To avoid being surprised, one of us,
as usual, kept awake as if we were in camp. Until a late hour we heard
the people outside shouting and making a great noise, for a dance was
being given in honour of the victory obtained over us.
We were left alone during the whole night, and as soon as it was
daylight we sat up and ate the remainder of our food, waiting for
anything that might occur. It was past noon when the door opened, and
the king appeared.
"Are you hungry?" he asked, with a grin on his countenance, for he
expected to find that we were starving.
"Not particularly," answered Harry. "We should not object to a dish of
plantains, or some goat's milk, if you will be good enough to send them
to us."
"You are wonderful men, you don't look as if you could easily be
exhausted," observed the king. "My general Mundungo must be a brave
warrior to have overcome you."
"He's a big knave, at all events," answered Harry. "But that's not to
the point at present, what we want now are some plantains and milk, or
venison."
I don't mean to say that Harry used these exact words, but with the aid
of Aboh he thus signified our wishes.
After some further conversation, the object for which the king had come
being gained, he left us again to ourselves.
It was not until near evening that the door opened, and two damsels
appeared with baskets on their heads. They placed them on the ground
before us, when, much to our satisfaction, we discovered a quantity of
plantains, some roast venison, and yams, and also a couple of large
gourds, the one containing goat's milk, the other water.
"We are much obliged to you for bringing these," said Harry. "And who
may I ask, sent them."
"A friend," answered one of the girls. "But we were forbidden to tell
you who she is. Eat and be satisfied." On this, the girls evidently
acting as they had been directed, left the hut, and the door was
immediately closed.
"I thought, when I saw the baskets, some young woman must have sent the
food," observed Tom. "They're alike all the world over, to my mind, the
same sort of heart beats inside a black skin as a white one. Things
don't look so bad after all."
We had provisions enough to last us--if they would keep good--for
several days. We agreed to husband them, not knowing when more might be
brought us. To prevent any creatures getting into them, we hung them up
to the rafters of the roof. Next day we were left entirely alone. We
were, as may be supposed, getting impatient, and had good reason to
dread what might next happen. Observing the light coming through under
the roof, we concluded that we might get a look through the opening, to
see what was going forward outside. Towards the back, and one of the
sides, the walls of other houses prevented us obtaining any view, but on
the other we found that we could look right down the street.
I must pass over several days, during which we were kept in confinement.
Only once in three days was any food brought us, our benefactor, or
benefactress, who sent it, probably not having opportunities for doing
so oftener. We could gain no information from the slaves who brought
the baskets, nor could we learn anything from the people who were,
occasionally sent in to clean out our hut. We were now growing very
anxious--moreover, our health was suffering. All sort of dreadful ideas
occurred to us, and we fancied that the king was reserving us for some
great festival, when he might, as Tom had suggested--sacrifice us to his
fetish gods. At last we agreed that, to save ourselves from a worse
fate, we would run the risk of breaking out, and fighting our way down
to the river.
We had been imprisoned for nearly a month, and had settled one evening,
that the very next night we would make the attempt. The following day
we expected to receive our usual supply of provisions, which we intended
to carry with us. Early next morning, as the first gleam of light stole
into the room, I climbed up as usual to have a look out, and ascertain
whether anything was occurring in the village, when, what was my
surprise to see a white man with a gun on his shoulder, and holding by a
chain in his left hand a bull dog. Another glance at the dog, and I
recognised him as Growler, while the man bore a strong resemblance to
Captain Roderick. He had then escaped with his life. I could scarcely
suppose that, bad as he was, he would refuse to assist in setting us
free. He was evidently at liberty himself, or he would not have walked
along in the independent manner he was doing. Guessing that Growler
would recognise me, I whistled. The dog immediately pricked up his
ears, and began to look about him. Captain Roderick started.
"What is it, Growler," I heard him ask.
I again whistled, and called to my companions. They started to their
feet.
"Captain Roderick," I shouted out, "will you assist some of your
countrymen in getting away from these black fellows who have imprisoned
them?"
"Who is that who calls me by my name?" asked the captain in a tone of
astonishment, looking up to the place from which my voice proceeded,
although he could not distinguish my features under the eaves of the
house. Coming to the door, he without further ceremony withdrew the
bars which secured it.
"Who are you?" he exclaimed, with a look of astonishment, as he saw us
ready to rush out. "Don't you remember us, Captain Roderick?" I asked.
"I don't wish to claim it as a merit, but we set you at liberty when
your ship was wrecked, and enabled you to save your life."
"I wish that I had lost it," answered the captain with a gloomy look.
"Perhaps you may live to be thankful it was preserved. At all events,
we acted desiring to do you a good service, and all we beg is, that if
you have the power you will assist us in making our escape from this
village, in which for some reason the king seems inclined to keep us
prisoners. Why he does so I cannot ascertain."
"I can solve the mystery then," he answered; "I confess that I have been
the cause of your detention. I have been living with the chief almost
ever since I got on shore, having made my way up here immediately, and I
am in high favour with him. Two rascals, former followers of mine,
while I was out hunting came to the village--intending to remain here, I
conclude--but finding by some chance that I had made it my headquarters,
they bolted. As I had no wish to have them prying into my proceedings,
I charged the king to keep them until my return, as I was on the point
of starting up the country on a trading expedition."
"That of course accounts for our being kept here," exclaimed Charley.
From the description of the men given by Captain Roderick we had no
doubt that they were the two pirates who had escaped when we were
recaptured.
"Now, Captain Roderick," said Charley, "if you will facilitate our
return to the coast, we will report favourably of the service you have
rendered us, and it may be of some use to you should you ever wish to go
back to England and any accusation be brought against you."
"As to that, sir, I have no intention of ever returning to my native
land," answered the captain in a gloomy tone, "but as I have no grudge
against you, I will help you to make your escape, although the rascal
who calls himself king here is an eccentric character, and it may not be
so easy as you suppose. He gets drunk for six days in the week whenever
palm-wine is to be procured, and the seventh amuses himself by cutting
off the heads of his faithful subjects and playing other vagaries.
Still I have taught him to respect me, and as I have been the means of
supplying his treasury, I do not doubt but that he will be ready to do
what I ask him in the hopes of retaining my services. I now intend, if
he is not too drunk, to rouse him up and tell him to supply you with a
better house, and ample food, and a supply of water that you may wash
yourselves, for you look remarkably dirty."
This I have no doubt we did. Charley thanked the captain in the name of
us all. Captain Roderick then told us to remain in the prison while he
went on to the king and obtained our release in a formal manner; it
would be better, he said, than running the risk of offending the king,
who would probably be displeased should we walk out without his
permission.
We accordingly returned and sat ourselves down to wait the arrival of
the pirate captain and the king's officers. Strange to say, all this
time Captain Roderick had not recognised Harry, nor had he me as the
clerk who had overheard the accusation brought against him by Captain
Magor. Perhaps had he done so his conduct might have been different.
We were all getting very hungry, having eaten nothing since noon the
previous day; we were also becoming more and more impatient, when we
heard footsteps approaching, and Captain Roderick, accompanied by the
king himself and several of his attendants, opened the door. The king
made a speech, intending, as we supposed, to apologise to us. He then
led the way to another house, far superior to the hut we had occupied.
It was clean and airy, with a veranda in front and a garden full of
fruit trees and vegetables behind. Shortly afterwards an ample supply
of all sorts of provisions was brought to us, and what we valued in no
less degree, some huge bowls of water. I shall not forget in a hurry
the satisfaction of washing, though we each of us had only a pocket
handkerchief with which to dry ourselves, and that none of the cleanest.
After breakfast, we summoned the slaves who had brought us the water to
procure a further supply, in which we washed our under garments, hanging
them up afterwards to dry in the garden. This they did in a very few
minutes, for the sun in that latitude does its work with marvellous
rapidity.
In consequence of meeting with Captain Roderick we abandoned our idea of
attempting to get off by stealth, thinking that it would be wiser to
take our departure openly with the leave of the king. We had not been
long in the house when Captain Roderick, accompanied as he always was by
Growler, came to see us and advised that we should remain indoors. "I
have a rival here in that ugly rascal Mundungo. He is jealous of the
favour shown to me by the king, to whom I have recounted the true
history of your capture, and I told his majesty that, instead of being
taken after a tremendous fight, you were surprised and surrounded before
you had time to defend yourselves. Mundungo has found that I have told
the king the truth, and he is exceedingly indignant, although he is too
much afraid of me to say anything. He will not, however, scruple to
injure you if he has the opportunity."
While he was speaking, Mundungo himself appeared, his countenance
exhibiting the hatred which raged in his bosom.
"Beware what you are about," he exclaimed. "You have attempted to
malign me to the king. Remember I possess the most powerful fetish in
the world."
"A fig for your fetish!" exclaimed the captain, drawing his huge dagger.
"I possess a more potent fetish than you do. Look at that, and then
look at this animal. What do you think of him? In two minutes, if I
were to tell him, he would tear you limb from limb, and your wretched
fetish could not help you. Now go and talk to your silly countrymen
about your fetish, but don't come and attempt to impose such nonsense on
me," and the captain turned aside with a haughty air.
Mundungo was defeated. Muttering and growling he walked away along the
street towards his own residence. The captain set up a loud laugh in
which we could not help joining, while Growler uttered one of his
terrific barks, which made the brave general take to his heels and
scamper away as hard as he could go.
Captain Roderick again burst into a loud laugh. "I have settled the
fellow for the present, but depend upon it, if he can he will do you and
me harm, we must guard against that I have hitherto, since I came among
these people, kept the upper hand, partly by my independent bearing, and
partly owing to the fears they entertain of Growler; who, on several
occasions, has given me timely warning when Mundungo and his supporters
have attempted to murder me, which they have still a strong desire to
do. Although I have obtained your liberty, I cannot answer for your
safety. If they fail to shoot you with their arrows, or to spear you,
they may try the effects of poison, and against that you must be
specially on your guard. Fortunately, they are no great adepts in the
art, but it will be safer to take only such food as it cannot be mixed
with, such as eggs, birds, and plantains, and fruit, and joints of
meat."
We thanked Captain Roderick for his advice, which we promised to follow
as long as we remained in the place.
"But," continued Charley, "as you may suppose, we are very anxious to
get away as soon as possible. We believe that if we could obtain a
good-sized canoe, we could easily navigate her down the river."
"You may depend upon it, gentlemen, that I will do what I can to
persuade the king to allow you to go, and I have no wish to have any one
interfering with my proceedings here, which you probably might be
tempted to do were you to remain."
"But we have no wish to interfere with you, Captain Roderick," said
Charley; "we are grateful for the service you have already rendered us,
and should be very glad if you would accompany us down the river, for I
am very sure you will soon get tired of living among these savages."
"I shall never return to civilised life, at all events in my own land,"
answered Captain Roderick gloomily. "Do not mention the subject to me
again. I will help you more on my own account than on yours, for I
would rather be alone with these black fellows than herding with white
men. Let me advise you to remain in your house at present, until I have
time to talk with the king, who is at present too drunk to understand
me. I cannot promise that you will immediately obtain leave to go, or
be furnished with a canoe for the purpose, but it will not be my fault
if, in the meantime, you are not well treated."
As we agreed that it would be wise to follow the pirate's advice, we
re-entered our house, intending to remain there until summoned by him to
pay our respects to the king, when his majesty had recovered
sufficiently to give us an audience. Behind the house was a garden of
sufficient size to enable us to enjoy some fresh air under the trees
without the risk of being molested by the natives.
CHAPTER FOURTEEN.
THE KING PROPOSES TO SEND US OUT ON A HUNTING EXPEDITION--CAPTAIN
RODERICK RECOGNISES HARRY AND ME IN OUR TRUE CHARACTERS--THE START FOR
THE CHASE--A PLEASANT SURPRISE--WE MEET PRINCE KENDO WHO HAS COMMAND OF
THE PARTY--A SUCCESSFUL DAY--CHARLEY AS A HUNTER--THE RETURN--CAPTAIN
RODERICK'S MYSTERIOUS WARNING--HIS SORROW AT HIS OWN WASTED LIFE--THE
LOSS OF GROWLER--ILLNESS OF THE QUEEN--THE WITCH-DOCTOR SENT FOR--WE ARE
AGAIN FORCED TO GO HUNTING--STRANGE ARRIVAL IN CAMP OF THE TWO PIRATES--
A DANGEROUS MAN--MURDER OF CAPTAIN RODERICK--EFFECT OF HIS DEATH ON THE
BLACKS--THE SOLITARY GRAVE--CONTINUATION OF THE HUNT--ENCOUNTER WITH A
WILD MAN OF THE WOODS--RETURN TO THE VILLAGE WITH A QUANTITY OF GAME.
We had now been six months in Africa, and, wonderful to relate, none of
us had been ill or even hurt, with the exception of Tom. We, however,
often felt sad, not on our own account, but on that of the loved ones at
home, who, we knew, would be suffering intense anxiety about us, even if
they did not suppose that we had lost our lives. As Tom remarked, we
knew very well where we were and what we hoped to be able to do, but
those at home knew nothing, but that ship after ship arrived and no
tidings of us reached them.
A thick, black wall, as it were, intervened between them and us, through
which their loving eyes could not penetrate. How we longed for some
bird of rapid wing to carry home a message for us.
Captain Roderick did not come near us for the remainder of the day. The
following morning, however, he appeared, saying that the king would not
hear of our going away, as he wanted to employ us for elephant hunting,
under the belief that with our rifles we should obtain a far greater
number of tusks than could his own people.
"You will be well-fed, and as the sport is highly exciting, I don't
think you have any cause to complain," said the Captain.
"That may depend upon circumstances," observed Charley. "When are we to
set out?"
"To-morrow, or perhaps the next day; as soon as the hunters are ready.
They only returned from an expedition a few days ago and require time to
rest."
While the Captain was speaking, I saw him eyeing Harry and me in a far
more searching manner than he had done before. Suddenly he asked me my
name. I told him without hesitation,--indeed, I supposed all along that
he must have known it. He then turned to Harry, and I saw his
countenance change as Harry replied, "My name is Bracewell."
The Captain started as Harry spoke, and as he looked at him a frown
gathered on his brow.
"I might have known you before, but your dress and sunburnt countenances
deceived me. When I first saw you on board the `Arrow'--"
"Captain Roderick, let bygones be bygones!" exclaimed Charley, who had
heard from me all that had happened in England between Captain Roderick
and my friend--"Do not let us refer to the past. Here we are, five
Englishmen together among savages. If we quarrel our destruction is
certain. We can help you and you can help us."
The captain's features resumed their usual look, showing that he was
somewhat moved by this address.
"I have no quarrel with any of you, and have already shown you my
readiness to render you assistance. I have told you that I will exert
my influence with the king to procure your release, and I intend to keep
my promise."
Captain Roderick did not long remain with us; he went away, as he said,
to have a talk with the king.
"My idea is, that that fellow wants us to stop and hunt for him,"
observed Charley. "Depend upon it he would take possession of the tusks
of the elephants we killed. It may be wise in us, however, to do so for
the sake of procuring our liberty."
"He has got a hand over us at present, and as we cannot help ourselves,
we had better make the best of a bad job," observed Tom.
Accordingly, the next morning, when we saw a number of people collecting
in the square, armed for the chase, we agreed that, if invited, we would
accompany them without showing any objection. We had just taken our
breakfast, when we saw a young man approaching, who by the ornaments he
wore on his arms and ankles, the chain round his neck, and the circlet
of feathers on his head, we knew to be a person of consequence.
"Why, I believe he's no other than the young fellow who married Miss
Iguma," said Tom; "and if so, he ought to help us, for if it hadn't been
for you, Mr Westerton, the young lady would have lost her life."
Prince Kendo at once knew us, indeed, I suspect he was well aware of our
being in the village, but had kept out of the way, supposing that we
were enemies of Captain Roderick's, and not wishing to offend him. He
now, however, came forward in a friendly manner, and invited us to
accompany him on the hunting expedition of which he was to be the
leader.
As agreed, we accepted it and joined his party of about fifty men. Soon
after leaving the village a couple of hundred more, coming from various
quarters, united with us, until we formed quite a little army. We
marched along for a whole day, however, without seeing any elephants,
although we came upon smaller game, of which, for the sake of the meat,
we killed several. Charley was fortunate enough to knock over a
buffalo, and Harry and I each killed a deer. Tom shot two hogs--
curious-looking creatures, the most active of the pig species. Those
which made their escape leapt over the trunks of trees several feet
high, and a stream five or six yards broad. They were enormous
creatures, having red bodies and white faces, on which were several
lumps between the nose and the eyes, which latter were surrounded by
long bristles, while their ears were exceedingly long, having at their
tips tufts of coarse hair. We knocked over several monkeys, and a huge
ape, just as it was about to strike a man who had approached and had had
his spear snatched out of his hand.
Prince Kendo complimented us, and evidently looked upon us as great
hunters. After encamping for the night, as was usual, we again set out,
and just as we reached the edge of the forest, beyond which was a plain,
we caught sight of a huge elephant standing by himself, while he kept
flapping his ears and whisking round his tail. As we watched him the
trees around him looked like mere shrubs, so vast was his size. Charley
insisted on shooting him. Kendo, as he looked at the animal, whispered
that he was afraid that he would make for the open plain should his own
men attempt to kill him. On this Charley volunteered to shoot the huge
creature. I felt very anxious about it, but he said that he was
confident, unless his rifle failed him, that he should kill the beast.
Having ascertained the way the wind was blowing, we made a slight round
so as to get to leeward. We got behind some trees, while Charley,
imitating the native way of approaching the enormous creatures, stooped
down among the grass, and began to creep up slowly towards the elephant,
keeping himself entirely concealed, while only occasionally could we get
a glimpse of him to assure us that he was moving on. I regretted that I
had not insisted on accompanying him, to fire in case he should miss,
though he himself had no apprehensions on that score. For several
minutes we could perceive no motion in the long grass. Not a word was
spoken. No sound came from any part of the forest, except that we
fancied we could hear the flapping of the elephant's ears. For a few
seconds even that ceased, and then there came a sharp report, ringing
through the forest and across the plain. I dashed forward and saw the
elephant raise its trunk in the air, and move on as if about to destroy
its enemy, but the instant afterwards the trunk dropped, the huge animal
staggered, and down it came with a crash on the shrubs and rotten wood
beneath the trees. Charley started up scarcely three yards from where
the creature fell. Numbers of monkeys and birds shrieking and screaming
clambered chattering away amid the branches, or flew off across the
plain at the report of Charley's rifle, while the blacks came rushing
forward, shouting and congratulating him and us on the success of his
shot. Never had they seen an animal brought down so suddenly. This was
the first elephant we had killed on the expedition. Charley killed two
others from the ground, while Harry and I each shot one while we were
perched on a tree, a far safer, if not so honourable a position. All
the natives together had, in the meantime, only killed three, by
piercing them with their spears, and they had lost two men crushed by
the monsters' feet. Altogether, Kendo acknowledged that it was the most
successful hunting expedition he had ever engaged in, while our success
raised us greatly in the estimation of the blacks, but also made them
more anxious than ever to retain us. We were well aware of this, and
came to the conclusion that if we were to get away, it must be by
stealth, as we had escaped from the other savages. On approaching the
village, we were met by some women howling and wailing, and on inquiring
the reason, we were informed that queen Hugga Mugga, the favourite wife
of the king, was desperately ill, and had been bewitched, and that the
king had sent for a learned sorcerer to discover the guilty persons. On
inquiring for Captain Roderick we found also that he, during our
absence, had been away. We saw him, however, coming along the street.
Charley and I went out to meet him, advising Harry to keep in the house.
He appeared to be in a very different humour to that in which we had
before seen him. He appeared greatly out of spirits. Seating himself
in our veranda, without attempting to enter the house, he turned to
Charley.
"You have been more successful even than I expected," he said, "and I
have to compliment you on your skilful hunting. You might remain out
here and make your fortunes in a very short time, but I suspect that
your lives would not be safe in this place. You have already excited
the jealousy and hatred of Mundungo, and he is, I have discovered, a
friend or relative of the fetish doctor who has been sent for, and will
probably accuse you of causing, by your incantations, the illness of
Kickubaroo's wife. Come here," and he approached a palm tree which grew
on one side of the house, from which he cut a long branch. "If I
ascertain that you are in danger, I will find means to send you a
similar branch to this, in the basket with your provisions, in which
case do not leave the house until nightfall, then, as soon as the people
have gone to their houses, and are asleep, make your way directly to the
bank of the river, where I will cause two canoes to be prepared with
paddles and food in them. Embark at once, and make your way down the
stream. You must not ask why I did not long ago follow the course I
advise you to take."
I was struck by the man's melancholy countenance and the mournful tone
in which he spoke, so different to his usual overbearing confident
language.
Charley and I expressed our thanks, feeling more pity for him than we
had ever done before. Keeping the palm branch in his hand, he resumed
his seat in the veranda, then turning to me he said--
"If you ever reach home, tell my brother that you met me, and that I
asked his forgiveness for my conduct towards him. I do not suppose that
he will withhold it, when he knows that I intend never again to resume
my former mode of life. I wish I could feel as certain that all my sins
are forgiven."
I pointed out to him the only way by which man's sins can be forgiven.
He turned his head from me, and said abruptly to Charley--
"You must be surprised at the change you perceive has come over me."
"For some reasons I am glad of it," answered Charley, "although I hope
it is not because you feel yourself suffering from illness."
"No," answered Captain Roderick, "I am as well as ever, still I believe
that my days are numbered. My enemies here have succeeded in destroying
my faithful dog Growler. While you were away I missed him while out
shooting, and after some time he crawled back to me with a poisoned
arrow sticking in his ribs. I drew it out, hoping that the flow of
blood would prevent the poison taking effect. In less than ten minutes
he was seized with violent convulsions, between the paroxysms of which
he endeavoured to lick my hand, and gasped out his last breath in the
attempt. He was the only friend I ever had in the world in whom I could
truly trust."
After sitting some time, Captain Roderick took up his gun and hat, which
he had placed by his side while enjoying the shade of the veranda, and
proceeded towards the house he inhabited, close to that occupied by the
king. Going in we told Harry what Captain Roderick had said.
"He exhibits very little true remorse and sorrow for his misdeeds," said
Harry; "like many men with fierce, ill-regulated minds, he is overcome
with superstitious fears, and probably his present temper will not last
very long. I only hope he will give us warning in due time, and enable
us to make our escape, we shall then have good reason to thank him."
We were now expecting the arrival of the witch-doctor, who, however, we
discovered lived at a considerable distance, and might not make his
appearance for two or three days. We scarcely supposed, however, that
he would accuse us of bewitching the queen. We felt, indeed, rather a
curiosity to see how he would proceed, than any fear of bad consequences
to ourselves. Soon after Captain Roderick's visit, Prince Kendo
appeared, and invited us to accompany him that evening on another
shooting expedition. Some elephants, he said, had been seen a short
distance off up the river, and as there was plenty of the food they
liked thereabouts they would not probably have gone away. As we were
glad of something to do, we accepted the offer, and all four of us, with
Aboh and Shimbo, set out with the party the prince had already
collected, and who were waiting at the outskirts of the village. It was
too dark, however, by the time we reached the part of the forest where
the elephants had been seen to go in search of them. We therefore
encamped, and lighted a fire to cook the provisions we had brought with
us. Soon after we had begun supper, two figures appeared from amidst
the brushwood surrounding the open spot we had selected for our camp.
The gleam of the fire fell upon them. We saw by their dress and faces
that they were white men. Their haggard countenances showed that they
were suffering from hunger. Tom Tubbs, who had started to his feet,
advanced a few paces towards them--
"Why, as I live," he exclaimed, "I think I know you fellows."
"Like enough you do, mate," answered one of the men, "like enough you
do, but before you have any palaver, just hand us out some of that grub,
and a drink of water or anything stronger if you've got it, for we are
well-nigh famished."
"So you look," said Tom; "sit down, the gentlemen here will be glad
enough to share their provisions with you, so will this nigger prince,
and after that we will hear what you have got to tell about yourselves."
The men without uttering another word sat down close to the fire, and
eagerly seizing the food we offered them, began munching away in a style
which fully confirmed the account they had given of their famished
state.
Looking at their countenances more narrowly, I at once recognised the
two seamen, Caspar Caper and Herman Jansen, who had escaped during the
massacre of the Frenchmen.
The two men exhibited a marked contrast, and it seemed surprising that
they should have associated together. Caspar seemed a good-natured,
honest fellow, and as soon as he had satisfied his hunger, he began to
laugh and joke with Tom, and to describe the adventures they had gone
through, while Jansen sat moody and silent, a frown on his brow, and his
looks averted from us. Even when Tom spoke to him he answered only in
monosyllables, or did not answer at all, holding out the gourd which had
been given him for a further supply of palm-wine.
"I shouldn't like to meet that fellow by myself were I unarmed in a dark
place, he looks as if he would attempt to kill a man merely for the
satisfaction of committing murder," whispered Charley to me; "I wonder
he has not before now shot his companion, and I suspect that only the
desire of self-preservation has restrained him."
I fully agreed with my brother, and we settled that we would not allow
him to associate with us more than we could help. At present common
humanity demanded that we should give him food, and such protection as
we might be able to afford against the savages. After eating and
drinking as much as he required, he got up and strolled away from the
camp towards the lake, the shore of which was at no great distance.
We now spoke more freely about him. Harry suggested that hunger and
privation had given him the expression we remarked in his features, and
that he might notwithstanding be a useful addition to our party, and
assist us, should we make our escape, in navigating our canoe down the
river.
"What's the matter with your friend?" I asked, turning to Caspar.
"He's in one of his sulks," was the answer; "he is often like that, and
I have been in fear of my life over and over again, but I have kept an
eye upon him, and generally managed to get hold of his long sheath
knife, and to hide it until he got better again. Lately he has become
worse, and I would have left him had I been able to do so. My idea is,
that he'll do some harm to himself, or he will try to kill some one
else, and if he had a gun I should not think any one of us was safe
sitting down here."
"Should there be a chance of his injuring himself, it is our duty to try
and prevent him," observed Harry, "we must deprive him of his weapon,
and watch him narrowly. Perhaps after he has been well-fed for a few
days he may recover his temper. I think it would be as well now to go
and watch him, and see that he doesn't throw himself into the lake."
I agreed with Harry, and both getting up accompanied by Caspar, we
walked on in the direction Jansen had taken.
The moon which had just risen, afforded us light sufficient to make our
way through the forest, which was here not so thick as in most places.
We had gone some little way, when we reached an open spot or glade close
to the lake.
"Stop here," said Caspar, "I think I see him coming along, it is as well
he should not discover us."
We concealed ourselves behind some bushes. We could hear approaching
footsteps, and thought that Jansen, having gone on some way, had turned
back and intended to rejoin us at the camp. Just then I saw that the
figure of the person approaching was not that of Herman Jansen, but of
Captain Roderick. I concluded that he had followed us intending to
treat with Prince Kendo for the ivory we had procured, or else that he
had come to warn us of some danger to which we might be exposed, should
we return to the village. I was on the point of stepping out of our
place of concealment to go and meet him, when another person sprang up
from behind a bank where he had been concealed, with a large knife in
his hand, and before I could cry out to warn the captain, the other had
plunged the weapon into his breast. With one piercing cry Captain
Roderick fell back, while his assailant having driven the weapon home,
left it sticking in the wound, and with a howl like a wild beast plunged
into the forest, which immediately hid him from our sight. We all
hurried forward, eager to give assistance to the wounded man; Caspar
drew out the knife.
"Yes," he said, "this was Jansen's, he had vowed vengeance against the
captain, and we had good reason to hate him, but this is a foul cowardly
deed notwithstanding."
Harry and I meantime lifted up the wounded man; his arms dropped
downwards, not a groan, not a breath escaped him, his eyes were fixed
and staring in death. The weapon had struck too deeply home for human
power to save him. His spirit had fled. We notwithstanding sent Caspar
back to obtain assistance, that we might carry the body to the camp.
In a short time Caspar returned with Charley and Tom and several blacks.
A litter was formed, and we conveyed him to the camp. Though we had
every reason to dislike the man who had been the cause of all the
hardships and sufferings we were enduring, yet we felt no animosity
towards him, and were horror-struck at his appalling death. Prince
Kendo expressed his astonishment at the captain's death. What he said
was to the effect that he thought that no human power could injure him,
"but I now see that white men can die like black men," he observed with
a peculiar expression which made us feel that it would be dangerous to
offend the black Prince.
"But it was a white man that killed him, remember that," said Tom, "the
black fellows, from what I hear, tried it very often but could not
succeed."
"Yes, that was the case, but he had a friendly spirit always by to
protect him, but that got killed at last, and so you see his power
departed from him."
The prince alluded to Growler, whose death we thus discovered was well
known, although Captain Roderick had endeavoured to conceal the fact.
"The sooner we bury the poor fellow the better," observed Charley.
"While he is in their sight the blacks will be thinking about him, and
being reminded how easily a white man is killed, they may take it into
their heads to try and put us out of the way, and possess themselves of
our guns and the contents of our knapsacks."
We accordingly asked Kendo to allow some of his people to assist us in
digging a grave. Though they at first showed some indications of fear,
yet on Tom suggesting that the spirit of the dead man would haunt them
if they did not, they eagerly set about the work, and saved us any
trouble whatever. At first they made only a shallow hole, but Tom told
them that that would never do, that it was necessary to bury a white man
very far down in the earth, as they had such potent spirits that they
would otherwise quickly force their way up again. On this they eagerly
recommenced their labours, and managed to dig a grave six feet deep. We
were going to put the body into it, when Tom advised that we should
examine his pockets, and take possession of any documents or valuables
he might have about him. We found nothing, however, except some
ammunition, a knife, and a tinder-box. Not a line or document of any
sort to prove his identity. Had we not witnessed his death, or
discovered his body, no one would have known how he met with his
untimely end. Like many another evil-doer, he would have disappeared
from the face of the earth and left no trace behind him.
At a late hour we lay down to rest. By Harry's advice, however, one of
us kept awake lest the blacks should attempt to play us any trick, or,
as was very likely, lest they should all go to sleep, and a leopard
steal into the camp and carry some one of us off, or a troop of
elephants come rushing along and trample us under foot. Next morning,
although we were very unwilling to continue the hunt, judging it safer
to get back to the village and attempt to make our escape without delay,
Prince Kendo insisted that we should remain, promising that we should
have a share of the tusks of any elephants we might kill.
We thought it wise to make a virtue of necessity, but determined, should
we find a canoe on the banks of the river, to appropriate it, and
without taking leave to make our way down the stream.
We had not gone far when our ears were saluted by a terrific roar which
seemed to come from the depths of the forest. My companions looked at
each other, wondering what animal could produce the sound. Roar
succeeded roar, and I guessed it must come from one of the big man apes
which I had before encountered. Charley and Harry, upon my telling
them, were both eager to see the creature, and keeping our guns in
readiness we approached the spot whence the fearful sounds proceeded.
The roars were accompanied by a loud drumming noise, followed by a
fierce bark-like yelp, which, as Harry observed, sounded like the
horrible ravings of a madman. Kendo and several of the other blacks
accompanied us, but kept well in our rear, ready to take to flight
should we fail to kill the beast. "There he is," exclaimed Charley,
"let one fire at a time. Dick, you fire first, if you miss I'll have a
shot at him, and if I miss, Tom, you must take the next shot, and you,
Harry, must be in reserve. Remember that our lives will depend upon the
steadiness of your aim."
These arrangements had just been made when the boughs were put aside by
a pair of long arms, and the next instant a huge hairy creature, with a
hideous countenance, appeared in sight, advancing slowly into the open;
I could distinguish its fierce eyes glowing at us, the face black and
wrinkled, and distorted with rage, as it came forward balancing its
monstrous body with its long arms, while at every few seconds it stopped
and beat its breast, at the same time throwing back its head to give
utterance to one of its tremendous roars. We might have been excused
had we really taken it for a forest demon, for nothing which the
imagination of man has pictured could be more calculated to inspire its
beholders with awe.
The natives ceased their chattering and drew back. The creature still
advanced, but every now and then stopped to sit down and roar. One
circumstance, however, showed that its power was limited. Its legs were
short and slight, and unable firmly to sustain its huge body, they
tottered beneath its weight. While it hobbled forward it had a somewhat
ridiculous appearance, which made Tom burst into a loud laugh. This
seemed to increase the creature's rage; unable to spring forward, it sat
down and began to roar and beat its breast. Once more it rose with the
aid of its long arms, and advanced. I waited until it was about ten
yards off, when I fired, half expecting, however, to see the animal when
the smoke cleared off still coming towards us. I was prepared to spring
back to let Charley fire, when throwing up its arms down it came with a
crash to the ground. The blacks set up a shout of triumph.
"Take care, sirs, a bite from those big teeth would not be pleasant,"
exclaimed Tom, as he saw Harry and me rushing forward.
The creature, however, made no movement, and the blacks coming up,
turned it over without ceremony and thrust the end of their spears into
its eyes to show that it was dead. They then began singing and dancing
around it in triumph, as they would round the body of a dead human
enemy, indeed, even now I could scarcely persuade myself that the
creature had not something human in it. It was not until very many
years afterwards that I ascertained that this man ape, as I have called
it, was what is now known as the gorilla. When I afterwards described
it in England, no one would believe that it was of the size I have
mentioned, and I got credit for indulging in travellers' tales.
The natives at once skinned the beast and then cut the body into pieces,
which they afterwards cooked and ate with great gusto. None of us,
however, could persuade ourselves to touch it.
We later in the day killed three elephants, much in the way I have
before described, and early next morning our party, carrying the skin of
the ape and the elephants' tusks, with large quantities of meat,
returned to the village.
CHAPTER FIFTEEN.
OUR AUDIENCE WITH THE KING--THE FALL OF A COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF--
UNSATISFACTORY TERMINATION OF OUR INTERVIEW--IN DESPAIR WE WANDER ALONG
THE RIVER BANK--PLANS FOR ESCAPE--MAKING PADDLES--KENDO'S WIFE IGUMA
UNDERTAKES TO ASSIST US--ARRIVAL OF THE FETISH DOCTOR--HE HAS RECOURSE
TO THE "BLACK ART OF MAGIC," AND DENOUNCES SHIMBO, IGUMA, AND OTHERS, AS
THE CAUSE OF THE QUEEN'S DEATH--CRUEL SACRIFICE OF SHIMBO--FLIGHT OF
IGUMA AND HER HUSBAND, WITH WHOM WE EFFECT OUR ESCAPE--ON THE LAKE--
CHARLEY AND I MISS OUR COMPANIONS IN THE DARKNESS--ON DAYLIGHT RETURNING
WE FIND OURSELVES NEAR THE SHORE--WE ARE SURPRISED BY NATIVES AND
ATTACKED--REPULSE OF THE ENEMY--BRAVERY OF IGUMA.
In the course of the morning we reached our house, which we had left in
charge of Shimbo. We had the satisfaction of finding that none of our
knapsacks had been touched. We invited Caspar to join us, which he,
poor fellow, was very glad to do. Nothing had been seen of Jansen; we
supposed that he had either thrown himself into the river, or been
seized by a wild beast. We were surprised to find that the witch-doctor
had not yet arrived, and therefore hoped that something had detained
him, and that by his not coming the people whom he would accuse of
witchcraft, should he appear, might escape death. We thought that the
king might possibly not have heard of the death of Captain Roderick, and
after duly discussing the subject, we came to the conclusion that it
would be wise while the king was still impressed with the belief of his
almost superhuman powers, to request leave to proceed on our journey.
As it was still early in the day, we hoped to find his majesty tolerably
sober, and capable of listening to reason. We accordingly issued forth
from our house with our knapsacks on our shoulders, and our guns in our
hands, Harry and Aboh ready to act as spokesmen, Charley and I coming
next, and Tom and Caspar with Shimbo bringing up the rear. We found the
king seated in a sort of broad veranda in front of his house, which
served him as an audience chamber. On one side was his fetish or idol
house. At the further end was a huge hideous figure painted in various
colours; with big goggle eyes, and clothed in robes of matting, and
adorned with feathers of various hues. Numerous other idols were placed
against the walls, most of them bearing but the very faintest
resemblance to human figures--big round eyes, and marks for noses, and
grinning mouths, with teeth set in them, showing for what they were
intended. The king, with his round hat on his head, and his red uniform
coat covering his royal body, was seated on a pile of mats with a bottle
by his side, while one or two empty ones lay outside on the floor,
showing how he had already been spending his morning. Several of his
counsellors and other chief men sat at a little distance on either side
of him, discussing, apparently, affairs of state.
We waited until there seemed to be a pause, when we advanced in a bold
manner, and Harry began an address, thanking the king for the
hospitality he had shown us, and the opportunities we had enjoyed of
seeing some sport, and adding "that now, having done all the service we
could, we were desirous of going down the river, as we were anxious to
get on board one of the ships of our country, which we expected to find
at the mouth of the stream."
The king rolled his eyes round as Harry spoke, apparently not
understanding a word; he then turned to his courtiers, desiring them to
explain what the white man said.
This was more than even the most learned of his attendants could do,
for, although they were more sober than their master, they also had had
a pull at the bottles. Fortunately the king did not appeal to us, but
again and again asked them what we had said. At length starting up he
called them all by the most opprobrious names, insisting that they
should interpret, then seizing a cane, which he probably thought was a
sword, he ordered them to go about their business, bestowing a kick on
the rear of first one, and then on another, sending them all flying away
from him, the commander-in-chief, who maintained his post to the last,
receiving a blow from the monarch's foot as he endeavoured to leap down
the steps, which sent him flying away some fifty yards, when down he
sprawled with his nose in the dust, kicking up his heels in the air.
The king having accomplished this feat, no longer able to stand, rolled
back in his seat, where he continued kicking out with his legs, shaking
his hands, and blubbering away, exclaiming, "that he could get no wisdom
out of his counsellors, who were a useless, lazy set." He then looking
up, inquired in husky tones, "What we wanted?"
Harry once more endeavoured to explain our object in coming, but all his
efforts were vain to make the king comprehend a word he said. Aboh then
tried, with the same want of success. The king, who in the meantime had
taken a pull at another bottle, evidently felt no inclination to rise,
and comforted himself by showering abuse on Aboh's head and ours,
bestowing upon him all sorts of opprobrious epithets.
At last, as it was very evident that we could get nothing out of the
monarch, we beat a retreat in as dignified a manner as possible, and
retired to our house, more resolved than ever to take French leave
before many days were over, should we have the opportunity.
The king's attendants wisely kept out of his way when he was in his
drunken fits, and shut themselves up in their houses, or left the
village, lest he might take a fancy to cut off any of their heads. We,
finding the road open to the river, determined to make an excursion
along the banks in the hope of discovering some canoes fit for our
purpose. Keeping our guns ready for action, we sauntered along near the
river, though we pretended to take that road merely for the sake of the
fresh breeze which blew off the water. We spied four or five canoes; in
none of them, however, could we see paddles, and without some such means
of propulsion they would be useless. How to procure the paddles was the
difficulty. They were probably in the houses of the owners, and it was
a question whether these owners would part with the paddles, and whether
it would be safe to enter into a bargain with them, lest they should
betray us to the king.
"To my mind, the best thing we can do, sir, is to make some paddles for
ourselves," observed Tom Tubbs.
"Of course," answered Charley; "we can work away as soon as it is dark,
and have them ready by to-morrow night. Longer than that we must not
stay in this horrible place, we shall have wood enough for our purpose
in the building, by pulling down part of the rear of our house, where it
won't be missed, or from the trees in our garden, or part of the
fencing. We should have a paddle for each person, as we shall require
two or three canoes to convey all our party."
This matter settled, we were about to return, when we saw a female at
the door of one of the largest houses near the water, at the end of the
village which we had just reached. She appeared to be beckoning to us;
we went forward, and great was our surprise to find that she was no
other than Iguma, the young lady I had saved from the ape, and whose
marriage with Prince Kendo I had afterwards witnessed. Feeling sure
that gratitude would animate a female bosom, I asked Harry to tell her
the difficulty in which we were placed, and, throwing ourselves on her
generosity, entreat her to assist us in escaping. She seemed much
pleased at seeing us, and at once recognised me, and said she had not
forgotten the service I had done her. We then informed her how we were
situated. She at once said she would do all she could to help us, but
that her power, she was afraid, was very limited. She complained that
her husband was constantly away on shooting expeditions, and that she
held his drunken uncle, King Kickubaroo, in great awe, and that he
evidently had no affection for her. She told us that we need have no
fear about canoes, as her husband had three or four which were hauled up
on the bank inside a yard, close to which we then were, and that by
climbing over the fence we should find them at any time ready for use.
As to paddles, she acknowledged that they were generally kept shut up in
the house, to prevent the canoes being taken away, but that she would
try and place them on board the following evening as soon it was dark.
Thus all was quickly arranged for our attempt to escape.
As soon as we got back to our house we looked about for wood suitable to
form paddles, not wishing to trust entirely to those with which Iguma
might supply us. We had no difficulty in finding an ample supply of
material for our purpose, although we thought it prudent not to begin
working it up until darkness should prevent the risk of what we were
about being discovered. We were thus employed when we heard a
tremendous noise proceeding from the house in which the king's wife lay
sick. On looking out we saw it surrounded by people, who were singing,
and shouting, and shrieking, and dancing, with all their might; some
beating tom-toms and drums; others blowing horns and shaking rattles,
all uniting in a hideous chorus. The object of this, Aboh told us, was
to drive out the evil spirit which was making the queen ill.
"It was a signal," he said, "that the fetish doctor, who had been so
long coming, was about to arrive, and that his canoe was probably seen
descending the river."
As we thought it prudent to keep out of the way of the people, we
remained in the house, although we would very gladly have got to a
distance to escape from the uproar. We had cooked our dinner and were
eating it, when Aboh, who had been to the door, came back and told us
that the doctor had arrived, and was beginning his incantations. As we
were curious to see what he was about, we went a short distance from the
house, where, remaining concealed behind a fence, we could observe what
was going forward without ourselves being seen. The doctor had dressed
himself up to look as hideous as possible. On his head he wore a huge
and lofty plume of black feathers drooping down on all sides; his face
was painted white, with red stripes over his eyes, and others in
different parts of his face. A case was suspended by a piece of rope
round his neck, which was also adorned by a necklace of human bones,
while a girdle of a similar description was fastened round his waist, to
which was suspended a sort of apron. He had taken his seat on a stool,
round which were hides and the horns of several animals, a leopard's
skin, and more cases containing charms. In one hand he held a rattle,
and in the other a wand. Near him stood two attendants, one beating a
small drum, and the other a couple of sticks. For sometime he continued
uttering all sorts of gibberish, which I do not think was intelligible
to any even of his hearers, while his attendants played on their
instruments--if playing it could be called. He then took up a horn,
from which he shook a quantity of black powder in the air, and regarded
it gravely as it fell. It was sad to think that human beings could be
deceived by so gross an imposture, but yet it was very evident that all
the people present watched the proceedings with the utmost awe and
respect. After a dead silence the people again shouted out, though what
they said it was impossible to understand, but I shall never forget the
alarmed looks Aboh and Shimbo exchanged. At length the shouting ceased,
when the doctor began to shriek, making his voice sound like the
croaking of a whole flock of birds of prey about to descend on a dead
carcase. Then he stopped, and slowly pronounced several names.
If ever black man turned white, Aboh and Shimbo did on that occasion.
Poor fellows, they understood the meaning of what was said better than
we did. Again the people shouted and shrieked in the most savage
manner, indeed, no words can describe the hideous noise they made.
"Go back to the house, go back," cried Aboh.
We followed his advice, but ere we could reach our dwelling the crowd
had rushed towards us. Unfortunately we had come out without our arms.
The infuriated blacks did not attempt to touch us, but before we could
prevent it, they had seized Shimbo and dragged him off, although we
succeeded, by knocking down with our fists those who came near us, in
hauling Aboh into the house. We at once shut the door, seized our
rifles, and stood prepared for a desperate resistance. Contrary to our
expectations, the mob, having got possession of one of our followers,
retreated with him up the street. Scarcely had they gone than we heard
a knocking at the door, and finding that there was only one person
present we opened it, and Prince Kendo entered.
"Ah, white men, save my wife," he exclaimed, "the doctor has accused her
of bewitching the queen, and should her majesty die, nothing will save
my poor Iguma, her head will to a certainty be cut off."
We all at once exclaimed that we would endeavour to save her, if he
could point out the best way we could do so.
"Shall we go to the king and ask her life?"
Aboh shook his head, and declared that it would be utterly useless.
"The king was bound to kill her with his own hand if the doctor accused
her of causing the queen's death."
"The queen is not dead yet," said Harry.
"No, but she may die to-night, for she is much worse than she has been
before, and frightened out of her wits by the noise the people make."
"Then what do you propose we should do?" said Harry.
"Carry her away. You intend going yourselves, I will go too, I should
like to see your country and the wonderful things it contains, and I had
made up my mind to propose going, even if this had not happened. I
should like to take my wife with me, for whatever you may think, I love
her dearly."
On hearing this, we resolved at once to put our long projected plan into
execution. Kendo's assistance would be of great value, as he had canoes
at hand, and could aid us in getting away. We advised Kendo to go back
and hide his wife, should he not have the means of protecting her, lest
the people might come and seize her at once, and we promised to be at
the house or at any spot he might appoint as soon as possible after
dark.
He stopped for a moment to consider.
"Come to my house," he answered, "the canoes will be ready, and so will
Iguma; but be prepared to fight, for if the people come and find out
that we are going to carry her off, they will try to prevent it. Better
fight than lose Iguma."
We of course promised, unless prevented by any unforeseen occurrence,
that we would do as he proposed, feeling confident that we could trust
to his honesty, and that he had a real desire to save his wife from the
horrible fate which threatened her. We had not in the meantime
forgotten poor Shimbo. Aboh constantly cried out--
"Oh! my brodder, my brodder."
"I say, it would be a great shame to allow these murderous scoundrels to
put the poor fellow to death," exclaimed Charley. "If the old woman
dies they'll make short work of him; I propose that we set off and claim
him as our servant, threatening them with the vengeance of England
should a shock of his woolly pate be injured."
Aboh, who understood what was said, cried out, "Tankee, massa, tankee,
no let my brodder die."
We scarcely needed this appeal from the faithful Aboh to run every risk
for the sake of rescuing his brother.
"Never fear, we will do what we can to save him," said Charley, "but do
you remain in the house, lest that abominable juggler takes it into his
wicked head to accuse you as well as your brother."
Aboh was very thankful to follow this advice, indeed, he was scarcely
fit to accompany us, so overcome was he by the fears of death for
himself and his brother, increased by the superstitious dread he had of
the doctor. Shouldering our arms, with our knapsacks on our backs, we
left the house, closing the door behind us, and marched boldly towards
the fetish house, a sort of temple situated near the residence of the
king. The number of people collected round it showed that something was
going forward. At the further end of the structure--a sort of temple
composed of rough timber with a thatched roof--was a hideous idol
standing in a shrine raised on an altar, for such it resembled, possibly
imitated from the Portuguese who once held sway in the land, and
established for a short period what they called Christianity, although
it was in reality an idolatrous system, scarcely superior in the effect
it produced on the moral and religious sentiments of the people to that
which it displaced. This Christianity, however, such as it was, had
long ago been overthrown, and only such slight traces as I now observed
remained. I may here remark, that wherever the Spaniards and Portuguese
have established their religion, the people have invariably sunk back
again into the barbarism and gross idolatry of their original state,
indeed, it might be safe to say that they were never really raised out
of idolatry. On getting nearer we saw that the king was standing in
front of the temple, with a drawn scimitar of enormous size in his hand.
We were hurrying forward, when the starling cry arose. "The queen is
dead, the queen is dead!"
The multitude immediately uttered the most piercing shrieks and
lamentations. Directly afterwards we caught sight of the hideous
doctor, or priest, urging on a party who were dragging forward a person
between them. We did not at first see the features of the latter, and
it was not until he had been hauled up on the platform, where the king
was standing, that we discovered him to be our friend Shimbo. His hands
were tied behind his back, so that he was unable to make any movement
with them. He cast an imploring look around him, for he knew but too
well why he was brought there.
Harry on seeing him shouted out to the king: "Let that man go, he is our
servant."
But the king, taking no notice of what was said, flourished his long
sword. The multitude shouted and howled, the weapon flashed in the
sunlight, and the next instant Shimbo fell, and his head rolled along
the floor of the temple. The maddened cries of the superstitious mob on
this grew louder, and many of the elders and chiefs of the people,
rushing forward, bowed themselves before the king.
We were horror-struck at what we had seen, and we had also reason to
fear, from the savage looks that the people cast at us, that we
ourselves were in no slight danger. The juggler might at any moment
accuse us of sorcery, and, in the excited state of mind in which the
people surrounding us then were, they might set upon us, and in spite of
the resistance we might make, tear us limb from limb. Fortunately for
us, the names of three other persons were shouted out as having taken
part in the enchantment which had destroyed the queen. As the mob were
occupied with them, we beat a retreat in a dignified war to our house.
Without telling Aboh what had happened, we placed him in our midst, and
avoiding the excited multitude, made our way down to the river. If we
were to save Iguma, we must carry her off at once without waiting for
the night, for the instant the priest had pronounced her name, the
crowd, in overwhelming numbers, would rush to her house to seize her,
and even Kendo himself would be utterly unable to afford her protection.
All this time we knew by the hideous din that the cruel executions were
going forward. As long as the people were thus engaged we might be
unmolested, but should a new victim be required, they would at once come
rushing towards the house of the prince. We dreaded every instant to
hear their voices approaching. We had already reached the bank of the
river, but could find no canoes fit for our purpose. The prince's house
was, I should have said, some way along the bank. We hurried towards
it. As we got near Kendo himself sprang out to meet us.
"My wife is in the canoe," he exclaimed, "quick, quick!"
There was good reason for our hastening, for after a few minutes'
cessation of the uproar, the din from the vast multitude again burst
forth. Kendo was certain that they were coming towards us. Not a
moment was to be lost. Several canoes were on the bank, one was already
in the water smaller than the others. Kendo pointed it out to Charley
and me, and entreated us to jump in, observing as he did so: "Wife
dare." We thought that he was about to follow, but instead of doing so,
he gave the canoe a shove off with all his might into the middle of the
stream, and then assisted Harry and the rest to launch another.
As soon as we found ourselves adrift, we each took a paddle and made
down with the current. If we were to save Iguma's life, we had no time
to spare. Already we could see a mass of black forms coming rushing
frantically towards the river flourishing their weapons, while the air
was filled with the cries they uttered. Two other canoes contained the
remainder of our party, Kendo being accompanied by a single faithful
attendant who had acted as his henchman and companion on all our hunting
expeditions. Just as they were on the point of shoving off, a white man
appeared on the bank, and without apparently even asking permission,
leapt into one of the canoes. Instantly she shoved off and came
paddling after us. Kendo shouted to us to go on and not stop for
anything; a piece of advice we saw the wisdom of following.
As Iguma was the chief object of the savages pursuit, it was of the
greatest importance to get her beyond their reach. She lay all this
time, I should have said, at the bottom of the boat, covered up with a
piece of matting, but she uttered no expressions of terror now that she
thought she was safe. Had we delayed another minute, not only would
Iguma have been captured, but we should ourselves very likely have lost
our lives. Scarcely had the other canoe got away from the shore, than a
vast multitude of infuriated natives, uttering the most fearful yells,
appeared on the banks. We naturally expected to be immediately
followed, but, as we looked astern, we saw no canoes being launched. We
were not aware at the time that Kendo had thoughtfully concealed all the
paddles, or had so injured the canoes that they were unfit to put off.
"Paddle on, paddle on," he kept shouting to us, and we were, as may be
imagined, well disposed to follow his advice. We wished, however, that
he had come with us, both to act as pilot and to assist in the defence
of his wife, for he was a brave fellow, and would certainly have fought
to the last. Though it was still daylight, evening was approaching. We
hoped during the darkness to get far beyond the pursuit of the savages,
who would, we felt sure, endeavour to obtain possession of Iguma, and to
wreak their vengeance on our heads for attempting to carry her off. Had
the course of the river been straight, there would have been no doubt
about our ultimate escape, but it made numerous bends, sometimes running
to the north, then to the south, then again to the west, so that it
would be a long time before we could get out of the territory owned by
King Kickubaroo. Now and then also the river was very broad, extending
almost into a lake. This under some, circumstances might be to our
advantage, but during the night we ran the risk of losing our way, for
though Charley still had in his possession the pocket compass, it was so
dark that we could not see it, and we did not venture to strike a light.
Charley and I, however, paddled along with all our might, hoping that
even should our savage pursuers again catch sight of us, they would be
still unable to procure canoes in which to follow us.
The night was unusually dark, and by Charley's advice we all kept
silence, that our voices might not betray our position, should there be
any of the enemy near us. Although our canoe was somewhat smaller than
the others, yet as they were more heavily laden, we managed to keep
ahead. We must have paddled on for a couple of hours or so, when we
found ourselves on a broad lake. A thick mist obscured the sky, so that
not a star was twinkling overhead to guide us, and we were only able to
steer by ascertaining in which direction the current was running. The
darkness was so great that we could not even see the other canoes, and
we were afraid, for the reason I have before mentioned, of shouting to
attract their notice. We thought that unless we paddled on we should be
overtaken by daylight. At length, however, my strength began to fail,
my arms ached, though by this time I was pretty well used to bodily
exertion. Charley continued working away without uttering a word, and
sometimes I wished that he would speak, for the silence oppressed me;
Iguma lay perfectly still in the bottom of the canoe; it was evident she
fully comprehended the danger we were in.
On we went, hour after hour passed by. Daylight broke sooner than I had
expected, and yet it seemed that we had been in the canoe a long time.
A mist hung over the water shrouding all objects, so that we were unable
to see the land, or discover which bank we were nearest. Though we
listened attentively, we could not hear the slightest splash of paddles
to indicate the whereabouts of our friends. We were afraid that
something had happened to them, either that they had been overtaken, or
that the canoes had run on snags. We said nothing to Iguma, however,
lest we should alarm her, but it was absolutely necessary that we should
rest our arms and take some food, of which we had brought a supply in
our knapsacks, some also had been put in the canoe. Not knowing how far
off the shore we were, we allowed the canoe to drift down, while we took
in our paddles and got out our provisions. We invited Iguma to take
some breakfast; she, pointing to some plantains and roast yams,
signified that they would satisfy her hunger.
"Come, I think we ought to take to our paddles again," said Charley,
when we had finished our meal. "How do your arms feel, Dick?"
"Ready for work, though I should be glad to give them a few hours'
rest," I answered--"but softly, where are we?"
As I spoke, I found that the canoe had drifted in among some tall reeds,
which showed that we were nearer the shore than we expected. While we
were attempting to paddle out from among them, a breeze blew the mist
away, and what was our astonishment, not to say dismay, to see a number
of blacks standing on the banks and regarding us attentively. They had
probably heard us talking and making a splashing while endeavouring to
extricate the canoe from the reeds into which it had drifted. No sooner
did they discover us than a dozen of them, or more, armed with spears
and lances, plunged into the water and began swimming towards us.
"Put down your paddle and take your gun," cried Charley, "these fellows
mean mischief."
All this time Iguma had not moved. The blacks, seeing only two white
men in the canoe, thought that they would easily master us, and swam
boldly forward.
"I suppose that there are no crocodiles hereabouts, or those fellows
will be picked up to a certainty by one of the beasts; we must not trust
to that, however, but when the men come near enough, shoot them without
ceremony," exclaimed Charley.
Standing up in the canoe we warned the blacks to go back, but they took
no notice of what we said.
"Their blood be on their own heads--fire, Dick."
We both pulled our triggers, one black threw up his arms and floated
down the stream wounded, another dived, still I felt sure that I had hit
him. The rest, undaunted, came on while we were reloading. Three were
close upon us, and several others were not far behind them; one had
actually got hold of the gunwale of the canoe, while Charley was aiming
at another a short distance off. He fired, the black letting go his
spear, threw up his arms. The first, however, might in another instant
have climbed into the canoe, when Iguma, springing up with an axe in her
hand, dealt him a blow on the head; without a cry he dropped back and
sank immediately. I fired, and the rest seeing the fate of their
companions, turned about and made for the shore. This gave us time to
reload and be ready should any fresh ones come off to renew the attack.
They appeared, however, to have had enough of it, and we, putting down
our rifles, again took to our paddles and urged the canoe further out
into the river, which was here very broad and the current slow. Still
it ran at a sufficient speed to enable us to ascertain the direction we
were to take. We now had time to look-out for our companions. They
were nowhere to be seen, and we were still in doubt as to whether they
were ahead or astern of us. Charley thought they must have paddled on
and gone ahead, and if so, we should overtake them before long. We
were, however, still followed by other bodies of our enemies along the
shore, for those we had encountered were evidently only a small party,
and, probably, others would be waiting for us close to the banks.
CHAPTER SIXTEEN.
IGUMA RELIEVES ME AT THE PADDLE--WE REJOIN OUR COMPANION!--CHARLEY HAS
THE "WATCH BELOW"--WRECK OF KENDO'S CANOE--I RECOGNISE HERMAN JANSEN
AMONG OUR PARTY--NECESSITY OF TAKING REST--A NARROW ESCAPE FROM SURPRISE
BY A PARTY OF NATIVES--TEMPTATION TO KILL RESISTED--A DANGEROUS ENEMY--
HIPPOPOTAMI--OUR OTHER CANOE DESTROYED--FATE OF THE MURDERER OF CAPTAIN
RODERICK--WE DETERMINE TO DIVIDE OUR PARTY, AND, FOLLOWING THE COURSE OF
THE RIVER, MARCH TOWARDS THE SEABOARD, TAKING IT TURN AND TURN ABOUT IN
THE CANOE--A FEARFUL STORM--OUR ONLY CANOE CRUSHED--CONTINUATION OF THE
JOURNEY ON FOOT--THE "SPARKLING OCEAN" ONCE MORE IN SIGHT--WAITING FOR A
SAIL--THE SIGNAL ANSWERED--CAPTAIN MAGOR--ON BOARD THE "ARROW"--
CONCLUSION.
Believing that our friends were ahead, we paddled on with all our might.
It was of the greatest importance that we should join them before we
were again attacked, for, united, we might set at defiance any number of
our pursuers likely to assail us. As may be supposed, our arms ached,
and though we paddled on mechanically, I felt very sleepy, and
occasionally my eyelids closed. As the sun got up the heat became
excessive, but we did not dare to stop even for a few seconds under the
trees which shaded the banks, lest any of our enemies might be lurking
near, and might pounce down upon us. At last Iguma, who had been
sitting watching us, offered to take my paddle. At first I felt ashamed
to let her have it. "Give it up to her," said Charley. "I daresay she
understands how to handle it as well as you do, and we shall make better
way."
I at length consented. When she had the paddle in her hand I lay down
in her place at the bottom of the canoe, and I soon saw that she was
working away with far more energy than I had lately shown. I watched
her for a few minutes admiring the grace and dexterity with which she
plied the paddle, and then my eyelids closed, and in another instant I
was fast asleep. I do not think I ever enjoyed a more sound slumber,
lulled by the ripple of the water on the side of the canoe as we glided
rapidly along. Charley, being older and more inured to labour, was able
to keep up better than I was, and I knew that he would not give in while
there was any necessity for his exerting himself. I had pulled the
matting over my head to preserve myself from the heat of the sun, which
struck down with great force on the calm water.
"There they are, there they are!" I heard Charley shouting out.
His words awoke me, and starting up I could distinguish two dots on the
water right ahead.
"Are they our friends, though?" I asked Charley, after I had gazed at
them a few seconds.
"I hope so," he answered. "I felt sure that they were ahead of us, for,
thinking that we were before them, they have been paddling on, expecting
all the while to overtake us."
"What does Iguma think?" I said, and tried to make her understand that
we wanted to know whether the canoes we saw were those of our friends.
To my great satisfaction she appeared to have no doubt about the matter.
I then begged that she would let me have the paddle again, but she
smiled and replied that her arms did not ache, and advised me to take my
brother's paddle.
"I don't mind if you do for ten minutes or so, I will then resume it and
try if we cannot come up with the other canoes," said Charley.
"How long have I been asleep?" I asked him, as I took his place.
"Three or four hours, I suspect," he answered, "though I have not had
time to look at my watch."
As I thought would very likely be the case, no sooner did Charley lie
down than he dropped off into a sound sleep. As after my long rest I
felt very capable of work, I determined not to arouse him, treating him
as he had treated me.
Iguma and I made the canoe glide rapidly over the water. A light breeze
had sprung up, somewhat cooling the air and enabling us to increase our
exertions. I eagerly watched the canoes ahead, and felt sure that we
were gaining on them. I wondered, however, that no one on board saw us,
and could only suppose that those who were not paddling were asleep,
while, of course, the paddlers had their backs towards us, and believing
that we were ahead did not trouble themselves to look astern.
At length I thought that they were near enough to make them hear me. At
first I thought of firing my rifle, but the sound would, to a certainty,
show our whereabouts to our enemies should they still be pursuing us,
whereas my voice could be heard to any distance along the water alone.
Acting on the impulse of the moment, I shouted out at the top of my
voice. Charley started up, thinking that something was the matter. On
seeing the canoes he joined his voice to mine.
At length they ceased paddling; as they did so I cried out:
"I fear, after all, they are enemies. See, those are black fellows
standing up in the canoe nearest us."
"If they are we must fight our way past them," observed Charley; "they
have no firearms, and we can knock over several of them before they get
up alongside, and should they do that we must fight them hand to hand;
Iguma has shown that she is well able to defend herself; at all events,
a few minutes will settle the matter."
We again took to our paddles, and I, making a sign to Iguma to sit down
again in the canoe, took her place. We had not gone far before Charley
shouted out, "Hurrah! it's all right, I see Harry's and Tom's
broad-brimmed hats, and I make out two white men in the other canoe."
We were soon up to our friends, who greeted us warmly, they all along
having fancied that we were ahead, and under that belief having paddled
on, incited to exertions by occasionally hearing the voices of their
pursuers as they cut off the bends of the river. They were of opinion,
however, that we were now well ahead of them,--still we agreed that,
during the remainder of daylight, it would be safer to continue our
course.
The river now narrowed considerably, and the current became much more
rapid than it had been hitherto. Kendo and his henchman, with Harry and
Tom, led the way.
We were gliding quickly on, when suddenly Kendo's canoe spun round, and
filling was driven against some rocks whose black heads rose above the
foaming water. We narrowly avoided the danger, and as we shot by had
just time to help Harry, who held on tight to his gun, on board, while
Kendo, striking out, got up alongside us, and with the aid of Iguma also
scrambled in.
"Never mind me," cried out Tom, who was standing on the half sunken
canoe, "I'll get into the other. Steer over this way, mates," he
shouted out to the men in the other canoe.
We had no time to render him assistance, and had to exert our skill to
prevent our canoe running against some more rocks which appeared ahead.
In less time than it has taken to describe the occurrence we were again
in tranquil water, when looking round we were thankful to see Tom and
Kendo's henchman safely seated in Caspar's canoe. The wrecked canoe was
in the meantime dashed to pieces, so as to be rendered perfectly
useless. We were somewhat crowded, but that could not be helped, and we
hoped that we should not meet with more rapids in our course; although
we might manage to swim on shore, should any accident occur, we should
probably lose our rifles and knapsacks, and at all events damage our
ammunition. We waited until Tom's canoe came up with us. I now
recognised the stranger who had got on board just as they were shoving
off as Herman Jansen, the murderer of Captain Roderick. His countenance
wore the same gloomy expression as before. By his manner, however, he
appeared not to be conscious that we were witnesses of the fearful deed
he had committed, and under the circumstances we were placed, Harry and
Charley agreed with me that it would not be wise in any way to allude to
it. He had brought a rifle with him, how procured we could not tell.
That would, of course, be of assistance should we be again attacked.
From what we could learn from Kendo, we had too much reason to fear that
we should meet with numerous enemies on our way down the river, who
would only be restrained from attacking us by seeing our means of
defence.
He advised that we should keep our weapons ready for instant use.
Another night was approaching. It was absolutely necessary that we
should seek some place of shelter where we could rest for a few hours,
as it would otherwise be impossible to paddle on during another day. We
had fortunately a sufficient supply of cooked food, so that we had no
need to go on shore and light a fire. Seeing a wooded point on the
south bank of the river, where the trees overhung the water, we agreed
to paddle in and secure the canoes. After supper it was arranged that
some of us should lie down while the rest sat up and kept watch, so that
we might be ready to defend ourselves against either human foes or any
savage creatures which might be on the look-out for prey.
We had remained at rest a couple of hours, when as Harry and I were
sitting up while the remainder of the party were sleeping, we heard
voices approaching, and looking out we saw a number of black forms
gliding through the forest. From the way they approached, however, the
savages could not have expected to surprise us, we therefore concluded
that they were entirely ignorant of our whereabouts. Presently they
came to a halt about a couple of hundred yards from where our canoes
lay. We saw a light struck and they soon had a fire kindled, around
which they seated themselves. In a short time other blacks arrived, and
they all began to cook the provisions they had brought with them. It
was very evident they had not forgotten a supply of palm-wine, which
they must have quaffed pretty freely, as ere long several of them got up
and began dancing away furiously. Others joined them, until the greater
number were dancing round and round the fire, snapping their fingers,
kicking out their legs, and giving vent to the most hideous yells and
shrieks of laughter, the sounds echoing through the forest being
answered by the jabberings of monkeys and the cries of night birds.
Whether these were our pursuers or some other tribe indulging in a night
orgy we could not tell. Kendo touched Charley's rifle as a sign for him
to fire. My brother shook his head and answered--
"We none of us wish to injure any of the poor fellows unless compelled
to do so in self-defence. The sooner we get away from this the better.
We shall not be discovered while all this uproar is going on, and may be
far down the river before the blacks recover their senses."
Kendo rather unwillingly took his paddle, and Charley setting the
example, we cautiously cast off from the branch to which we were moored
and got up to the other canoe. Telling Tom that we were going to
continue our course down the river, we paddled on.
"Let us have a shot at the niggers," I heard Jansen say to his
companions; "we might knock over a dozen before they could get near us."
"Pull on, mate," said Tom; "what would be the use of injuring the
people? they can do us no harm."
Aboh seeing us going ahead, took his paddle, Tom doing the same,
compelled the others to do so likewise. As I looked round I saw them
following us. We continued our way during the greater part of the
night, Kendo being sure that we were keeping the right course. We were
thankful, however, once more to bring up, when we believed that we had
put sufficient distance between ourselves and our pursuers, and that
there was now no longer any fear of our being overtaken by them. We had
another enemy, however, to contend with. As we lay moored to the bank
we heard grunting sounds, and a splashing which proceeded, we well knew,
from hippopotami, and from the frequency and loudness of the noises we
had good reason to believe that a number of the creatures were either
sporting about or feeding near us. However, they seldom attack canoes
so as to injure them intentionally and are generally greatly afraid of
human beings either when on shore or in the water.
Huge and awkward as they are, they can run, and manage to make good
progress over the ground, which they do when in search of grass, the
food they live on. The bodies of those we saw were fully as large as
elephants, although, having short legs, they were of a very different
height, indeed, their bellies almost sweep the ground as they walk.
Their feet are constructed in a very curious manner, to enable them to
walk among the reeds and over the mud, as also to swim with ease. The
hoof is divided into four short unconnected toes, which they can spread
out like the feet of the camel when moving over the soft mud, or when
swimming. The skin, which is almost entirely hairless, except in a few
spots, is of a yellowish colour, the lower part assuming almost a
pinkish hue. The head is hideous in the extreme, and armed with huge
crooked tusks, the object of which is not so much for defence, as to dig
up grass from the bottom of the river. These tusks afford the whitest
ivory to be procured. There must have been thirty or forty of these
creatures gambolling about around us. In spite of their noise, "those
who had the watch below," as Charley called it, slept as soundly as
tops.
As soon as the sun rose the next morning, we went on shore for the first
time since we had embarked, but no enemies were in sight, and we
ventured to breakfast comfortably on the bank; Harry and I having shot
several birds which contributed to the repast. As soon as breakfast was
over, we continued our course, as we were anxious to get into a district
where people were accustomed to white men, and were likely to assist us.
Our canoe was leading, Tom being a little astern. We were just rounding
a point where the water was somewhat shallow, when I heard a cry from
the canoe astern. Upon looking round, I saw it lifted high in the air,
and turned bottom upwards, while beneath it appeared a huge
hippopotamus, which was making after one of the men; another man was on
the point of being pitched on the creature's back, the two blacks, with
their legs in the air, were falling into the water, and one of the men,
who seemed to have sprung on shore, was scrambling up the bank. I saw
all this at a glance, the next instant a fearful shriek escaped the
swimmer, the huge hippopotamus had pierced him with its tusks, and
seemed bent on venting its rage upon him.
For an instant I feared that the victim was our friend Tom, but his
voice reassured me, and I saw the good boatswain making for the bank,
which his other companion had gained. The two blacks quickly followed.
Just then catching sight of the countenance of the man attacked by the
hippopotamus, I recognised Jansen, the murderer of Captain Roderick.
Before either of us could raise our rifles to fire at the beast the
miserable man had been dragged down beneath the water by the infuriated
monster. We were on the point of returning to try and secure the canoe,
when the hippopotamus again rose, and seizing the side in his huge
mouth, crushed it to pieces, and we were thankful to paddle off to save
our canoe from a like fate. We had now to consider what was to be done.
We could not possibly take all the party into our canoe, nor could we
leave any of them behind us. The blacks would to a certainty have been
seized and carried off into slavery, unless protected by us. We were
still, we calculated, a hundred miles or more from the coast; our only
mode of proceeding, therefore, was for one party to continue along the
shore, while the other paddled the canoe, and to relieve each other at
intervals. We continued on in this fashion the greater part of the day,
not meeting with another canoe or any habitations.
As evening approached, having reached an open spot, we agreed to encamp
there that we might shoot some game, as our stock of provisions was
reduced to a very low ebb.
Tom and Caspar, who had been walking the greater part of the day along
the bank, were glad to take charge of the camp, while Charley, Harry,
and I, with Kendo, went out in search of game. We were fortunate in
killing two deer, several birds, and a couple of monkeys, and on our
return we found that Iguma had not been idle, and had collected a supply
of fruits and nuts, which, with the remainder of the plantain, gave us
an abundant meal. There was still some time before dark, which we
occupied in building a hut for the young lady, while we put up shelters
for ourselves, and collected a large supply of sticks, so that we could
have a blazing fire during the night. This was very necessary, as we
had seen traces of wild beasts, and we might have otherwise very likely
been visited by some of them. All of us required as much sleep as we
could get. As soon as supper was over, we set the watch and lay down
under our lean-to's, which were, should have said, at a sufficient
distance from the water to avoid the risk of any of us being carried off
by a hungry crocodile. I had been some hours asleep, forgetting
entirely where we were, when I was awakened by a tremendous crash of
thunder. Starting up, I heard crash succeeding crash, while vivid
flashes of lightning darted from the sky, and went playing round us like
fiery serpents. The wind at the same time began to blow with a fury we
had not encountered since we landed on the shores of Africa, but as it
was off the land we were partly sheltered by the forest, and it did not
send the waves up the bank. Our lean-to's were speedily blown down. In
a short time the rain came down in torrents, and had we not just before
made up the fire it would at once have been put out. Fortunately
Iguma's hut stood, and she invited us all in to take shelter beneath its
roof, which, being composed of several layers of large leaves, fastened
down by vines, sheltered us from the pitiless storm. There we all sat
for the remainder of the night, all huddled up like so many mummies, and
a curious picture we must have presented.
Towards morning the hurricane abated, Tom and Aboh rushing out managed
to scrape together the ashes of the fire which was not wholly
extinguished, and again made it up. Shortly afterwards dawn broke.
Uncomfortable as I was, I was actually dozing when I heard Tom cry out--
"The canoe, the canoe, where is she?"
We all of us jumped up and hurried to the beach, when what was our
dismay to find that the tree to which the canoe had been made fast had,
riven by the storm, fallen and crushed it to pieces. On examining it we
saw at once that to repair it would be hopeless, and we had now only to
make up our minds once more to continue our journey overland.
Fortunately we had still enough ammunition remaining to kill game for
our support, but it was necessary carefully to husband it, Charley at
once called a council of war.
"One thing is certain. We must not delay," he observed, "for even when
we do reach the coast, we don't know how long we may be detained, and
unless we fall in with friendly savages we may find it difficult to
procure food; or, perhaps, indeed have to fight our way. We are bound
also to protect the blacks who are trusting to us, for depend upon it,
every attempt will be made by the slave-trading rascals on the coast to
detain them."
Every one agreed with Charley, and without loss of time we commenced our
march. I have already described travelling in Africa, so that I need
not enter into the details of the journey we performed. We passed
through the neighbourhood of several villages, from the inhabitants of
which, with the remainder of the beads and the trinkets we possessed, we
purchased food so that we were able to husband our powder and shot. Two
attempts were made to carry off our black friends, but by showing a bold
front and by pushing on, we prevented them from being made prisoners.
The health of all the party was wonderfully preserved, indeed the
climate, though so close under the line--from the nature of the soil--is
superior to that further north. At length to our great joy we caught
sight from a rising ground of the blue ocean sparkling in the distance.
We had been two weeks performing the journey. We found that we had hit
the shore some way to the south of the river, at a spot where a fine
sheltered bay afforded a tempting harbour to any ships cruising off the
coast, and the clear sparkling stream, which flowed down from the hill
side at which vessels could obtain water, made it still more a likely
spot to be touched at.
We accordingly determined to pitch our camp there, near a wood from
which we could obtain materials for building huts, and an ample supply
of fuel for our fires as well as game for our food. It seemed
surprising that no blacks should have taken up their abode in what
appeared to us so fine a situation. We lost no time in erecting our
huts, and making ourselves, as Tom called it, "at home."
Of course we could not tell how long we might be detained there. Day
after day passed by, no ship appeared in sight. At length Charley
proposed proceeding to the northward, but Harry and I urged him to wait
patiently a little longer.
That same evening my brother and I had strolled out from our camp to
enjoy the freshness of the breeze along the sea shore. A light wind
played over the water, the stars shone forth with wonderful brilliancy.
We were tempted to sit down on the rocks, where we remained talking over
our prospects for some time, when Charley exclaimed--
"Look there, Dick, look there! a vessel, as I'm alive, she's standing
into the bay. She's no stranger to it, or she would not come here
during the dark. We must make a signal and try to attract her
attention, though it is pretty certain that she will send a boat on
shore early in the morning, yet it will be trying to have to wait until
then to know what she is."
There was abundance of drift wood on the beach which we quickly
collected, and Charley having fortunately a tinder-box in his pocket, we
had no difficulty in kindling a blaze. As soon as we got a brand
burning I took it up, and swinging it round my head threw it high into
the air. A second and a third time I did the same, when as I threw up a
fourth brand, the signal was answered by a rocket which rose from the
vessel.
Before many minutes were over we heard the splash of oars, and could
distinguish a boat. We both shouted, our hail was answered by an
English voice. In another five minutes the stem of the boat touched the
beach, and a person sprang on shore.
"Who are you? where do you come from?" exclaimed a voice which I well
knew. It was that of Captain Magor. The next instant we were all
warmly shaking hands.
Harry and Tom hearing our shouts had hurried down to the beach. Our
surprise and satisfaction were mutual. We very quickly told him our
adventures, and he then informed us that he had played the same trick on
the pirates which they had played on Lieutenant Hallton, and that having
recaptured the "Arrow" he had carried her safely back to England, and
that he had now just arrived on the coast, the only misfortune which had
happened to him being the death of a young man who had come out as
supercargo.
"You may therefore still be of the greatest assistance to me," he said,
"and having now learned something of the language, and being
acclimatised, you will be able to transact business with the natives far
better than you could otherwise have done."
We then told him of our black followers, who would, we believed, be of
still greater assistance in procuring the articles we required, and
disposing of the goods we had brought.
Iguma and Kendo were somewhat alarmed at first at the thought of going
on board a ship, but we soon overcame their fears, and the next morning
we all went on board, bidding farewell to our encampment, and once more
trod the deck of the "Arrow."
Harry and I resumed our berths on board, as did Tom Tubbs, for the
boatswain who had come out had already fallen sick and was unable to do
duty.
Caspar entered as one of the ship's company, as did Aboh, Captain Magor
arranged to carry Kendo and Iguma with their followers to England, if
they preferred going there to being landed at one of the English
settlements on the coast.
I must now bring my tale rapidly to a conclusion. Kendo and his wife--
wisely, I think--determined not to go to England.
A week afterwards we fell in with the "Rover," when Charley rejoined his
ship, taking the blacks with him, the captain kindly promising to land
them at Cape Coast Castle, where they would be properly treated and
looked after. With the information we had gained, we were so well able
to conduct our transactions, that our voyage was the most successful
ever made by the "Arrow," and we had the satisfaction of meeting with
the approval of our employers, and receiving substantial
acknowledgments.
Of course our disappearance had caused very great anxiety to our
friends, though they had been buoyed up by the hope that we would surely
return.
Harry and I having married the young ladies to whom we had so long been
attached, entered the firm, and on the death of that kind and excellent
man Mr Swab, we found that he had divided his fortune between us.
THE END.
End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Two Supercargoes, by W.H.G. Kingston
*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TWO SUPERCARGOES ***
***** This file should be named 21490.txt or 21490.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/4/9/21490/
Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.
Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.
*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that
- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
Project Gutenberg-tm works.
- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
of receipt of the work.
- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
[email protected]. Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org
For additional contact information:
Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chief Executive and Director
[email protected]
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.
Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
http://www.gutenberg.org
This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
